Home

MAC Notification Port Settings - D-Link

image

Contents

1. Figure 3 11 Q in Q Settings window The following fields can be set Parameter Description Q in Q Global Click the radio button to enable or disable the Q in Q Global Settings Settings From Port To Port A consecutive group of ports that are part of the VLAN configuration starting with the selected port The user can choose between UNI or NNI role UNI To select a user network interface which specifies that communication between the specified user and a specified network will occur NNI To select a network to network interface specifies that communication between two specified networks will occur Outer TPID hex The Outer TPID is used for learning and switching packets The Outer TPID constructs and 0x1 Oxffff inserts the outer tag into the packet based on the VLAN ID and Inner Priority Trust CVID Enable or disable the Trust Customer VLAN ID CVID If the state is Enabled use the CVID from the customer s packet as the VLAN ID of the SPVLAN tag The default is Disabled VLAN Translation Enable or disable VLAN Translation This translates the VLAN IDs carried in the data packets received from private networks into those used in the Service Provider s network The default is Disabled Note To use this function Trust CVID must also be enabled Click Apply to implement changes 71 VLAN Translation Settings VLAN translation translat
2. Figure 5 9 Port Security Port Settings window The following parameters can be set Parameter Description From Port To Port A consecutive group of ports may be configured starting with the selected port Admin State This pull down menu allows you to enable or disable Port Security locked MAC address table for the selected ports Max Learning The number of MAC addresses that will be in the MAC address forwarding table for the Address 0 64 selected switch and group of ports Lock Address This pull down menu allows you to select how the MAC address table locking will be Mode implemented on the Switch for the selected group of ports The options are Permanent The locked addresses will not age out after the aging timer expires Delete on Timeout The locked addresses will age out after the aging timer expires Delete on Reset The locked addresses will not age out until the Switch has been reset Click Apply to implement changes made 143 Port Security FDB Entries This window is used to clear the Port Lock Entries by individual ports To clear entries enter the range of ports and click Clear To view the following window click Security gt Port Security gt Port Security FDB Entries Clear Locked Entries FromPot n w mo Total Entries 0 MAC Address Figure 5 10 Port Security FDB Entries window 802 1 X The IEEE 802 1X standard is a security measure for authorizing and au
3. Community Community Community Community Communit Community restricted Community Communit Community Community Community Community oM hl Py SMMPy3 SoM hl Py oM fl Py SMM Py SMMPy2 ohh Py oN MPy2 MoAuthhoPriv NoAuthboPriv MoAuthihoPriy MoAuthhoPriv MNosuthMNoP rv MoAuthboPriw MoAuthhoPriy MoAuthhoPriv Delete Delete Delete Delete Delete Delete Delete Figure 2 33 SNMP Group Table window To delete an existing SNMP Group Table entry click the corresponding Delete button The following parameters can be set Parameter Group Name Read View Name Write View Name Notify View Name User based Security Model Description Type an alphanumeric string of up to 32 characters This is used to identify the new SNMP group of SNMP users Specify an SNMP group name for users that are allowed SNMP read privileges to the Switch s SNMP agent Specify an SNMP group name for users that are allowed SNMP write privileges to the Switch s SNMP agent Specify an SNMP group name for users that can receive SNMP trap messages generated by the Switch s SNMP agent SNMPv1 Specifies that SNMP version 1 will be used SNMPv2 Specifies that SNMP version 2c will be used The SNMPv2 supports both 41 centralized and distributed network management strategies It includes improvements in the Structure of Management Information SMI and adds some security
4. IFE ACL Packet Content ACL You can select the field in the packet to create filtering mask IPvb Class IFG Flow Label IPv6 Class C IFPv6 Class IPv6 Flow Label Pye Flow Label IPv6 Address O irv sourcemask ooo PVG Destination Mask Figure 6 86 Add CPU ACL Profile window for IPv6 example Click on the boxes at the top of the table which will then turn red and reveal parameters for configuration To create a new entry enter the correct information and click Create To return to the CPU Access Profile List window click lt lt Back The following parameters can be set for Pv6 Parameter Description Select Profile 1D Enter an integer used to identify the access profile that will be configured with this command IPv6 Class Ticking this check box will instruct the Switch to examine the class field of the IPv6 header The class field is a part of the packet header that is similar to the Type of Service ToS or Precedence bits field in IPv4 IPv6 Flow Label Ticking this check box will instruct the Switch to examine the flow label field of the IPv6 header The flow label field is used by a source to label sequences of packets such as non default quality of service or real time service packets IPv6 Address IPv6 Source Address Enter an IPv6 address to be used as the source address IPv6 Destination Address Enter an IPv6 address that will be used as the destination address Clic
5. 0 auto Setting O for the external cost will automatically set the speed for forwarding packets to the specified port s in the list for optimal efficiency Default port cost 100Mbps port 200000 Gigabit port 20000 value 1 200000000 Define a value between 1 and 200000000 to determine the external cost The lower the number the greater the probability the port will be chosen to forward packets Setting this parameter as Yes will set the ports to send out BPDU packets to other bridges requesting information on their STP setting If the Switch is configured for RSTP the port will be capable to migrate from 802 1D STP to 802 1w RSTP Migration should be set as yes on ports connected to network stations or segments that are capable of being upgraded to 802 1w RSTP on all or some portion of the segment Choosing the True parameter indicates a point to point P2P shared link P2P ports are similar to edge ports however they are restricted in that a P2P port must operate in full duplex Like edge ports P2P ports transition to a forwarding state rapidly thus benefiting from RSTP A p2p value of false indicates that the port cannot have p2p status Auto allows the port to have p2p status whenever possible and operate as if the p2p status were true lf the port cannot maintain this status for example if the port is forced to half duplex operation the p2p status changes to operate as if the p2p value were False The default setting for
6. 1 00 8016 3505404 DOO0r00 05 02 25 25 10 63 10 1160TE Anonymous gt Boot up firmware Firmware Update through SSH WEB Firmware Update through WEB Sli Firmware update through Single IF Management SNMP Firmware update through SMMP TELNED Firmware update through TELNET CONSOLE Firmware update through CONSOLE Figure 2 25 Firmware Information window This window holds the following information Parameter Description States the image ID number of the firmware in the Switch s memory The Switch can store two firmware images for use Image ID 1 will be the default boot up firmware for the Switch unless otherwise configured by the user States the firmware version Size Bytes States the size of the corresponding firmware in bytes Update Time States the specific time the firmware version was downloaded to the Switch From States the IP address of the origin of the firmware me States the user who downloaded the firmware This field may read Anonymous or Unknown for users that are unidentified 33 SNTP Settings The SNTP Settings folder offers two windows Time Settings and Time Zone Settings Time Settings To configure the time settings for the Switch click Configuration gt SNTP Settings gt Time Settings Status SNTP State Disabled Enabled Current Time OOOO 00 44 22 Time Source Apply SNTP Settings SMTP First Server SMTP Second Server SMTP Poll interval
7. 224 xStack DES 3200 10 18 28 28F Layer 2 Ethernet Managed Switch User Manual RADIUS Account Client This window shows managed objects used for managing RADIUS accounting clients and the current statistics associated with them To view the RADIUS Account Client window click Monitoring gt Port Access Control gt RADIUS Account Client Clear Serverindex InvalidServer ddr Identifier ServerAddr ServerPortumber RoundTripTime AAA A A D Link 1053131499 D Link D Link Figure 7 18 RADIUS Account Client window The user may also select the desired time interval to update the statistics between 7s and 60s where s stands for seconds The default value is one second To clear the current statistics shown click the C ear button in the top left hand corner 225 The following information is displayed Parameter Description InvalidServerAddresses The number of RADIUS Accounting Response packets received from unknown addresses The NAS Identifier of the RADIUS account This is not necessarily the same as sysName in MIB II Serverlndex The identification number assigned to each RADIUS Accounting server that it shares a secret with ServerAddress The conceptual table listing the RADIUS accounting servers with which it shares a secret ServerPortNumber The UDP port it is using to send requests to this server RoundTripTime The time interval between the most recent Accounting Response and the
8. A NOTICE indicates either potential damage to hardware or loss of data and tells you how to avoid the problem A CAUTION indicates a potential for property damage personal injury or death vill Web based Switch Configuration Introduction Login to Web Manager Web based User Interface Web Pages Introduction All software functions of the Switch can be managed configured and monitored via the embedded web based HTML interface The Switch can be managed from remote stations anywhere on the network through a standard browser such as Firefox Microsoft Internet Explorer Mozilla or Netscape The browser acts as a universal access tool and can communicate directly with the Switch using the HTTP protocol The Web based management module and the Console program and Telnet are different ways to access the same internal switching software and configure it Thus all settings encountered in Web based management are the same as those found in the console program Login to Web Manager To begin managing the Switch simply run the browser you have installed on your computer and point it to the IP address you have defined for the device The URL in the address bar should read something like http 123 123 123 123 where the numbers 123 represent the IP address of the Switch User name Password TILI Remember my password Figure 1 1 Enter Network Password dialog Enter admin in both th
9. From Fort 01 Forward Porllist Clear All Select All Ports 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 ward Portlist 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 10 11 12 13 14 15 4 10 11 12 13 14 15 EB Aah dad ET 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 EB hehe dad por A Aa ra ot PB e a e e see AO Aa rad 10 11 12 13 14 15 48 10 11 12 13 14 15 10 11 12 13 14 15 49 10 11 12 13 14 15 10 11 12 13 14 15 10 11 12 13 14 15 10 11 12 13 14 15 Mm e 12 a 14 15 10 11 12 13 14 15 A E a E 10 11 12 13 14 15 O Ad Ea TA ES 10 11 12 13 14 15 293 10 11 12 13 14 15 10 11 12 13 14 15 18 11 19 13 14 145 E Hb hh hhh hhh A A A A ee ee es ee A A 16 17 18 19 20 21 16 17 18 19 20 21 16 17 15 19 20 21 16 17 18 19 20 21 16 177 175 19 20 21 16 17 18 19 20 21 16 17 15 19 20 21 16 17 18 19 20 21 16 17 13 19 20 21 16 17 18 19 20 21 16 17 15 19 20 21 16 17 18 19 20 21 16 17 15 19 20 21 16 17 18 19 20 21 16 17 15 19 20 21 16 17 18 19 20 21 16 17 15 19 20 21 16 17 18 19 20 21 16 177 175 19 20 21 16 17 18 19 20 21 16 177 175 19 20 21 16 17 18 19 20 21 16 17 13 19 20 21 16 17 18 19 20 21 1A 17 18 14 70 91 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 20 Apply ee 29 99 fs 22 23 ss 22 23 22 23 22 23 22 23 22 23 22 23 22 23 ss T 22 23 23 Oe fis Da saa ma 22 23 22 23 a 22 23 27930 Figure 3 23 Traffic Segmentation window The fol
10. Show IGMP Snooping Multicast VLAN Entries Figure 3 31 IGMP Snooping Multicast VLAN Group List Settings window Enter a Multicast occ and click Add The new mermar will be displayed in the table at the bottom of the window Click lt oping Multicast VLAN Entries to return to the IGMP Snooping Multicast VLAN Settings nos Click Delete All to remove al the entries on this window IP Multicast Profile Settings This window allows the user to add a profile to which multicast IP address reports are to be received on specified ports on the Switch This function will therefore limit the number of reports received and the number of multicast groups configured on the Switch The user may set an IP Multicast address or range of IP Multicast addresses to accept reports Permit or deny reports Deny coming into the specified switch ports To view this window click L2 Features gt IGMP Snooping gt IP Multicast Profile Settings Profile ID Profile Mame it i Total Entries 0 Profile ID Profile Mame Figure 3 32 IP Multicast Profile Settings window The following fields can be set Parameter Description Profile ID Use the drop down menu to choose a Profile ID Profile Name Enter a name for the IP Multicast Profile To edit and entry click the corresponding Edit button and to delete an entry click the corresponding Delete button Profile ID Frofile Mame o Delete All Total Entries 1 Profile ID Profile Ma
11. des3200 28 L2mgmt mib des3200 28f L2mgmt mib des3200 10 L2mgmt mib des3200 18 L2mgmt mib des3200 26 L2mgmt mib des3200 28 L2mgmt mib des3200 28f L2mgmt mib Appendix C RADIUS Attributes Assignment The RADIUS Attributes Assignment on the DES 3200 is used in the following modules 802 1X Port based and Host based and MAC based Access Control The description that follows explains the following RADIUS Attributes Assignment types Ingress Egress Bandwidth 802 1p Default Priority VLAN ACL To assign Ingress Egress bandwidth by RADIUS Server the proper parameters should be configured on the RADIUS Server The tables below show the parameters for bandwidth The parameters of the Vendor Specific attributes are Vendor ID Defines the vendor 171 DLINK Vendor Type Defines the attribute for ingress Required ee 3 for egress bandwidth Attribute Specific Field Used to assign the bandwidth Unit Kbits of a port If the user has configured the bandwidth attribute of the RADIUS server for example ingress bandwidth 1000Kbps and the 802 1X authentication is successful the device will assign the bandwidth according to the RADIUS server to the port However if the user does not configure the bandwidth attribute and authenticates successfully the device will not assign any bandwidth to the port If the bandwidth attribute is configured on the RADIUS server with a value of 0
12. 0 A EE TA a A AA Olla mm A A m B G m A a 3 ooo wa G GA an G EE m B G m a ajo D O Figure 4 5 802 1p Default Priority window This window allows assignment of a default 802 1p priority to any given port on the Switch The priority values are numbered from 0 the lowest priority to 7 the highest priority Click Apply to implement the settings 802 1p User Priority The Switch allows the assignment of a user priority to each of the 802 1p priorities 131 To view this window click QoS gt 802 1p User Priority Priority d Class 1 w class 0 w class 0 w Class 2 Y Class v Class 3 El Class 3 y Apply Figure 4 6 802 1p User Priority window Once a priority has been assigned to the port groups on the Switch assign this Class to each of the eight levels of 802 1p priorities The following parameter may be set Parameter Description Class ID This field is used to enter a Class ID between Class 0 and Class 3 Click Apply to set the changes QoS Scheduling Settings Changing the output scheduling used for the hardware queues in the Switch can customize QoS As with any changes to QoS implementation careful consideration should be given to how network traffic in lower priority queues are affected Changes in scheduling may result in unacceptable levels of packet loss or significant transmission delays If you choose to customize this setting it is important to mon
13. 802 1X User Table Total Entries 0 UserName Password Figure 5 20 802 1X User window 150 Authentication RADIUS Server The RADIUS feature of the Switch allows you to facilitate centralized user administration as well as providing protection against a sniffing active hacker To configure the 802 1X User click Security gt 802 1X gt Authentication RADIUS Server Index IF Address Authentic Port 1 65535 Accounting Port 1 65535 Timeout 1 255 Bo secs Retransmit 1 255 zo Jtmes key haa characters Fn Apply RADIUS Server List Index IF Address Auth Paort AcchPart Timeout Retransmit Figure 5 21 Authentication RADIUS Server window This window displays the following information Parameter Description nde Choose the desired RADIUS server to configure 7 2 or 3 IP Address Set the RADIUS Server IP Authentic Port Set the RADIUS authentic server s UDP port The default port is 1812 1 65535 Accounting Port Set the RADIUS account server s UDP port The default port is 1873 1 65535 Timeout 1 255 Enter the timeout value in seconds 1 to 255 the default value is 5 Retransmit 1 255 Set the retransmit value in seconds 7 to 255 the default value is 2 Key Set the key the same as that of the RADIUS server Maximum length of the entry is 32 Max length 32 bytes bytes 151 Guest VLAN Configuration On 802 1X security enabled networks there is a need for non 802 1X
14. D Link Building Networks for People 7 j e aja J nn i Ear ELY z ooa E SEP RELEASE 1 21 CARRIER ETHERNET MEF Certified Compliant Information in this document is subject to change without notice 2010 D Link Corporation All rights reserved Reproduction in any manner whatsoever without the written permission of D Link Corporation is strictly forbidden Trademarks used in this text D Link and the D LINK logo are trademarks of D Link Corporation Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation Other trademarks and trade names may be used in this document to refer to either the entities claiming the marks and names or their products D Link Corporation disclaims any proprietary interest in trademarks and trade names other than its own April 2010 P N 651ES3200025G Table of Contents SS A oe gale et aN hte PIN E E O SAR tO OE Vill Typographical Conventions iria o dd dd a viii Notes Notices and GAUL OS neen n A mas eee A Vill Web based Switch Configuration siiseciss ccsscisesevecessdceavevsdesaveessaveususdtsevevedsasveusdisewsssdcassieudcavccesdseesess 9 INTOdUciON sit 9 Login to Web Wanadoo es 9 Web based User Inter aCE serseri a a EE E E E AE A OEE 10 MTD eS ena da do le 11 A a a sens aeaesseicanssamecaeuconssecesapiveceenecanavenoeas 12 Device MOMO a ii e E O DS 13 System IO Ma adn ao 13 senal POM Sing SiN Noia TA 14 IPAddress SO WINGS mu
15. Figure 2 58 Upload Log File window Gratuitous ARP An ARP announcement also known as Gratuitous ARP is a packet usually an ARP Request containing a valid SHA and SPA for the host which sent it with TPA equal to SPA Such a request is not intended to solicit a reply but merely updates the ARP caches of other hosts which receive the packet This is commonly done by many operating systems on startup and helps to resolve problems which would otherwise occur if for example a network card had recently been changed changing the IP address to MAC address mapping and other hosts still had the old mapping in their ARP cache Gratuitous ARP Global Settings To view this window click Configuration gt Gratuitous ARP gt Gratuitous ARP Global Settings send On IF Interface status Up Enabled w Send On Duplicate IP Detected Enabled Gratuitous ARP Learning Enabled e Figure 2 59 Gratuitous ARP Global Settings window The following fields can be configured Parameter Description Send On IP This is used to enable or disable the sending of gratuitous ARP request packets while an IP Interface Status Up interface comes up This is used to automatically announce the interface s IP address to other nodes By default the state is Enabled Send On Duplicate This is used to enable or disable the sending of gratuitous ARP request packets while a IP Detected duplicate IP is detected By default the state is Enabled Du
16. Max OAMPDU Remote Loopback Unidirection Link Monitoring Variable Request POW Revision Operation Status Loopback Status Port 2 Local Client OAM Mode Max OAMPDU Remote Loopback Unidirection Link Monitoring Variable Request POL Revision Operation Status Loopback Status Disabled Active 518 Bytes upport Not Supported Support Not Supported 0 Disable No Loopback Disabled Active 1518 Bytes support Not Supported upport Not Supported 0 Disable Mo Loopback Figure 3 57 Ethernet OAM Port Settings window The following parameters can be set Parameter Description From Port To Port Specified a range of ports to be configured Mode Specify to operate in either active mode or passive mode The default mode is active State Specify to enable or disable the OAM function The default state is disabled Remote Loopback If start is specified it will request the peer to change to the remote loopback mode If stop is specified it will request the peer to change to the normal operation mode Received Remote Specify whether to process or to ignore the received Ethernet OAM remote loopback Loopback command The default method is ignore Click Apply to implement the changes made 112 Ethernet OAM Event Configuration To view this window click L2 Features gt Ethernet OAM gt Ethernet OAM Event Configuration Ci Barea From Port Link Event Link Monitor Threshold 0 429496 7295 Window
17. Tovvhich Week Of The Month To Day Of Week To Month To Time In HH Mii DST Annual Settings From Month From Day From Time In HH Mihi To Month To Day To Time In HH thl Figure 2 27 Time Zone Settings window The following parameters can be set Parameter Description Time Zone and DST Daylight Saving Use this pull down menu to enable or disable the DST Settings Time State Daylight Saving Use this pull down menu to specify the amount of time that will constitute your local DST offset Time Offset in 30 60 90 or 120 minutes Minutes Time Zone Offset Use these pull down menus to specify your local time zone s offset from Greenwich Mean from GMT in Time GMT HH MM DST Repeating Settings Using repeating mode will enable DST seasonal time adjustment Repeating mode requires that the DST beginning and ending date be specified using a formula For example specify to begin DST on Saturday during the second week of April and end DST on Sunday during the last week of October From Which Week Enter the week of the month that DST will start on of the Month 35 From Day of the Enter the day of the week that DST will start on Week Enter the month DST will start on From Time in Enter the time of day that DST will start on HH MM To Which Week of Enter the week of the month the DST will end the Month To Day of the Enter the day of the week that DST will end Week To Month Ente
18. 1U 10 ZO0 Z Sl IVICACITIAYUCOU a El avar O Etharne TUVO y TNaOarna OF EdVCI a ElNICIITIC y Profile Type Action Packet Content Permit Show Details Delete Rules Figure 6 96 CPU Access Rule List window for Packet Content example To view the configurations for previously configured rule click on the corresponding Show Details Button which will display the following CPU Access Rule Detail Information window PU ACL Rule Details Profile ID 1 Access ID 1 Profile Type Packet Content Action Permit Ports g Offset 0 15 0x00000000 000000000 000000000 0X00000000 Offset 16 31 000000000 0x00000000 000000000 0x00000000 Offset 32 47 0x00000000 000000000 000000000 Oxdo000000 Offset 48 63 0x00000000 Ox00000000 000000000 Oxtoo000000 Offset 64 79 0x00000000 000000000 000000000 0X00000000 Show All Rules Figure 6 97 CPU Access Rule Detail Information window for Packet Content example ACL Finder This window is used to help find a previously configured ACL entry To search for an entry select the profile ID from the drop down menu enter a port to view define the state Normal or CPU and click Find the table on the lower half of the window will display the entries To delete an entry click the corresponding Delete button To open this window click ACL gt ACL Finder ACL rule finder helps you identify any rule has been assigned to a specific port Profile ID Any Pot State No
19. Access Rule Detail Information window for Ethernet example To create an IPv4 ACL click Add ACL Profile in the Access Profile List window and then use the drop down menu to select a Profile ID between 7 and 572 click the IPv4 ACL radio button and then use the drop down menu to select a protocol ICMP IGMP TCP UDP or Protocol ID Click Select and the following window will appear this window will vary depending on whether CMP IGMP TCP UDP or Protocol ID has been selected 180 Select Profile ID Select ACL Type Ethernet ACL Pv ACL ICMP O IPE ACL Packet Content ACL You can select the field in the packet to create filtering mask L2 Header IPv4 DSCP IPv4 Address 802 10 VLAN DYLAN VLAN Mask FFF IPvd DSCP DscP IPv4 Address _ Source IP Mask TA C Destination IP Mask ICMP O icmp IMP Type MP Code Figure 6 54 Add ACL Profile window for IPv4 example Click on the boxes near the top of the window which will then turn red and reveal parameters for configuration To create a new entry enter the appropriate information and click Create To return to the Access Profile List window click lt lt Back The following parameters can be set for IPv4 Parameter Description VLAN Selecting this option instructs the Switch to examine the VLAN part of each packet header and use this as the or part of the criterion for forwarding IPv4 DSCP Selecting this option instructs the Switch to exa
20. DSCP Selecting this option instructs the Switch to examine the DiffServ Code part of each packet header and use this as the criteria or part of the criterion for forwarding ICMP Select ICMP to instruct the Switch to examine the Internet Control Message Protocol ICMP field in each frame s header ICMP Type Specifies that the Switch will examine each frame s ICMP Type field ICMP Code Specifies that the Switch will examine each frame s ICMP Code field e g 0 255 Specifies that the Switch will examine each frame s IGMP Type Source Port Specifies a TCP port for the source port Mask 0 FFFF Specifies a TCP port mask for the source port Destination Port Specifies a TCP port for the destination port Mask 0 FFFF Specifies a TCP port mask for the destination port Flag Bits Enter the appropriate flag mask parameter All incoming packets have TCP port numbers contained in them as the forwarding criterion These numbers have flag bits associated with them which are parts of a packet that determine what to do with the packet The user may deny packets by denying certain flag bits within the packets URG ACK PSH RST SYN FIN Choose among urg urgent ack acknowledgement psh push rst reset syn synchronize and fin finish 183 Source Port Specifies that the Switch will examine each frame s Universal Datagram Protocol UDP field for the source port Mask 0 FFFF Specifies a UDP port mask for the
21. Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled on One 0h Figure 3 16 GVRP Settings window The following fields can be set Parameter Description Click the radio buttons to enable or disable the GVRP global state settings These two fields allow you to specify the range of ports that will be included in the Port based VLAN that you are creating using the 802 1Q Port Settings window PVID 1 4094 Enter a PVID assignment for each port which may be manually assigned to a VLAN when created in the 802 1Q Port Settings table The Switch s default is to assign all ports to the default VLAN with a VID of 1 The PVID is used by the port to tag outgoing untagged packets and to make filtering decisions about incoming packets If the port is specified to accept only tagged frames as tagging and an untagged packet is forwarded to the port for transmission the port will add an 802 1Q tag using the PVID to write the VID in the tag When the packet arrives at its destination the receiving device will use the PVID to make VLAN forwarding decisions If the port receives a packet and Ingress filtering is enabled the port will compare the VID of the incoming packet to its PVID If the two are unequal the port will drop the packet If the two are equal the port will receive t
22. Figure 3 6 802 1Q Static VLAN window VLAN List tab To create a new 802 1Q VLAN entry click the Add Edit VLAN tab at the top of the window A new tab will appear as shown in the first figure on the next page to configure the port settings and to assign a unique name and number to the new VLAN To edit an existing 802 1Q VLAN entry click the Edit button next to the corresponding VLAN entry above A new tab will appear as shown in the second figure on the next page See the table on the next page for a description of the parameters of the 802 1Q Static VLAN window s Add Edit VLAN tab s NOTE After all IP interfaces are set for configurations VLANs on the Switch can be routed without any additional steps 67 WLAN List Addvedit VLAN Find WLAN WYLAN Batch Settings Total Entries 1 VID wLaNName Name should be less than 32 characters Advertisement Disabled v SelectAll 1 Tagged O Untagged O Forbidden O Not Member 3 O O Tagged Untagged Forbidden Mot Member 0000p Tagged Forts Untagged Ports Forbidden Ports Figure 3 7 802 10 Static VLAN window Add Edit VLAN tab Add To return to the initial 802 1Q Static VLAN window click the VLAN List tab at the top of the window To change an existing 802 10 static VLAN entry click the corresponding Edit button A new window will appear to configure the port settings and to assign a unique name and number to the new VLAN See the table
23. Local Local Local Local Local Local Local Local Local Local Local Local Local Local Local Local Local Local Local Local Local Local Local Local Local Local Local Local oon oa in amp tho mM 2 B 14 15 16 if 18 19 LLDP Remote Port Information To view this window click Monitoring gt LLDP gt LLDP Remote Port Information LLDP Remote Port Brief Table Pot 01 Remote Entities Count 0 Chassis ID Subtype PortlD Subtype ort PortlD Subtype Pont ID Port Description D Link DES 3200 28F R1 20 Port 1 D Link DES 3200 28F R1 20 Port D Link DES 3200 28F R1 20 Port 3 D Link DES 3200 28F R1 20 Port 4 D Link DES 3200 28F R1 20 Port 5 D Link DES 3200 28F R1 20 Port 6 D Link DES 3200 28F R1 20 Port 7 D Link DES 3200 28F R1 20 Port 8 D Link DES 3200 28F R1 20 Port 9 D Link DES 3200 28F R1 20 Port 10 D Link DES 3200 28F R1 20 Port 11 D Link DES 3200 28F R1 20 Port 12 D Link DES 3200 28F R1 20 Port 13 D Link DES 3200 28F R1 20 Port 14 D Link DES 3200 28F R1 20 Port 15 D Link DES 3200 28F R1 20 Port 16 D Link DES 3200 28F R1 20 Port 17 D Link DES 3200 28F R1 20 Port 18 D Link DES 3200 28F R1 20 Port 19 D Link DES 3200 28F R1 20 Port 20 D Link DES 3200 28F R1 20 Port 24 D Link DES 3200 28F R1 20 Port 22 D Link DES 3200 28F R1 20 Port 23 D Link DES 3200 28F R1 20 Port 24 D Link DES 3200 28F R1 20 Port 25 D Link DES 3200 28F R1 20 Port 26 D Link DES 3200 28F R120 Port 27 D Link DES 3200 28F R1 20 Por
24. MAC Notification Port Settings To configure the MAC Notification Port Settings for the Switch click Configuration gt MAC Notification Settings gt MAC Notification Port Settings 38 From Fort State J Disabled w Apply MAC Address Notification State Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Figure 2 31 MAC Notification Port Settings window The following parameters may be modified Parameter Description Select a port or group of ports to enable for MAC notification using the pull down menus Enable MAC Notification for the ports selected using the pull down menu Click Apply to implement changes SNMP Settings Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP is an OSI Layer 7 Application Layer designed specifically for managing and monitoring network devices SNMP enables network management stations to read and modify the settings of gateways routers switches and other network devices Use SNMP to configure system features for proper operation monitor performance and detect potential problems in the Switch switch group or network Managed devices that support SNMP include software referred to as an agent which runs locally on the device A defined set of variables manag
25. Robustness Value Adjust this variable according to expected packet loss If packet loss on the VLAN is expected 1 255 to be high the Robustness Variable should be increased to accommodate increased packet loss This entry field allows an entry of 7 to 255 The default is 2 Last Listener This field specifies the maximum amount of time between group specific query messages Query Interval including those sent in response to leave group messages The default is 7 1 25 Fast Done This parameter allows the user to enable the Fast Leave function Enabled this function will allow members of a multicast group to leave the group immediately without the implementation of the Last Listener Query Interval when an MLD Leave Report Packet is received by the Switch The default is Disabled State 8 Select Enabled to implement MLD Snooping This field is Disabled by default The read only field displays the MLD version used on the Switch 2 Querier Role This read only field describes the behavior of the Switch for sending query packets Querier will denote that the Switch is sending out MLD query packets Non Querier will denote that the Switch is not sending out MLD query packets Click Apply to implement any changes made and lt lt Back to return to the initial MLD Snooping Settings window To modify the MLD Snooping Router Port Settings click on the hyperlinked Modify Router Port which will show the following window for the user to config
26. Tame Seg menta ts 81 Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling SAS aos 82 BPDU Attack Protection oe tndS ia A A 83 IGMP SNOOPING mercure A ae 84 IOMP SNOO0INO S CLUINOS sssri r T E oil iaa oem eed eee 84 IGMP ACCESS CONTON Suns a a a a dd id 86 IGMP Snooping MullicasSt VLAN Se Wing S sracte a aa a a aa aaa RR 87 IP Multicast Prone SPUING S esas ane a a a asedeneeeaeed 88 Limted Mu lticast RINGE SGU S csa r rbd 90 Max Multicast Group Seting S ni daa 90 MLD SNOGPING SSMNGS resinas E a aa 91 POCNI OM csao A Sate hn tn he ates a eye a teenies 94 ESOpback Detection SQ MING S ai A AAA ad 94 Selan A eee ee es er gen er ene SO NER Ree ery ee Pee eee ee er ee eee A AT 96 SIP Bridge Glo Dal SCAG Ses sais eiscica 25 a e 98 STP POS SUNG oleo 99 MST Configuration dentficatOn ii Ad 101 STFIASItACO CUNAS vrai a a a a 102 MSTE POR INN AN ts 103 Forwarding amp Flete lied iio 103 Unicast Forwarding SEO earring ese ae E eee 103 M l cast Forwarding SCE Sn a Aad NN a A ee eh a ae A aaa 104 Mullcas urea ModE ciclos Bite ab aa uote ne kena ad alas cane ncn emu amaunauens 105 NEB SENINGS ia A AA a 106 O e e o eee 106 ELDPIGIODaSCundS utente bo Dn ere pauls 107 A e ee renee 108 LEDR BASIS WES 5 CUINA a cas 109 BD PMO Uy TEN SSC ING Ss A nde aa aad ee a teeters ner cea ceases gaat esate tase edoeeres 110 LEDP DO TLV SSC Hin S sia ide 111 EUS ret AM iia 112 Ethernet OAM Ports cun Sia iii 112 Ethernet OAM Event Configuratio Meore nee ee 113 Connectivity Fault Manag
27. be enabled on all ports and work normally The IEEE 802 1Q standard restricts the forwarding of untagged packets to the VLAN of which the receiving port is a member The main characteristics of IEEE 802 1Q are as follows Assigns packets to VLANs by filtering e Assumes the presence of a single global spanning tree Packet Transmitted Uses an explicit tagging scheme with one level tagging e 802 1Q VLAN Packet Forwarding e Packet forwarding decisions are made based upon the following three types of rules Egross Rules Ingress Rules Applied Applied Ingress rules rules relevant to the classification of received frames belonging to a VLAN Forwarding Process Forwarding rules between ports decides whether to filter or forward the packet Filtering Database e Egress rules determines if the packet must be sent tagged or untagged Port State Tagging or Untagging Appiad Figure 3 2 IEEE 802 1Q Packet Forwarding 802 1Q VLAN Tags The figure below shows the 802 1Q VLAN tag There are four additional octets inserted after the source MAC address Their presence is indicated by a value of 0x8100 in the EtherType field When a packet s EtherType field is equal to 0x8100 the packet carries the IEEE 802 1Q 802 1p tag The tag is contained in the following two octets and consists of three bits of user priority one bit of Canonical Format Identifier CFI used for encapsulating Token Ri
28. for 5 seconds seconds 5 2 10 seconds 10 2 20 Figure 5 1 Safeguard Engine Checking Interval Example on the Switch In Exhausted mode two modes can be implemented to limit the bandwidth assigned to ARP packets Strict and Fuzzy In Strict mode the Switch will drop all ARP packets The Switch will reluctantly process any packets not destined for the Switch and broadcast packets no matter what is causing the high utilization rate on the CPU which may not be an ARP storm In Fuzzy mode the Switch uses an algorithm to assign different bandwidth levels for ARP packets In Fuzzy mode the Switch will analyze the rate of received ARP traffic to adjust the bandwidth dynamically Once in Exhausted mode the packet flow will decrease by half of the level that caused the Switch to enter Exhausted mode After the packet flow has stabilized the rate will initially increase by a small amount of processed packets and then return to a normal packet flow In both Strict mode and Fuzzy mode the Safeguard Engine will check for packet flooding issues at regular intervals For every consecutive checking interval that reveals a packet flooding issue the Switch will double the time it will accept a few ingress ARP packets In the example above the Switch doubled the time for dropping ARP packets when consecutive flooding issues were detected at 5 second intervals First stop 5 seconds second stop 10 seconds third stop 20 seco
29. lt portNum gt STP root restriction is enabled Informational Root restriction disabled Port lt portNum gt STP root restriction is disabled Informational Successful login through Successful login through SSH Username lt username gt IP lt ipaddr gt O SH Informational Login failed through SSH Username lt username gt IP Login failed through SSH lt ipaddr gt Warning Logout through SSH Username lt username gt IP lt ipaddr gt Informational Logout through SSH SSH session timed out Username lt username gt IP lt ipaddr gt Informational SSH session timed out SSH server is enabled SSH server is enabled Informational SSH server is disabled SSH server is disabled Informational Authentication Policy is Authentication Policy is enabled Module AAA Informational enabled Authentication Policy is Authentication Policy is disabled Module AAA Informational disabled 0 0 E Slt 255 Successful login through Console authenticated by AAA local method Login failed through Console authenticated by AAA local method Successful login through Web authenticated by AAA local method Login failed through Web authenticated by AAA local method Successful login through Web SSL authenticated by AAA local method Login failed through Web SSL authenticated by AAA local method Successful login through Telnet authenticated by AAA local method Login failed through Te
30. whether it has auto negotiated advertised capability and what is the operational MAU type The default state is Disabled Link Aggregation The Link Aggregation option indicates that LLDP agents should transmit Link Aggregation TLV This indicates the current link aggregation status of IEEE 802 3 MACs More precisely the information should include whether the port is capable of doing link aggregation whether the port is aggregated in an aggregated link and what is the aggregated port ID The default state is Disabled Maximum Frame The Maximum Frame Size indicates that LLDP agent should transmit Maximum frame size Size TLV The default state is Disabled Click Apply to implement changes made 111 Ee_ 20nnN 1N 12 02 208F I avar 2 Etharnat Mananarn Switrh lear Mania S 3200 10 18 28 28F Layer 2 Ethernet Managed Switch User Manual Ethernet OAM Ethernet OAM Operations Administration and Maintenance is a data link layer protocol which provides network administrators the ability to monitor the health of the network and quickly determine the location of failing links or fault conditions on point to point and emulated point to point Ethernet link Ethernet OAM Port Settings To view this window click L2 Features gt Ethernet OAM gt Ethernet OAM Port Settings From Port Remote Loopback Received Remote Loopback o E a al Active Disable Ol star a Ethernet OAM Port Status Table Port 1 Local Client OAM Mode
31. 1000 60000 o o1 Link Monitor Error Symbol y 1000 ms Notify Disabled Ethemet OAM Event Configuration Table Port 1 OAM Disabled Mode Active j Dying Gasp Critical Event Enabled Remote Loopback OAMPDU Not Processed symbol Error Notify State Enabled Window 1000 Milliseconds Threshold 1 Errored Symbol Frame Error Notify State Enabled Window 1000 Milliseconds Threshold 1 Errored Frame Frame Period Error Notify State Enabled Window 148810 Frames Threshold 1 Errored Frame Frame Seconds Error Notify State Enabled Window 50000 Milliseconds Threshald 1 Errored Seconds Figure 3 58 Ethernet OAM Event Configuration window The following parameters can be set Parameter Description From Port To Port Specified a range of ports to be configured Link Event Choose the type of Link Event Link Monitor or Critical Link Event to configure Link Monitor The option is used to configure ports Ethernet OAM link monitoring error symbols error frames error frame period and error frame seconds Link monitoring function provides a mechanism to detect and indicate link faults under a variety of conditions OAM monitors the statistics on the number of frame errors as well as the number of coding symbol errors If the number of error symbols or error frames is equal to or greater than the specified threshold within the period specified by the Window option and the event notification state N
32. 15 characters e g Priority 1 e Priority 2 Priority 3 Priority 4 Apply Total Entries 1 Priority 1 Priority 2 Priority 3 Priority 4 default Figure 5 39 Enable Method Lists window To delete an Enable Method List defined by the user click the the Delete button To modify an Enable Method List click on its corresponding Edit button To define an Enable Login Method List set the following parameters and click Apply Parameter Description Method List Name Enter a method list name defined by the user of up to 15 characters Priority 1 2 3 4 The user may add one or a combination of up to four of the following authentication methods to this method list local_enable Adding this parameter will require the user to be authenticated using the local enable password database on the Switch The user in the next section entitled Local Enable Password must set the local enable password none Adding this parameter will require no authentication to access the Switch radius Adding this parameter will require the user to be authenticated using the RADIUS protocol from a remote RADIUS server tacacs Adding this parameter will require the user to be authenticated using the TACACS protocol from a remote TACACS server xtacacs Adding this parameter will require the user to be authenticated using the XTACACS protocol from a remote XTACACS server tacacs Adding this parameter will require the user to be authenti
33. 15 swSinglelPMSMacAddr swSinglelPMSnewRoot swSinglelPMSID 1 3 6 1 4 1 171 12 8 6 0 16 swSinglelPMSMacAddr swSinglelPMSTopologyChange swSinglelPMSID 1 3 6 1 4 1 171 12 8 6 0 17 swSinglelPMSMacAddr swSinglelPMSrisingAlarm swSinglelPMSID 1 3 6 1 4 1 171 12 8 6 0 18 swSinglelPMSMacAddr swSinglelPMSfallingAlarm swSinglelPMSID 1 3 6 1 4 1 171 12 8 6 0 19 swSinglelPMSMacAddr swSinglelPMSmacNotification swSinglelPMSID 1 3 6 1 4 1 171 12 8 6 0 20 swSinglelPMSMacAddr swSinglelPMSTrapMessage swERPSNodeld SWERPSSFClearedTrap ERPS MIB 1 3 6 1 4 1 171 12 78 4 0 2 ERPS MIB SWERPSRPLOwnerConflictTrap 1 3 6 1 4 1 171 12 78 4 0 3 SWERPSNodeld BPDU PROTECTION MIB swBpduProtectionUnderAttacking Trap swBpduProtectionPortindex 1 3 6 1 4 1 171 12 76 4 0 1 swBpduProtectionPortMode BPDU PROTECTION MIB swBpduProtectionRecovery Trap swBpduProtectionPortindex 1 3 6 1 4 1 171 12 76 4 0 2 swBpduProtectionRecoveryMethod swF ilterDetectedTrap swFilterDetectedIP FILTER MIB 1 3 6 1 4 1 171 12 37 100 0 1 swFilterDetectedport des3200 10 L2mgmt mib swL2PortSecurityViolationT rap 1 3 6 1 4 1 171 11 113 1 1 2 20 0 1 1 3 6 1 4 1 171 11 113 1 2 2 20 0 1 des3200 18 L2mgmt mib 1 3 6 1 4 1 171 11 113 1 3 2 20 0 1 swL2PortSecurityPortIndex 1 3 6 1 4 1 171 11 113 1 4 2 20 0 1 swL2PortSecurityViolationMac des3200 26 L2mgmt mib des3200 28 L2mgmt mib des3200 28f L2mgmt mib 266 swL2macNotification 1 3 6 1
34. 31 20 0000 00 00 05 18 37 0000 00 00 07 11 39 0000 00 00 07 07 31 0000 00 00 05 42 05 0000 00 00 05 31 59 0000 00 00 03 33 14 0000 00 00 03 23 10 0000 00 00 03 13 36 2000 00 00 03 13 10 0000 00 00 00 00 53 0000 00 00 00 00 48 0000 00 00 00 00 48 2000 00 00 00 00 48 0000 00 00 09 59 14 0000 00 00 09 49 13 0000 00 00 09 39 13 Log Text successful login through Web sername Anonymous IP 10 24 22 5 Web session timed out Username Anonymous IP 10 24 22 5 Successful login through Web Username Anonymous IP 10 24 22 5 Web session timed out sername Anonymous 1P 10 24 225 Successful login through Web Username Anonymous IP 10 24 22 5 Web session timed out sername Anonymous 1P 10 24 225 Successful login through Web Username Anonymous IP 10 24 22 5 Web session timed out Username Anonymous IP 10 24 22 5 successful login through Web Username Anonymous IP 10 24 2253 Web session timed out sername Anonymous 1P 10 24 225 Console session timed out Username Anonymous successful login through Web sername Anonymous IP 10 24 22 5 successful login through Console Username Anonymous system cold start Fot 17 link up 100Mbps HALF duplex Fot 17 link down Port 17 link up 100Mbps HALF duplex Web session timed out sername Anonymous 1P 10 24 225 Console session timed out Username Anonymous successful login through Console sername Anonymous Figure 7 42 System Log window
35. 4 1 171 11 113 1 1 2 20 0 2 1 3 6 1 4 1 171 11 113 1 2 2 20 0 2 1 3 6 1 4 1 171 11 113 1 3 2 20 0 2 1 3 6 1 4 1 171 11 113 1 4 2 20 0 2 swL2PortLoopOccurred 1 3 6 1 4 1 171 11 113 1 1 2 20 0 3 1 3 6 1 4 1 171 11 113 1 2 2 20 0 3 1 3 6 1 4 1 171 11 113 1 3 2 20 0 3 1 3 6 1 4 1 171 11 113 1 4 2 20 0 3 swL2PortLoopRestart 1 3 6 1 4 1 171 11 113 1 1 2 20 0 4 1 3 6 1 4 1 171 11 113 1 2 2 20 0 4 1 3 6 1 4 1 171 11 113 1 3 2 20 0 4 1 3 6 1 4 1 171 11 113 1 4 2 20 0 4 swL2VlanLoopOccurred 1 3 6 1 4 1 171 11 113 1 1 2 20 0 5 1 3 6 1 4 1 171 11 113 1 2 2 20 0 5 1 3 6 1 4 1 171 11 113 1 3 2 20 0 5 1 3 6 1 4 1 171 11 113 1 4 2 20 0 5 SwL2VlanLoopRestart 1 3 6 1 4 1 171 11 113 1 1 2 20 0 6 1 3 6 1 4 1 171 11 113 1 2 2 20 0 6 1 3 6 1 4 1 171 11 113 1 3 2 20 0 6 1 3 6 1 4 1 171 11 113 1 4 2 20 0 6 swL2macNotifylnfo swL2LoopDetectPortindex swL2LoopDetectPortindex swL2LoopDetectPortindex swL2VlanLoopDetectVID swL2LoopDetectPortindex swL2VlanLoopDetectVID 267 des3200 10 L2mgmt mib des3200 18 L2mgmt mib des3200 26 L2mgmt mib des3200 28 L2mgmt mib des3200 28f L2mgmt mib des3200 10 L2mgmt mib des3200 18 L2mgmt mib des3200 26 L2mgmt mib des3200 28 L2mgmt mib des3200 28f L2mgmt mib des3200 10 L2mgmt mib des3200 18 L2mgmt mib des3200 26 L2mgmt mib des3200 28 L2mgmt mib des3200 28f L2mgmt mib des3200 10 L2mgmt mib des3200 18 L2mgmt mib des3200 26 L2mgmt mib
36. 802 1Q VLANs Some relevant terms Tagging The act of putting 802 1Q VLAN information into the header of a packet Untagging The act of stripping 802 1Q VLAN information out of the packet header o Ingress port A port on a switch where packets are flowing into the Switch and VLAN decisions must be made Egress port A port on a switch where packets are flowing out of the Switch either to another switch or to an end station and tagging decisions must be made IEEE 802 1Q tagged VLANs are implemented on the Switch 802 1Q VLANs require tagging which enables them to span the entire network assuming all switches on the network are IEEE 802 1Q compliant VLANs allow a network to be segmented in order to reduce the size of broadcast domains All packets entering a VLAN will only be forwarded to the stations over IEEE 802 1Q enabled switches that are members of that VLAN and this includes broadcast multicast and unicast packets from unknown sources VLANs can also provide a level of security to your network IEEE 802 1Q VLANs will only deliver packets between stations that are members of the VLAN Any port can be configured as either tagging or untagging The untagging feature of IEEE 802 1Q VLANs allows VLANs to work with legacy switches that don t recognize VLAN tags in packet headers The tagging feature allows VLANs to span multiple 802 1Q compliant switches through a single physical connection and allows Spanning Tree to
37. 9 and 10 are in the same VLAN group VLAN and Trunk Groups The members of a trunk group have the same VLAN setting Any VLAN setting on the members of a trunk group will apply to the other member ports NOTE In order to use VLAN segmentation in conjunction with port trunk groups you can first Ea set the port trunk group s and then you may configure VLAN settings If you wish to change lj the port trunk grouping with VLANs already in place you will not need to reconfigure the VLAN settings after changing the port trunk group settings VLAN settings will automatically change in conjunction with the change of the port trunk group settings pom oT Q in Q VLANs Q in Q VLANs also sometimes referred to as double VLANs allow network providers to expand their VLAN configurations to place customer VLANs within a larger inclusive VLAN which adds a new layer to the VLAN configuration This basically lets large ISP s create L2 Virtual Private Networks and also create transparent LANs for 65 their customers which will connect two or more customer LAN points without over complicating configurations on the client s side Not only will over complication be avoided but also now the administrator has over 4000 VLANs in which over 4000 VLANs can be placed therefore greatly expanding the VLAN network and enabling greater support of customers utilizing multiple VLANs on the network Q in Q VLANs are basically VLAN tags placed within existi
38. Accounting Request that matched it from this RADIUS accounting server Requests The number of RADIUS Accounting Request packets sent This does not include retransmissions Retransmissions The number of RADIUS Accounting Request packets retransmitted to this RADIUS accounting server Retransmissions include retries where the Identifier and Acct Delay have been updated as well as those in which they remain the same The number of RADIUS packets received on the accounting port from this server MalformedResponses The number of malformed RADIUS Accounting Response packets received from this server Malformed packets include packets with an invalid length Bad authenticators and unknown types are not included as malformed accounting responses BadAuthenticators The number of RADIUS Accounting Response packets which contained invalid authenticators received from this server PendingRequests The number of RADIUS Accounting Request packets sent to this server that have not yet timed out or received a response This variable is incremented when an Accounting Request is sent and decremented due to receipt of an Accounting Response a timeout or a retransmission Timeouts The number of accounting timeouts to this server After a timeout it may retry to the same server send to a different server or give up A retry to the same server is counted as a retransmit as well as a timeout A send to a different server is counted as an A
39. Circuit ID Insertion The following fields can be set or viewed Parameter Description Circuit ID Choose the device ID used for encoding of the circuit ID option The available options are e Switch MAC Specifies that the Switch MAC address be used to encode the circuit ID option Switch IP Specifies that the Switch IP address be used to encode the circuit ID option UDF String A user defined string to be used to encode the circuit ID option The maximum length is 32 The default encoding for the device ID option is the Switch IP address Click Apply to implement changes made 99 L2 Features Jumbo Frame 802 10 Static VLAN Q in Q 802 1v Protocol VLAN VLAN Trunk Settings GVRP Settings Asymmetric VLAN Settings MAC based VLAN Settings PVID Auto Assign Settings Port Trunking LACP Port Settings Traffic Segmentation Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling Settings IGMP Snooping MLD Snooping Settings Port Mirror Loopback Detection Settings Spanning Tree Forwarding amp Filtering LLDP Ethernet OAM Connectivity Failure Management ERPS Settings The following section will aid the user in configuring Layer 2 functions for the Switch The Switch includes various functions all discussed in detail in the following section Jumbo Frame This window will enable or disable the Jumbo Frame function on the Switch The default is Enabled When Enabled jumbo frames frames larger than the standard Ethernet f
40. Clear Log The Switch can record event information in its own logs Click Next to go to the next page of the System Log window Clicking Clear will allow the user to clear the Switch History Log The information in the table is categorized as Parameter Description A counter incremented whenever an entry to the Switch s history log is made The table displays the last entry highest sequence number first Displays the time in days hours minutes and seconds since the Switch was last restarted Log Text Displays text describing the event that triggered the history log entry 244 Save and Tools Save Configuration Save Log Save All Configuration File Upload amp Download Upload Log File Reset Ping Test Download Firmware Reboot System The three Save windows include Save Configuration Save Log and Save All Each version of the window will aid the user in saving configurations to the Switch s memory The options include e Save Configuration to save the current configuration file e Save Log to save only the current log e Save All to save the current configuration file and log Save Configuration Open the Save drop down menu at the top of the Web manager and click Save Configuration to open the following window Current Status Completed Program Firmware Write Flash Status Saved Figure 8 1 Save Configuration window 245 Save Log Open the Save drop down menu at the top of the
41. Delete button in the SMTP Mail Receiver Address table at the bottom of the window 3 SMTP Service This window is used to test the SMTP Service Settings configured in the previous window To view the following window click Configuration gt SMTP Service Content Figure 2 29 SMTP Service window To test to see if the SMTP settings are working properly enter a Subject Content and then click the Send button MAC Notification Settings MAC Notification is used to monitor MAC addresses learned and entered into the forwarding database To globally set MAC notification on the Switch open the following window by opening the MAC Notification Settings in the Configuration folder MAC Notification Global Settings To configure the MAC Notification Global Settings for the Switch click Configuration gt MAC Notification Settings gt MAC Notification Global Settings State Disabled vw Interval 1 21 47483647 no see History Size 1 500 Apply Figure 2 30 MAC Notification Global Settings window The following parameters may be viewed and modified Parameter Description Enable or disable MAC notification globally on the Switch Interval The time in seconds between notifications 1 2147483647 sec History Size The maximum number of entries listed in the history log used for notification Up to 500 1 500 entries can be specified Click Apply to implement changes
42. Description Group Name SNMP Version V1 Indicates that SNMP version 1 is in use V2 Indicates that SNMP version 2 is in use V3 Indicates that SNMP version 3 is in use SNMP V3 Encryption None Indicates that there is no SNMP V3 Encryption Password Indicates that there is SNMP V3 Encryption through a password Key Indicates that there is SNMP V3 Encryption through a key Auth Protocol by MD5 Indicates that the HMAC MD5 96 authentication level will be used Password 42 A SHA Indicates that the HMAC SHA authentication protocol will be used Priv Protocol by None Indicates that no authorization protocol is in use password DES Indicates that DES 56 bit encryption is in use based on the CBC DES DES 56 standard Auth Protocol by Key MD5 Indicates that the HMAC MD5 96 authentication level will be used SHA Indicates that the HMAC SHA authentication protocol will be used Priv Protocol by Key None Indicates that no authorization protocol is in use DES Indicates that DES 56 bit encryption is in use based on the CBC DES DES 56 standard Enter a Password when SNMP V3 Encryption is enabled for Password mode Enter a Key when SNMP V3 Encryption is enabled for Key mode To implement changes made click Apply SNMP Community Table Use this table to view existing SNMP Community Table configurations and to create a SNMP community string to define the relationship between the SNMP manager
43. GVRP packets to outside sources notifying that they may join the existing VLAN Port List e g 1 5 Allows an individual port list to be added or deleted as a member of the VLAN Tagged Specifies the port as 802 1Q tagged Checking the box will designate the port as Tagged Untagged Specifies the port as 802 1Q untagged Checking the box will designate the port as untagged Forbidden Select this to specify the port as not being a member of the VLAN and that the port is forbidden from becoming a member of the VLAN dynamically Click Apply to implement changes made Q in Q This function allows the user to enable or disable the Q in Q function Q in Q is designed for service providers to carry traffic from multiple users across a network Q in Q is used to maintain customer specific VLAN and Layer 2 protocol configurations even when the same VLAN ID is being used by different customers This is achieved by inserting SPVLAN tags into the customer s frames when they enter the service provider s network and then removing the tags when the frames leave the network Customers of a service provider may have different or specific requirements regarding their internal VLAN IDs and the number of VLANs that can be supported Therefore customers in the same service provider network may have VLAN ranges that overlap which might cause traffic to become mixed up So assigning a unique range of VLAN IDs to each customer might cause restrictions on some
44. Group Name The user may enter a name for the group Discovery The user may set the discovery protocol interval in seconds that the Switch will send out Interval 30 90 discovery packets Returning information to a Commander Switch will include information about other switches connected to it Ex MS CaS The user may set the Discovery Interval from 30 to 90 seconds Hold Time Count This parameter may be set for the time in seconds the Switch will hold information sent to it 100 255 from other switches utilizing the Discovery Interval The user may set the hold time from 100 to 255 seconds Click Apply to implement the settings 48 After enabling the Switch to be a Commander Switch CS the Single IP Management folder will then contain four added links to aid the user in configuring SIM through the Web including Topology Firmware Upgrade and Configuration File Backup Restore and Upload Log File Topology The Topology window will be used to configure and manage the Switch within the SIM group and requires Java script to function properly on your computer The Java Runtime Environment on your server should initiate and lead you to the Topology window File Group Device View Help 11 Data default 53 1 0 20 Device name o Localport Spee A Remote port Mac Address SY default 53 10 2 Model name default 53 10 20 00 32 28 53 10 20 peer 0 28 L2 Switch Figure 2 43 Topology
45. LBD loop occurred Packet occurred discard begun Port with VID Loop Port lt portNum gt VID lt vlanID gt LBD recovered Loop detection restarted after Informational interval time ad Mae Loop VLAN number overflow Informational lt dos_ name gt is detected from IP lt ipaddr gt Port lt portNum gt detection restarted Denial of The DoS attack is blocked Service Critical MAC based A host fails to pass the MAC based Access Control unauthenticated host MAC authentication lt macaddr gt Port lt portNum gt VID lt vid gt Informational A host passes the MAC based Access Control host login successful MAC ee ee authentication lt macaddr gt port lt portNum gt VID lt vid gt MAC based Access Control host aged out MAC lt macaddr gt port lt portNum gt VID lt vid gt Informational A host is aged out Failed to assign ACL profiles rules from RADIUS RADIUS server lt ipAddr gt assigns lt username gt ACL failure Warning nee at port lt portNum gt lt string gt O AM Dying gasp event remote OAM dying gasp event received Port lt portNum gt Warning Dying gasp event local Device encountered an OAM dying gasp event Warning Critical event remote OAM critical event event received Port lt portNum gt Warning Critical event local Device encountered an OAM critical event Warning Errored Symbol Period Event remote Errored symbol period event received Port
46. MAC address This mask is entered in a Mask hexadecimal format Destination MAC Specifies a MAC address for the destination MAC address Address Destination MAC Specifies a MAC address mask for the destination MAC address Mask 802 1p 0 7 Enter a value from O to 7 to specify that the access profile will apply only to packets with this 802 1p priority value Ethernet Type Enter a value that the access profile will apply only to packets with this hexadecimal 802 1Q 0 FFFF Ethernet type value in the packet header Select Permit to specify that the packets that match the access profile are forwarded by the Switch according to any additional rule added see below Select Deny to specify the packets that match the access profile are not forwarded by the Switch and will be filtered Select Mirror to specify that packets that match the access profile are mirrored to a port defined in the config mirror port command Port Mirroring must be enabled and a target port must be set 179 Priority 0 7 Replace Priority Replace DSCP 0 63 Time Range Name Enter a priority value if you want to re write the 802 1p user priority of a packet to the value entered in the Priority field which meets the criteria specified previously in this command before forwarding it on to the specified CoS queue For more information on priority queues CoS queues and mapping for 802 1p see the QoS section of this manual Click on the box to e
47. MEP ID s Add Add MEP ID s This is to specify the Delete Delete MEP ID s MEP IDs contained in the maintenance association The range of the MEP ID is 1 to 8191 By default there is no MEP ID in a newly created maintenance association Click Apply to implement changes made 117 LA I Law LJ UV i Us A I aU I ee CAH Y OG l La To view the MIP Port Table click on the MIP Port Table button MAC Address Figure 3 62 CFM MIP Table window CFM MEP Settings To view this window click on the Add MEP button in the CFM MA Settings window L2 Features gt CFM gt CFM Settings MD MA MA1 MEF Name MEF 1D 1 8191 A Port MEP Direction Inward v MEP s Total Entries 0 MEP ID Direction MAC Address Figure 3 63 CFM MEP Settings window Parameter Description MEP Name MEP name It is unique among all MEPs configured on the device CINES MEP MEPID It should be configured in the MA s MEP ID list Pot Port number This port should be a member of the MA s associated VLAN MEP Direction This is the MEP direction Inward Inward facing up MEP An Inward facing MEP drops all CFM frames at its level or lower that are received from the Inward side and forwards all CFM frames at a higher level regardless of the origin of the frame Inward or Outward Outward Outward facing down MEP An Outward facing port drops all CFM frames at it level or lower coming from the bridge relay function side It
48. Password one set in the New Local Enabled field will result in a fail message MAC based Access Control MAC based Access Control is a method to authenticate and authorize access using either a port or host For port based MAC the method decides port access rights while for host based MAC the method determines the MAC access rights A MAC user must be authenticated before being granted access to a network Both local authentication and remote RADIUS server authentication methods are supported In MAC based Access Control MAC user information in a local database or a RADIUS server database is searched for authentication Following the authentication result users achieve different levels of authorization Notes About MAC based Access Control There are certain limitations and regulations regarding the MAC based Access Control 1 Once this feature is enabled for a port the Switch will clear the FDB of that port 2 Ifa port is granted clearance for a MAC address in a VLAN that is not a Guest VLAN other MAC addresses on that port must be authenticated for access and otherwise will be blocked by the Switch 3 Ports that have been enabled for Link Aggregation Port Security or GVRP authentication cannot be enabled for MAC based Authentication MAC based Access Control Settings The following window is used to set the parameters for the MAC based Access Control function on the Switch Here the user can set the running state method of
49. Port Specifies an IPv6 L4 TCP source port submask Destination Port Specifies an IPv6 L4 TCP destination port submask Source Port Specifies an IPv6 L4 UDP source port submask Destination Port Specifies an IPv6 L4 UDP destination port submask Select Permit to specify that the packets that match the access profile are forwarded by the Switch according to any additional rule added see below Select Deny to specify the packets that match the access profile are not forwarded by the Switch and will be filtered Select Mirror to specify that packets that match the access profile are mirrored to a port defined in the config mirror port command Port Mirroring must be enabled and a target port must be set Priority 0 7 Enter a priority value if you want to re write the 802 1p user priority of a packet to the value entered in the Priority field which meets the criteria specified previously in this command before forwarding it on to the specified CoS queue For more information on priority queues CoS queues and mapping for 802 1p see the QoS section of this manual Replace Priority Click on the box to enable this option and manually enter the replacement value used to re write the 802 1p user priority value entered in the Priority field which meets the criteria specified previously in this command before forwarding it on to the specified CoS queue Otherwise a packet will have its incoming 802 1p user priority re written to its origin
50. Radius server assigned egress bandwithno limit to Port Radius server lt server_ip gt assigned egress bandwith no limit to Port lt portNum gt Account lt user_account gt mionmatgna Radius server assigned Radius server lt server_ip gt assigned 802 1p default 802 1p default priority to priority lt priority 0 7 gt to Port lt portNum gt Account Informational Port lt user_account gt 802 1x Authentication 802 1x Authentication failure from Username Wani failure lt user_account gt Port lt portNum gt MAC lt macaddr gt 9 802 1x Authentication failure for the radius server lt server_ip gt timeout from Username lt user_account gt Warning Port lt portNum gt MAC lt macaddr gt 802 1x Authentication 802 1x Authentication failure for the 802 1X client session failure for the 802 1X client timeout from Username lt user_account gt Port Warning session timeout lt portNum gt MAC lt macaddr gt 802 1x Authentication 802 1x Authentication success from Username leone eee SUCCESS lt user_account gt Port lt portNum gt MAC lt macaddr gt Loopback Port loop occurred Port lt portNum gt LBD loop occurred Port blocked Port loop detection Port lt portNum gt LBD port recovered Loop detection Informational 261 802 1x Authentication failure for the radius server restarted after interval time restarted Critical Port with VID loop Port lt portNum gt VID lt vlanID gt
51. Remote Port TOMO Mi ii uae scauinecoeaseccueseeseee 238 o a aa 239 Browse E memet OAM Event LOA a a iia eto 239 Browse Ethernet OAM Statstos ti ii 239 Connectivity Fault Manada Menard 240 CRM Paull Tables ista tll aide tela She ee oe Be Beetle ae 240 CENIDE TADO a cla 240 CEM Packe COn a a a a o a 241 CGEM MIPCOCM TD ela od alos dls raso 241 MAC based Access Control Authentication State ooccccoconnncccnnoccccononnncononcononnnnnnnnnnnonannnnonannnnnnonrrnnnnnanannnnanoss 242 Browse Session Tal io 242 MAC Address Tal o date 243 SA O o EA 244 Save and TOOLS e 245 Save Contigua eisie aa a a a aaee a aaia a a Ta aaea 245 SNE A A A T NA 246 A 246 Configuration File Upload amp Download win a dci 246 upload Eog Flle onda RO O A 247 AAA e e o E SO E erased ede eee etek a cei 247 RNO tests a 248 Download A o tee 249 FRODOOU SS MM A E do 249 Appendix A Technical Specific lO miii is 250 Appendix B System Log EnNtrl8sS coonccocncconncicnncconaccnnaccnnaccnnannonancnnancnnanrnnancnnanrenancnnanrnnanennanos 253 Appendix C RADIUS Attributes AsSignMent ncconncccnnnccnnnnccnnanccnnnnccnnnnnnnnnnnennnnenannnenannrenanannns 268 Append D GIOSSAUY iiccsiicccesces ct cee cee cc snccec reece secre enccni T 271 Vil Intended Readers The DES 3200 Series User Manual contains information for setup and management of the Switch This manual is intended for network managers familiar with network management concepts and
52. The VLAN ID number of the VLAN on which the above Unicast MAC address resides MAC Address The MAC address to which packets will be statically forwarded This must be a unicast MAC address Pot Select the port number on which the MAC address entered above resides VLAN Name The VLAN Name associated with the subnet Click Apply to implement the changes made The new entries will be displayed on the bottom half of the window Multicast Forwarding Settings To view this window click L2 Features gt Forwarding amp Filtering gt Multicast Forwarding Settings MAC Address Clear All Apply al 8 4 TH ME E a A 156 The EP da 194 0 21 ZE 2a 2 25 2H 27 38 i 2 E i a E T la Mone Egress Egress Ports Total Entries 1 ID VLAN Mame MAC Address Mode Egress Ports default 01 00 00 00 00 11 Static Figure 3 49 Multicast Forwarding Settings window The following parameters can be set Parameter Description VLAN ID 1 4094 The VLAN ID of the VLAN to which the corresponding MAC address belongs MAC Address The MAC address that will be added to the multicast forwarding table Port Settings Allows the selection of ports that will be members of the static multicast group The options are None No restrictions on the port dynamically joining the multicast group When None is chosen the port will not be a member of the static multicast group Egress The port is a static member of the multicast group Click All to
53. Web manager and click Save Log to open the following window Current Status Completed Program Firmware Write Flash Status saver Figure 8 2 Save Log window Save All Open the Save drop down menu at the top of the Web manager and click Save All to open the following window Current Status Completed Program Firmware Write Flash Status saved Figure 8 3 Save All window Configuration File Upload amp Download The Switch can upload and download configuration files Open the Tools drop down menu on the left hand side of the menu bar at the top of the Web manager and click Configuration File Upload amp Download to open the following window Interface Mame File Increment Upload Note The Increment option use only for Download Configuration Figure 8 4 Configuration File Upload amp Download window Use the radio button to select IPv4 and specify File name or use the radio button to select IPv6 enter a Server IP Interface Name and File name Click either Download or Upload to initiate the file transfer 246 Upload Log File To upload a log file enter a Server IP address use the radio button to select IPv4 and then enter a File name or use the radio button to select IPv6 enter a Server IP Interface Name and File name Click Upload Open the Tools drop down menu on the left hand side of the menu bar at the top of the Web manager and click Upload Log File to open the follo
54. XTACACS and TACACS are separate entities and are not compatible The Switch and the server must be configured exactly the same using the same protocol For example if the Switch is set up for TACACS authentication so must be the host server 161 Authentication Policy Settings This window offers an administrator defined authentication policy for users trying to access the Switch When Enabled the device will check the Login Method List and choose a technique for user authentication upon login To access the following window click Security gt Access Authentication Control gt Authentication Policy Settings Authentication Policy Disabled w Response Timeout 0 255 sec User Attempts 1 255 3 times Apply Authentication policy is disabled Figure 5 33 Authentication Policy Settings window The following parameters can be set Parameters Description Authentication Policy Use the pull down menu to enable or disable the Authentication Policy on the Switch Response Timeout 0 255 This field will set the time the Switch will wait for a response of authentication from the user The user may set a time between 0 and 255 seconds The default setting is 30 seconds User Attempts 1 255 This command will configure the maximum number of times the Switch will accept authentication attempts Users failing to be authenticated after the set amount of attempts will be denied access to the Switch and will be locked ou
55. also select the desired time interval to update the statistics between 7s and 60s where s stands for seconds The default value is one second To clear the current statistics shown click the Clear button in the top left hand corner 223 The following information is displayed Parameter Description InvalidServerAddresses The number of RADIUS Access Response packets received from unknown addresses The NAS Identifier of the RADIUS authentication client This is not necessarily the same as sySName in MIB II Serverlndex The identification number assigned to each RADIUS Authentication server that the client shares a secret with AuthServerAddress The conceptual table listing the RADIUS authentication servers with which the client shares a secret ServerPortNumber The UDP port the client is using to send requests to this server RoundTripTime The time interval in hundredths of a second between the most recent Access Reply Access Challenge and the Access Request that matched it from this RADIUS authentication server AccessRequests The number of RADIUS Access Request packets sent to this server This does not include retransmissions AccessRetransmissions The number of RADIUS Access Request packets retransmitted to this RADIUS authentication server AccessAccepts The number of RADIUS Access Accept packets valid or invalid received from this server AccessRejects The number of RADIUS Access Reject packets valid
56. and daemons that have not been explicitly assigned a Facility may use any of the local use facilities or they may use the user level Facility Those Facilities that have been designated are shown in the following Bold font indicates the facility values that the Switch is currently employing Server ID Severity Facility Numerical Facility Code Numerical Facility Code NTP subsystem log audit log alert clock daemon kernel messages user level messages mail system system daemons security authorization messages messages generated internally by syslog line printer subsystem network news subsystem local use 0 local0 local use 1 local1 local use 2 local2 local use 3 local3 UUCP subsystem clock daemon local use 4 local4 local use 5 local5 security authorization messages local use 6 local6 FTP daemon local use 7 local7 UDP Port Type the UDP port number used for sending Syslog messages The default is 514 514 or 6000 65535 Choose Enabled or Disabled to activate or deactivate To add a new entry enter the appropriate information and click Apply 25 DHCP Relay The relay hops count limit allows the maximum number of hops routers that the DHCP messages can be relayed through to be set If a packet s hop count is equal to or more than the hop count limit the packet is dropped The range is between 7 and 16 hops with a default value of 4 The relay time threshold sets the
57. attached to an IEEE 802 LAN to advertise to other stations attached to the same IEEE 802 LAN The major capabilities provided by this system is that it incorporates the station the management address or addresses of the entity or entities that provide management of those capabilities and the identification of the station s point of attachment to the IEEE 802 LAN required by those management entity or entities The information distributed via this protocol is stored by its recipients in a standard Management Information Base MIB making it possible for the information to be accessed by a Network Management System NMS through a management protocol such as the Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP 106 LLDP Global Settings To view this window click L2 Features gt LLDP gt LLDP Global Settings LLDP State Disabled Enabled LLDP Forward Message Disabled O Enabled Message Tx Interval 5 32768 sec Message Tx Hold Multiplier 2 10 LLDP Reinit Delay 1 10 sec LLDP Tx Delay 1 8192 sec LLDP Notification Interval 5 3600 sec LLDP System Information Chassis ID Subtype MAC Address Chassis ID 00 32 28 53 10 20 System Mame System Description Fast Ethernet Switch System Capabilities Repeater Bridge Figure 3 52 LLDP Global Settings window The following parameters can be set Parameter Description LLDP State Used to enable or disable LLDP on the Switch LLDP Forward When LLDP is Disabled this function
58. authenticated by AAA local method Username lt username gt Login failed through SSH from lt userlP gt authenticated by AAA local method Username lt username gt Successful login through Console authenticated by AAA Informational none method Username lt username gt Successful login through Web from lt userlP gt authenticated by AAA none method Username Informational lt username gt Successful login through Web SSL from lt userlP gt authenticated by AAA none method Username Informational lt username gt Successful login through Telnet from lt userlP gt authenticated by AAA none method Username Informational lt username gt Successful login through SSH from lt userlP gt authenticated by AAA none method Username Informational lt username gt 256 Successful login through Console authenticated by AAA server Login failed through Console authenticated by AAA server Login failed through Console due to AAA server timeout or improper configuration Successful login through Web authenticated by AAA server Login failed through Web authenticated by AAA server Login failed through Web due to AAA server timeout or improper configuration Successful login through Web SSL authenticated by AAA server Login failed through Web SSL authenticated by AAA server Login failed through Web SSL due to AAA server timeout or improper configuration Successful login through T
59. changes made NOTE If a user configures the serial port s baud rate the baud rate will take effect and save immediately 14 IP Address Settings The IP address may initially be set using the console interface prior to connecting to it through the Ethernet If the Switch IP address has not yet been changed read the introduction of the DES 3200 Series CLI Reference Manual for more information Click Configuration gt IP Address Settings to display the following window Static Oncor IP Interface Management VLAN Name Interface Admin State IPv4 Address subnet Mask Gateway DHCP Option 12 State Disabled DHCP Option 12 Host Name LA Max 63 characters _ Apply Figure 2 4 IP Address Settings window To manually assign the Switch s IP address subnet mask and default gateway address 1 Click Static at the top of the window 2 Enter the appropriate IPv4 Address and Subnet Mask 3 To access the Switch from a different subnet from the one it is installed on enter the IP address of the Gateway If the Switch will be managed from the subnet on which it is installed leave the default address 0 0 0 0 in this field 4 If no VLANs have been previously configured on the Switch you can use the default Management VLAN Name The default VLAN contains all of the Switch ports as members If VLANs have been previously configured on the Switch the Management VLAN Name of
60. ee permit norrit a a o E AA A Ia il Figure 3 35 Limited Multicast Range Settings window To add a new range enter the information and click Add to delete an entry enter the information and click Delete Max Multicast Group Settings This window allows users to configure the ports on the Switch that will be a part of the maximum number of multicast groups that can be learned To add a new Max Multicast Group enter the information and click Apply To view this window click L2 Features gt IGMP Snooping gt Max Multicast Group Settings 90 Max Group 1 1024 Max Multicast Group Figure 3 36 Max Multicast Group Settings window The following fields can be set Parameter Description From Port To Port Use the drop down menus to choose a range of ports Max Group 1 1024 Enter the maximum number of the multicast groups The range is from 7 to 1024 MLD Snooping Settings Multicast Listener Discovery MLD Snooping is an IPv6 function used similarly to IGMP snooping in IP v4 It is used to discover ports on a VLAN that are requesting multicast data Instead of flooding all ports on a selected VLAN with multicast traffic MLD snooping will only forward multicast data to ports that wish to receive this data through the use of queries and reports produced by the requesting ports and the source of the multicast traffic MLD snooping is accomplished through the examination of the layer 3 part of an MLD cont
61. examine the VLAN identifier of each packet header and use this as the full or partial criterion for forwarding Selecting this option instructs the Switch to examine the 802 1p priority value of each packet header and use this as the or part of the criterion for forwarding Clicking Create on the previous Add ACL Profile window inserts a new Access Profile List entry in the Access Profile List wndow shown below To add another Access Profile click Add ACL Profile To delete a profile click the corresponding Delete button to view the specific configurations for an entry click the Show Details button To add a rule to the Access Profile entry click the Add View Rules button To remove all listed profiles click on the Delete All button Add ACL Profile Total Used Rule Entries Total Unused Rule Entries 0 512 Profile Type Owner Type ey Ethernet AGL Show Details Details Add View Rules Rules Delete Figure 6 48 Access Profile List window for Ethernet example To view the configurations for a previously configured entry click on the corresponding Show Details button which will display the following window ACL Profile Details Profile ID 1 Profile Type Ethernet Owner Type ACL 802 1P Yes Show All Profiles Figure 6 49 Access Profile Detail Information window for Ethernet example To return to the Access Profile List window click Show All Profiles To add a rule to a previously configured entry click on
62. facing MEP drops all CFM frames at its level or lower that are received from the Inward side and forwards all CFM frames at a higher level regardless of the origin of the frame Inward or Outward If the port on which the inward MEP is configured is blocked by Spanning Tree Protocol the MEP can no longer transmit or receive CFM messages 114 An Outward facing MEP source frames toward the bridge port and can only be configured on routed ports An Outward facing port drops all CFM frames at it level or lower coming from the bridge relay function side lt processes all CFM frames at its level and drops all CFM frames at a lower level coming from the bridge port An Outward facing port forwards all CFM frames at higher levels regardless of which direction the frames come in If the port on which the outward MEP is configured is blocked by Spanning Tree Protocol the MEP can still transmit and receive CFM messages through the bridge port A MIP is a maintenance point that is internal to an MD not at the boundary A MIP receives CFM frames from other MIPs and from MEPs These frames are cataloged and forwarded using the bridge relay function and bridge port All CFM frames at a lower level than the MIP are blocked and dropped regardless of the origin All CFM frames at a higher level are forwarded regardless of the origin If the port on which a MIP is configured is blocked by Spanning Tree Protocol the MIP cannot receive CFM messages or relay them towa
63. features SNMPv3 Specifies that the SNMP version 3 will be used SNMPv3 provides secure access to devices through a combination of authentication and encrypting packets over the network Security Level The Security Level settings only apply to SNMPv3 NoAuthNoPriv Specifies that there will be no authorization and no encryption of packets sent between the Switch and a remote SNMP manager AuthNoPriv Specifies that authorization will be required but there will be no encryption of packets sent between the Switch and a remote SNMP manager AuthPriv Specifies that authorization will be required and that packets sent between the Switch and a remote SNMP manger will be encrypted To implement the new settings click Apply SNMP User Table This window displays all of the SNMP User s currently configured on the Switch and also allows you to add new users To view this window click Configuration gt SNMP Settings gt SNMP User Table Add User Liser Mame Group Mame SAIMP Version SNMP W3 Encryption Auth Protocol by Password 15 Password o Priv Protocol by Password Mec Password E Auth Protocal by Key Key AAA Priv Protocal by Key lone Key AAA Total Entries 1 Group Marne SMMP Version Auth Protocol Priv Protocal initial initial Figure 2 34 SNMP User Table window To delete an existing SNMP User Table entry click the corresponding Delete button The following parameters may be set Parameter
64. goes simultaneously from different ends of the ring WTR Time Specifies the wait to restore WTR time of the R APS function The WTR time defines the amount of time mandated to pass after conditions clear After the WTR time expires the RPL returns to idle state blocking This is used to prevent too frequent operation of ERPS due to an intermittent signal failure defect Click Apply to implement changes apply the enable or disable state for ERPS ERPS log and ERPS trap settings To create a new R APS VLAN enter the required settings in the menu and click on the Create button 124 QoS Bandwidth Control Traffic Control Queue Bandwidth Control Settings 802 1p Default Priority 802 1p User Priority QoS Scheduling Settings Priority Mapping TOS Mapping DSCP Map Settings The Switch supports 802 1p priority queuing Quality of Service The following section discusses the implementation of QoS Quality of Service and benefits of using 802 1p priority queuing Advantages of QoS QoS is an implementation of the IEEE 802 1p standard that allows network administrators a method of reserving bandwidth for important functions that require a large amount of bandwidth or have a high priority such as VoIP Voice over Internet Protocol Web browsing applications file server applications or video conferencing Not only can larger bandwidth be created but other less critical traffic can be limited so excessive bandwidth can be saved
65. gt Memory Utilization DRAM Utilization Refresh Total DRAM 131072 KB Used DRAM 65761 KB Utilization 50 FLASH Utilization Total FLASH 16384 KB Lised FLASH Tari KB Utilization 44 Figure 7 6 Memory Utilization window 213 ayi 6 YARN 4NM Mf f aya jaa LA en ee ae ERP aia E lLAARIIA xStack DES 3200 10 18 28 28F Layer 2 Ethernet Managed Switch User Manual Packets The Web Manager allows various packet statistics to be viewed as either a line graph or a table Six windows are offered Received Rx These windows display the Rx packets on the Switch To select a port to view these statistics for select the port by using the Port pull down menu The user may also use the real time graphic of the Switch at the top of the Web page by simply clicking on a port To view the following graph of packets received on the Switch click Monitoring gt Packets gt Received Rx View Table Reply 1000 ee Bytes 3401 a00 Packets 700 600 500 400 300 200 100 UnitiPackets sec or byles sec Time Interval a Record Number 200 ShowHide M Bytes M Packets Figure 7 7 Received Rx window for Bytes and Packets To view the Received Rx Table window click View Table View Graphic Ay Total sec Packets Multicast Broadcast Tx Packets Totalisec Figure 7 8 Received Rx Table window for Bytes and Packets 214 The following field
66. header Select Permit to specify that the packets that match the access profile are forwarded by the Switch according to any additional rule added see below Select Deny to specify the packets that match the access profile are not forwarded by the Switch and will be filtered Time Range Name Tick the check box and enter the name of the Time Range settings that has been previously configured in the Time Range Settings window This will set specific times when this access rule will be implemented on the Switch Ports sd Enter a range of ports to be configured Click Apply to display the following CPU Access Rule List window i Profile Type Action Permit Show Details Delete Rules Figure 6 84 CPU Access Rule List window for IPv4 example To view the configurations for a previously configured rule click on the corresponding Show Details button which will display the following CPU Access Rule Detail Information window PU ACL Rule Details Profile 10 2 Access ID 1 Profile Type IP Action Permit Ports 2 DSP B2 Show All Rules Figure 6 85 CPU Access Rule Detail Information window for IPv4 example 200 To create an IPv6 ACL click Add CPU ACL Profile in the CPU Access Profile List window and then use the drop down menu to select a Profile ID between 7 and 3 and click the IPv6 ACL radio button Click Select and the following window will appear Select Profile ID Select ACL Type O Ethernet ACL OlPv4 ACL
67. instructs the Switch to specify that the access profile will apply only to packets with this 802 1p priority value Ethernet Type Ticking this option instructs the Switch to examine the Ethernet type value in each frame s header Click Apply to set this entry in the Switch s memory MAC Address Tick either Source MAC Mask and enter a source MAC address mask for the source MAC address or Destination MAC Mask and enter a destination MAC address mask for the destination The following CPU Access Profile List window opens 194 xStack DES 3200 10 18 28 28F Layer 2 Ethernet Managed Switch User Manual CPU Interface Filtering State Disabled Enabled Add CPU ACL Profile Total Used Rule Entries Total Unused Rule Entries 0 15 E Profile Type Owner Type dt Ethernet CPU ACL Show Details Details Add View Rules Rules Delete Figure 6 74 CPU Access Profile List window for Ethernet example To view the settings of a previously correctly created profile click the corresponding Show Details button on the following CPU Access Profile List wndow above The following window opens Profile ID q Profile Type Ethernet Owner Type CPUACL 802 1P Yes Show All Profiles Figure 6 75 CPU Access Profile Detail Information window for Ethernet To return to the CPU Access Profile List window click Show All Profiles To add a rule to a previously configured entry click on the corresponding Add View Rules The following win
68. layout VLANs can be used to combine any collection of LAN segments into an autonomous user group that appears as a single LAN VLANs also logically segment the network into different broadcast domains so that packets are forwarded only between ports within the VLAN Typically a VLAN corresponds to a particular subnet although not necessarily VLANs can enhance performance by conserving bandwidth and improve security by limiting traffic to specific domains A VLAN is a collection of end nodes grouped by logic instead of physical location End nodes that frequently communicate with each other are assigned to the same VLAN regardless of where they are physically on the network Logically a VLAN can be equated to a broadcast domain because broadcast packets are forwarded to only members of the VLAN on which the broadcast was initiated Notes About VLANs No matter what basis is used to uniquely identify end nodes and assign these nodes VLAN membership packets cannot cross VLANs without a network device performing a routing function between the VLANs The Switch supports IEEE 802 1Q VLANs and Port Based VLANs The port untagging function can be used to remove the 802 1Q tag from packet headers to maintain compatibility with devices that are tag unaware The Switch s default is to assign all ports to a single 802 1Q VLAN named default The default VLAN has a VID 1 The member ports of Port based VLANs may overlap if desired 61 IEEE
69. leaves the Exhausted state and returns to normal mode Trap log Use the pull down menu to enable or disable the sending of messages to the devices SNMP agent and switch log once the Safeguard Engine has been activated by a high CPU utilization rate Mode Toggle the State field to either Strict or Fuzzy for the Safeguard Engine of the Switch Click Apply to implement the settings made Trusted Host Use the Security IP Management to permit remote stations to manage the Switch If one or more designated management stations are defined by the user only the chosen stations as defined by IP address will be allowed management privilege through the Web manager Telnet session or SNMP manager To define a management station IP setting type in the IP address with a proper subnet mask and click the Add button To view this window click Security gt Trusted Host Permitted Access IP E NetMask gt o Trusted Host Table Group Permitted Access Met Mask Note Create alistoflP addresses that can access the switch Your local hostiP address must be one ofthe IP addresses to avoid disconnection Figure 5 3 Trusted Host window To delete an entry click the corresponding Delete button To delete all the entries on the Trusted Host Table click the Delete All button IP MAC Port Binding The IP network layer uses a four byte address The Ethernet link layer uses a six byte MAC address Binding these two address types together allow
70. lo C Auto Assign Source MAC Address 00 03 02 03 04 05 e q 00 00 00 00 FF FF Source Mask e 9 00 00 00 00 FF FF Destination MAC Address e 9 00 00 00 00 FF FF Destination Mask e 0 00 00 00 00 FF FF Service e g FFFF Mask FFFF e 9 FFFF Customer BBBB e g FFFF Mask FFFF e g FFFF Offset 1 e g FFFF Mask FFFF e g FFFF Tag Offset 2 2222 e g FFFF Mask FFFF 8 9 F FFF Rule Action Action Permit v A A Priority 0 7 Replace Priority a Replace DSCP 0 63 Time Range Name E Counter Ports e e 9 61 4 6 9 Apply Figure 6 69 Add Access Rule window for Packet Content example 190 The following parameters may be configured for the Packet Content filter Parameter Description Access ID 1 65535 Type in a unique identifier number for this access This value can be set from 1 to 65535 Source MAC Address Specify the source MAC address of the packets that needed to be examined Specify a mask for the source MAC address The filter is the result of the AND operation between this mask and the source MAC address Destination MAC Specify the destination MAC address of the packets that need to be examined Address Destination Mask Specify a mask for the destination MAC address The filter is the result of the AND operation between this mask and the destination MAC address Specify the values for customer and service tags which need to be examined The mask options can
71. of member ports to add to the multicast VLAN They will become the untagged 1 4 6 member ports of the ISM VLAN Source Port e g Select the source Port for the multicast VLAN 1 4 6 Tagged Member Specifies the ports that will be tagged as members of the multicast VLAN Port e g 1 4 6 Untagged Source A range of untagged source ports to add to the multicast VLAN The reassigned PVID of the Port e g 1 4 6 untagged source port will be automatically changed to the multicast VLAN Remap Priority The remap priority is associated with the data traffic to be forwarded on the multicast VLAN If Value 0 7 None is selected the packet s original priority will be used The default setting is None Replace Priority Tick this option so that the packet s priority will be changed based on the remap priority by the Switch This option takes effect only when remap priority is set To edit an entry click the corresponding Edit button To delete an entry click the corresponding Delete button 87 rE 4L DAMI 9 1 99 2 2 62 22i ALAF J Fina ray ryr TNnhAhananns S narrar IICA S rf jij VID IP aa IPA a a y A INEI Van20 0020O SW ITRN i JCA To add a multicast VLAN to a profile that has been created click the corresponding hyperlinked Group List to reveal the following window VLAN Name Multicast Address 6 9 235 7 1 1 235 1 1 9 Delete All IGMP Snooping Multicast VLAN Group List 0 Multicast Address List
72. or ACL When configuring the mode of the port to ACL the Switch will create an ACL access entry corresponding to the entries of this port If the port changes to ARP all the ACL entries will be deleted automatically The default mode is ARP SLT 0 500 Enter a Stop learning Threshold value between 0 and 500 The default SLT for each port is 500 Max Entry 1 50 Specifies the maximum number of IP MAC port binding entries between 7 and 50 The default is 5 Alternatively tick the No Limit check box IMP Binding Entry Settings This window is used to create static IP MAC port binding entries on the Switch To view this window click Security gt IP MAC Port Binding gt IMP Binding Entry Settings IPF Address MAC Address Ports Po CY Dat Pots Any View All Delete All Total Entries 0 IF Address MAC Address Mode ACL Status Figure 5 6 IMP Binding Entry Settings window The following fields can be set or modified Parameter Description IP Address Enter the IP address to bind to the MAC address set below MAC Address Enter the MAC address to bind to the IP Address set above Specify the Switch ports for which to configure this IP MAC port binding entry IP Address MAC Address Tick the All Ports check box to configure this entry for all ports on the Switch Click Apply for implement changes click Find to search for an entry click Show All for the table to display all entries and click Delete to remove an en
73. or invalid received from this server AccessChallenges The number of RADIUS Access Challenge packets valid or invalid received from this server AccessResponses The number of malformed RADIUS Access Response packets received from this server Malformed packets include packets with an invalid length Bad authenticators or Signature attributes or known types are not included as malformed access responses BadAuthenticators The number of RADIUS Access Response packets containing invalid authenticators or Signature attributes received from this server PendingRequests The number of RADIUS Access Request packets destined for this server that have not yet timed out or received a response This variable is incremented when an Access Request is sent and decremented due to receipt of an Access Accept Access Reject or Access Challenge a timeout or retransmission Timeouts The number of authentication timeouts to this server After a timeout the client may retry to the same server send to a different server or give up A retry to the same server is counted as a retransmit as well as a timeout A send to a different server is counted as a Request as well as a timeout UnknownTypes The number of RADIUS packets of unknown type which were received from this server on the authentication port PacketsDropped The number of RADIUS packets of which were received from this server on the authentication port and dropped for some other reason
74. password encryption is Disabled the password will be in plain text form However if the user specifies the password in encrypted form or if the password has been converted to encrypted form by the last enable password encryption command the password will still be in encrypted form and cannot be reverted back to plain text form To access this window click Configuration gt Password Encryption Password Encryption State Disabled O Enabled Apply Figure 2 23 Password Encryption window 31 INV FRE OY AAAA A A d Ta Yo lO I A Til LAA IEO 1 L i RAY J k PDFS 3200 10 18 98 9S8EF I aver 2 Fthernet M a Switch ear Mania DEO ULZUU 1TU FTO ZO AOr EdvCcl 4 CUICH Vic JU OWILCII USCI WVialludl PA CLI Paging Settings CLI paging can be Enabled or Disabled in this window It is Enabled by default CLI paging settings are used when issuing a command which causes the console screen to rapidly scroll through several pages This command will cause the console to pause at the end of each page To access this window click Configuration gt CLI Paging Settings Clipaging State O Disabled Enabled Apply Figure 2 24 CLI Paging Settings window 32 Firmware Information Information about current firmware images stored on the Switch can be viewed To access this window click Configuration gt Firmware Information Version Update Time From 1 10 8010 3661996 0000 00 00 00 02 02 10 24 22 5 Anonymous CONSO
75. port and returning it to an Enabled status To utilize this method of Storm Control choose the Shutdown option of the Action field in the window below To view this window click QoS gt Traffic Control Traffic Control Settings From Port 07 To Por 01 Action Drop M Count Down 0 or 5 30 os Time Interval 5 30 Threshold 64 1000000 kbitis storm Control Type min Traffic Trap Settings Storm Control Type Action Threshold Interval Shutdown Forever eth Mone Drop 0 Drop Mone Drop Mone Mone Mone Mone Mone Mone i in in in en en en in in in in im mM on cn mon in on on Figure 4 3 Traffic Control window 128 The following parameters can be set or are displayed Parameter Description Traffic Control Settings ay Port To A consecutive group of ports may be configured starting with the selected port or Select the method of traffic Control from the pull down menu The choices are Drop Utilizes the hardware Traffic Control mechanism which means the Switch s hardware will determine the Packet Storm based on the Threshold value stated and drop packets until the issue is resolved Shutdown Utilizes the Switch s software Traffic Control mechanism to determine the Packet Storm occurring Once detected the port will deny all incoming traffic to the port except STP BPDU packets which are essential in keeping the Spanning Tree operational on the Swit
76. represented by a single icon e Expand To expand the SIM group in detail e Remove from group Remove a member from a group Configure Launch the web management to configure the Switch Property To pop up a window to display the device information Candidate Switch Icon Add to group Property Figure 2 51 Right Clicking a Candidate icon The following options may appear for the user to configure e Collapse To collapse the group that will be represented by a single icon 53 Expand To expand the SIM group in detail e Add to group Add a candidate to a group Clicking this option will reveal the following dialog for the user to enter a password for authentication from the Candidate Switch before being added to the SIM group Click OK to enter the password or Cancel to exit the window Input password Password l Java Applet Window Figure 2 52 Input password window o Property To pop up a window to display the device information Menu Bar The Single IP Management window contains a menu bar for device configurations as seen below File Group Device View Help Figure 2 53 Menu Bar of the Topology View The five menus on the menu bar are as follows File o Print Setup Will set the default printer properties Print Topology Will print the topology map e Preference Will set display properties such as polling interval and the views to open at SIM startup Group Add to gr
77. s setting Authorization for attributes is disabled by default RADIUS Authorization If specified to enable the authorized attributes for example VLAN 802 1p default priority and ACL assigned by the RADUIS server will be accepted when the global authorization status is enabled Local Authorization If specified to enable the authorized attributes assigned by the local database will be accepted if the global authorization status is enabled Trap Use this pull down menu to enable or disable traps to be sent for MAC based Access Control Use this pull down menu to enable or disable logging for MAC based Access Control Parameter Description Config Guest VLAN to the Guest VLAN configuration window Use the pull down menu to enable or disable the MAC based Access Control function on individual ports Mode Toggle between Port Based and Host Based Aging Time 1 1440 Enter an aging value between 7 and 1440 minutes The default is 1440 Tick the Infinite check box for no aging time Hold Time 1 300 Enter a hold value between 7 and 300 seconds The default is 300 Tick the Infinite check box for no hold time Max User 1 128 Enter a value for the maximum number of users between 7 and 128 The default is 128 Tick the No Limit check box for no maximum user limit MAC based Access Control Local Settings The following window is used to set a list of MAC addresses along with their corresponding target VLAN w
78. selected in this example using the radio button to select an ACL Type Ethernet ACL has been selected in this example and then clicking Select Next click on the boxes near the top of the window which will then turn red and reveal parameters for configuration MAC Address 802 1Q VLAN 802 1p and Ethernet Type have been selected in this example At least one mask must then be selected before clicking the Create button 802 1p has been ticked in this example To return to the Access Profile List window click lt lt Back The following parameters can be configured for Ethernet ACL Parameter Description Select ACL Type Select profile based on Ethernet MAC Address IPv4 address IPv6 or packet content mask This will change the window according to the requirements for the type of profile Select Ethernet ACL to instruct the Switch to examine the layer 2 part of each packet header Select IPv4 ACL to instruct the Switch to examine the IPv4 address in each frame s header Select IPv6 ACL to instruct the Switch to examine the IPv6 address in each frame s header Select Packet Content ACL to specify a mask to hide the content of the packet header MAC Address Tick either Source MAC Mask and enter the source MAC address mask or Destination MAC Mask and enter the destination MAC address mask 802 1Q VLAN VLAN Specifies a VLAN VLAN Mask 0 FFF Specifies a VLAN mask 177 Selecting this option instructs the Switch to
79. set a priority value between 0 and 61440 To modify an entry click the Edit button To see the STP Instance Operational Status of a previously configured setting click View The following window will be displayed STP Priority Settings wmo id priory o Total Entries 1 Instance Type Instance Status Instance Priority CIST Enabled 32768 Bridge Priority 32768 SYS ID Ext 0 STP Instance Operational Status MSTP ID Designated Root Bridge 32768 00 21 91 AF EA 00 External Root Cost Regional Root Bridge 32768 00 21 91 4F E4 00 Internal Root Cost Desionated Bridge 32 768 00 21 91 AF EA 00 Root Port Max Age Forward Delay Remaining Hops Last Topology Change Topology Changes Count Figure 3 46 STP Instance Settings View window 102 MSTP Port Information This window displays the current MSTP Port Information and can be used to update the port configuration for an MSTI ID If a loop occurs the MSTP function will use the port priority to select an interface to put into the forwarding state Set a higher priority value for interfaces to be selected for forwarding first In instances where the priority value is identical the MSTP function will implement the lowest MAC address into the forwarding state and other interfaces will be blocked Remember that lower priority values mean higher priorities for forwarding packets To view the following window click L2 Features gt Spanning Tree gt MSTP Port Information MSTP Por
80. the corresponding Add View Rules The following window is displayed Profile Type Action Figure 6 50 initial Access Rule List window Click Add Rule which will reveal the following window 178 Profile Information Profile ID 1 Profile Type Ethernet Owner Type ACL 202 1P Yes Rule Detail Keep an inputfield as blank to treat the corresponding option as do not care Access ID 1 65535 C Auto Assign 802 1P 0 7 Rule Action Action Permit kd Priority 0 7 4 Replace Priority Replace DSCP 0 63 Time Range Mame F Counter Disabled w Ports e 9 1 4 6 9 Previous Page Apply Figure 6 51 Add Access Rule window for Ethernet example To set the Access Rule for Ethernet adjust the following parameters and click Apply Parameter Description Access ID Type in a unique identifier number for this access This value can be set from 7 to 65535 1 65535 Auto Assign Ticking this check box will instruct the Switch to automatically assign an Access ID for the rule being created VLAN Name selecting this option instructs the Switch to examine the VLAN part of each packet header and use this as the or part of the criterion for forwarding VLAN ID 1 4094 Mask 0 FFF Specifies a VLAN ID VLAN ID Allows the entry of a VLAN ID for a previously configured VLAN Source MAC Specifies a MAC address mask for the source MAC address Address Source MAC Specifies a MAC address mask for the source
81. this parameter is True The default value True is equivalent to the Auto value Port STP Allows STP to be Enabled or Disabled for the ports Restricted Role Toggle between True and False to set the restricted role state of the packet The default value is False Restricted TCN Toggle between True and False to set the restricted TCN of the packet The default value is False Forward BPDU This field can be Enabled or Disabled When Enabled it allows the forwarding of STP BPDU packets from other network devices The default is Enabled Choosing the True parameter designates the port as an edge port Edge ports cannot create loops however an edge port can lose edge port status if a topology change creates a potential for a loop An edge port normally should not receive BPDU packets If a BPDU packet is received it automatically loses edge port status Choosing the Auto parameter will indicate that the port will be able to automatically enable edge port status if needed The Hello Time can be set from 7 to 2 seconds This is the interval between two Hello Time 1 2 transmissions of BPDU packets sent by the Root Bridge to tell all other switches that it is indeed the Root Bridge The default value is 2 Click Apply to implement changes made 100 MST Configuration Identification The following windows in the MST Configuration Identification section allow the user to configure a MSTI instance on the Switch These settings will uniqu
82. those ports If the packet doesn t have an 802 10 VLAN tag the port will not alter the packet Thus all packets received by and forwarded by an untagging port will have no 802 1Q VLAN information Remember that the PVID is only used internally within the Switch Untagging is used to send packets from an 802 1Q compliant network device to a non compliant network device Ingress Filtering A port on a switch where packets are flowing into the Switch and VLAN decisions must be made is referred to as an ingress port lf ingress filtering is enabled for a port the Switch will examine the VLAN information in the packet header if present and decide whether or not to forward the packet If the packet is tagged with VLAN information the ingress port will first determine if the ingress port itself is a member of the tagged VLAN If it is not the packet will be dropped If the ingress port is a member of the 802 1Q VLAN the Switch then determines if the destination port is a member of the 802 1Q VLAN If it is not the packet is dropped If the destination port is a member of the 802 1Q VLAN the packet is forwarded and the destination port transmits it to its attached network segment If the packet is not tagged with VLAN information the ingress port will tag the packet with its own PVID as a VID if the port is a tagging port The switch then determines if the destination port is a member of the same VLAN has the same VID as the ingress port If
83. to work properly a TACACS XTACACS TACACS RADIUS server must be configured on a device other than the Switch called an Authentication Server Host and it must include usernames and passwords for authentication When the user is prompted by the Switch to enter usernames and passwords for authentication the Switch contacts the TACACS XTACACS TACACS RADIUS server to verify and the server will respond with one of three messages The server verifies the username and password and the user is granted normal user privileges on the Switch The server will not accept the username and password and the user is denied access to the Switch The server doesn t respond to the verification query At this point the Switch receives the timeout from the server and then moves to the next method of verification configured in the method list The Switch has four built in Authentication Server Groups one for each of the TACACS XTACACS TACACS and RADIUS protocols These built in Authentication Server Groups are used to authenticate users trying to access the Switch The users will set Authentication Server Hosts in a preferable order in the built in Authentication Server Groups and when a user tries to gain access to the Switch the Switch will ask the first Authentication Server Hosts for authentication If no authentication is made the second server host in the list will be queried and so on The built in Authentication Server Groups can only have hosts that a
84. view the following window click Security gt 802 1X gt Reauthenticate Port s Reauthenticate Port Table n Auth PAE State Backend_ State Port Status Figure 5 26 Reauthenticate Port s window for Port based 802 1 X This window allows reauthentication of a port or group of ports by using the drop down menus From Port and To Port and clicking Apply The Reauthenticate Port Table displays the current status of the reauthenticated port s once Apply has been clicked NOTE The user must first globally enable 802 1X in the 802 1X Settings window Security gt 802 1X gt 802 1X Settings before reauthenticating ports Information in the Reauthenticate Port s window cannot be viewed before enabling 802 1X To reauthenticate ports for the MAC based side of 802 1X the user must first enable 802 1X by MAC address in the 802 1X Settings window To view the following window click Security gt 802 1X gt Reauthenticate Port s 154 camper v macadoress ay Figure 5 27 Reauthenticate Port s window for MAC based 802 1X To reauthenticate ports first use the From Port and To Port drop down menus to choose the range of ports Then the user must specify the MAC address to be reauthenticated by entering it into the MAC Address field and ticking the corresponding check box To begin the reauthentication click Apply This window displays the following information Parameter Description FromPort The beginning p
85. which the MAC address below corresponds The MD level of the entry you wish to view The direction of the MEP Inward indicates an inward facing MEP Outward indicates an outward facing MEP The VLAN identifier of the entry you wish to view Click Find to see the entry displayed in the table 240 CFM Packet Counter This window displays the CFM packet Rx Tx counters on the Switch Enter the ports you wish to view and click Find To view this window click Monitoring gt CFM gt CFM Packet Counter as shown below Portlistie 9 1 0 CIAIPort State Transmit v CFM Transmit Statistics Fort AIF kt M BR BM TR TM E E ti O iz 0 E Emi Ei Ee m Ee ee ee ee ee oe M E Soepoecececoececeoece cee eS ce O OGO 5 a Sone 8 0 8G G2 Gb oOo oO oO oe oe ae eo eo aaa oa oe O la aS coe oc Gaeooaceoreeraqcrecroeo O e DO e DA gt e O gt Jm amp OG Soe 5 56 516 ce cece 216 55 cola ola oa oS ole aia Figure 7 37 CFM Packet Counter List window Parameter Description Port List Select the ports to display If not specified all ports will be shown Type Receive Selecting this option will display all the CFM packets received Transmit Selecting this option will display all the CFM packets transmitted CCM Selecting this option will display all the CFM packets transmitted and received Click Find to display the information CFM MIPCCM Table This window displays the CFM MIPCCM en
86. window Use the From Port and To Port pull down menus to choose a port or range of ports to describe and then enter a description of the port s The Medium Type applies only to the Combo ports If configuring the Combo ports this defines the type of transport medium used SFP ports should be nominated Fiber and the Combo 1000BASE T ports should be nominated Copper The result will be displayed in the appropriate switch port number slot C for copper ports and F for fiber ports The following parameters can be configured Parameter Description From Port To Use the pull down menus to select the port or range of ports to be configured Port Medium Type This only applies to the Combo ports If configuring the Combo ports this defines the type of transport medium used SFP ports should be set at Fiber and the Combo 1000BASE T ports should be set at Copper The description of the the ports Click Apply to implement the new settings on the Switch Port Error Disabled The following window will display information about ports that have had their connection status disabled for reasons such as STP loopback detection or link down status To view this window click Configuration gt Port Configuration gt Port Error Disabled 21 Port state Conn ection Status Re ason Figure 2 10 Port Error Disabled window The following parameters are displayed Parameter Description Pot Displays the port that has been error d
87. yet different ciphersuites will affect the security level and the performance of the secured connection The information included in the ciphersuites is not included with the Switch and requires downloading from a third source in a file form called a certificate This function of the Switch cannot be executed without the presence and implementation of the certificate file and can be downloaded to the Switch by utilizing a TFTP server The Switch supports SSLv3 and TLSv1 Other versions of SSL may not be compatible with this Switch and may cause problems upon authentication and transfer of messages from client to host 155 Download Certificate This window is used to download a certificate file for the SSL function on the Switch from a TFTP server The certificate file is a data record used for authenticating devices on the network It contains information on the owner keys for authentication and digital signatures Both the server and the client must have consistent certificate files for optimal use of the SSL function The Switch only supports certificate files with der file extensions The Switch is shipped with a certificate pre loaded though the user may need to download more depending on user circumstances Ciphersuite This window will allow the user to enable SSL on the Switch and implement any one or combination of listed ciphersuites on the Switch A ciphersuite is a security string that determines the exact cryptographic parameters speci
88. 0 10 18 28 28F Layer 2 Ethernet Managed Switch User Manual aA Packet Size The Web Manager allows packets received by the Switch arranged in six groups and classed by size to be viewed as either a line graph or a table Two windows are offered To select a port to view these statistics for select the port by using the Port pull down menu The user may also use the real time graphic of the Switch at the top of the Web page by simply clicking on a port To view the packet size windows click Monitoring gt Packet Size 1000 900 ena 700 BOO 500 512 1023 400 1024 1510 MONOS 300 200 100 Unitipacketssecs Time Interval E B Record Number 200 Apply Show Hide Iw 64 e 65 127 Il 129 255 i 256 511 Mw 512 1023 I 1024 1518 Figure 7 4 Packet Size window To view the Packet Size Table window click the link View Table which will show the following table View Graphic hay Frame Size 128 255 256 511 5121023 4024 1518 Figure 7 5 Packet Size Table window 212 The following fields can be set or viewed Parameter Description Pot Use the drop down menu to choose the port that will display statistics Time Interval Select the desired setting between 7s and 60s where s stands for seconds The default value is one second Record Number Select number of times the Switch will be polled between 20 and 200 The default value is 200 The total number of packets including bad pack
89. 00 0x00000000 0x00000000 Offset 48 63 0x00000000 0x00000000 0x00000000 OXO0000000 Offset 64 79 0x00000000 0x00000000 0x00000000 0x00000022 Show All Profiles Figure 6 94 CPU Access Profile Detail Information window for Packet Content example To return to the CPU Access Profile List window click Show All Profiles To add a rule to a previously configured entry click on the corresponding Add View Rules button and then Add Rule which will reveal the following window 205 Profile Information Profile ID 1 Profile Type Packet Content Ox00000000 Ox00000000 Owner Type CPU ACL Offset 0 15 000000000 Ox00000000 4x00000000 0x00000000 Oset 39 47 0x00000000 00000000000 a 00000000 000000000 0x00000000 000000000 0x00000000 0x00000000 0x00000000 000000000 Offset 49 63 ofset 64 79 4x00000000 00000000 000000000 000000022 Rule Detail Keep an input field as blank to treatthe corresponding option as do not care Access ID 1 5 i Clofiset 0 15 povosoos foooooooa foooooooa foooooooa Clonset 16 31 ocoooooe Jfecacasss ococccos fooooooon Corset 32 47 pooooo Jfenananss fooononna fooooooon Corset 48 63 jpsoooooo fooaoonno J oocacces fooooooon Rule Action Pe a Action Permit w Time Range Name Ports M e 0 01 4 5 9 ETT Figure 6 95 CPU Add Access Rule window for Packet Content example The following parameters may be configured for the Packet Content filter Parameter D
90. 10 The maximum number of times that the Switch will retransmit an EAP Request to the client before it times out of the authentication sessions The default setting is 2 This sets the TxPeriod of time for the authenticator PAE state machine This value determines 149 1 65535 the period of an EAP Request Identity packet transmitted to the client The default setting is 30 seconds ReAuthPeriod A constant that defines a nonzero number of seconds between periodic reauthentication of the 1 65535 client The default setting is 3600 seconds ReAuthentication Determines whether regular reauthentication will take place on this port The default setting is Disabled Port Control This allows you to control the port authorization state Select ForceAuthorized to disable 802 1X and cause the port to transition to the authorized state without any authentication exchange required This means the port transmits and receives normal traffic without 802 1X based authentication of the client If ForceUnauthorized is selected the port will remain in the unauthorized state ignoring all attempts by the client to authenticate The Switch cannot provide authentication services to the client through the interface If Auto is selected it will enable 802 1X and cause the port to begin in the unauthorized state allowing only EAPOL frames to be sent and received through the port The authentication process begins when the link state of the port transition
91. 2 STP Bridge Global Settings window The following parameters can be set Parameter Description STP State Use the radio buttons to enable or disable the STP Status STP Version Use the pull down menu to choose the desired version of STP to be implemented on the Switch There are three choices STP Select this parameter to set the Spanning Tree Protocol STP globally on the switch RSTP Select this parameter to set the Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP globally on the Switch MSTP Select this parameter to set the Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol MSTP globally on the Switch Forwarding BPDU This field can be Enabled or Disabled When Enabled it allows the forwarding of STP BPDU packets from other network devices The default is Enabled Bridge Max Age 6 40 The Max Age may be set to ensure that old information does not endlessly circulate through redundant paths in the network preventing the effective propagation of the new information Set by the Root Bridge this value will aid in determining that the Switch has spanning tree configuration values consistent with other devices on the bridged LAN If the value ages out and a BPDU has still not been received from the Root Bridge the Switch will start sending its own BPDU to all other switches for permission to become the Root Bridge If it turns out that your switch has the lowest Bridge Identifier it will become the Root Bridge The user may choose a time between 6 and 40 s
92. 2 1X Port Access Control From Port 01 v To Fort GuietPeriod 0 655535 suppTimeout 1 65535 sec ServerTimeout 1 65535 sec MaxReg 1 10 TxPeriod 1 55535 T ReAuthentication Disabled Port Control Capability None Direction El ReAuthPeriod 1 65535 Forward EAPOL PDU On Port bled Por AdmDir Port Control Quiet Period Supp Timeout estan ReaAuth Period ReAuthentication Capability Both Disabled Both Both Ri Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Figure 5 19 802 1X Settings window This window allows you to set the following features Parameter Description 802 1X Use the radio buttons to enable or disable 802 1X Auth Mode Choose the 802 1X authentication mode Port Based or MAC Based Auth Protocol Choose the authentication protocol Local or RADIUS EAP From Port To Enter the port or ports to be set Port QuietPeriod This allows you to set the number of seconds that the Switch remains in the quiet state following 0 65535 a failed authentication exchange with the client The default setting is 60 seconds SuppTimeout This value determines timeout conditions in the exchanges between the Authenticator and the 1 65535 client The default setting is 30 seconds ServerTimeout This value determines timeout conditions in the exchanges between the Authenticator and the 1 65535 authentication server The default setting is 30 seconds MaxReq 1
93. 311GT 1000Base SX Mutli mode 550m DEM 312GT2 1000Base SX Multi mode 2km DEM 314GT 1000BASE LH Single mode 50km DEM 315GT 1000BASE ZX Single mode 80km DEM 210 100BASE FX Single mode 15km DEM 211 100BASE FX Multi mode 2km WDM Transceivers Support DEM 330T 1000BASE LX Tx 1550 Rx 1310nm Single mode 10km DEM 330R 1000BASE LX Tx 1310 Rx 1550nm Single mode 10km DEM 331T 1000BASE LX Tx 1550 Rx 1310nm Single mode 40km DEM 331R 1000BASE LX TX 1310 RX 1550nm Single mode 40km DEM 220T 100BASE BX Tx 1550nm Rx 1310nm Single mode 20km DEM 220R 100BASE BX Tx 1310nm Rx 1550nm Single mode 20km DES 3200 28F port 1 24 can only use DEM 210 and DEM 211 DES 3200 28F port 1 24 can only use DEM 220T and DEM 220R Standards CSMA CD Data Transfer Rates Half duplex Full duplex Ethernet 10 Mbps 20Mbps Fast Ethernet 100Mbps 200Mbps Gigabit Ethernet n a 2000Mbps Network Cables Cat 5 Enhanced for 1000BASE T UTP Cat 5 Cat 5 Enhanced for 100BASE TX UTP Cat 3 4 5 for 10BASE T EIA TIA 568 100 ohm screened twisted pair STP 100m Number of Ports DES 3200 10 8 x 10 100Mbps 2 Combo 1000BASE T SFP Ports DES 3200 18 16 x 10 100Mbps 2 Combo 1000BASE T SFP Ports DES 3200 26 24 x 10 100Mbps 2 Combo 1000BASE T SFP Ports DES 3200 28 24 x 10 100Mbps 4 Combo 1000BASE T SFP Ports DES 3200 28F 24 x 100Mbps Fiber 4 Combo 1000BASE T SFP Ports 250 Physical and Environmental Power Cons
94. 3200 28 MAC Address 00 32 28 53 10 20 System Mame IP Address 10 90 90 90 Static System Location Wask 255 0 0 0 System Contact Gateway 0 0 0 0 Boot PROM Version 1 00 8002 hlanagement YLAR default Firmware Version 1 10 8014 Login Timeout Minutes 10 mins Hardware Version A Dual Image Supported System Time 00 00 0 00 04 47 Device Status and Quick Configurations SMTF Disabled Settings Jumbo Frame Enabled Settings Spanning Tree Disabled Settings WLO Snooping Disabled Settings RMN Disabled Settings IGMP Snooping Disabled Settings Safeguard Engine Disabled Settings MAC Motification Disabled Settings Syslog Global State Enabled Settings 202 1 Enabled Settings SSL Disabled Settings 55H Disabled Settings GYRP Disabled Settings Port Mirror Disabled Settings Password Encryption Disabled Settings Single IF Management Disabled Settings Telnet Enabled TCP 23 Settings LI Paging Enabled Settings Web Enabled TCP 80 Settings VLAN Trunk Disabled Settings Figure 2 1 Device Information window System Information This window contains the System Information details The user may enter a System Name System Location and system Contact to aid in defining the Switch to the user s preference This window displays the MAC Address Firmware Version and Hardware Version Click Configuration gt System Information to display the following window MAC Address 00 32 28 53 10 20 Firmware Version 1 10 8014 Hardware Version Al System Mame System Loc
95. 5 Last Listener This field specifies the maximum amount of time between group specific query messages Query Interval including those sent in response to leave group messages The default is 7 1 25 Robustness Value Adjust this variable according to expected packet loss If packet loss on the VLAN is expected 1 255 to be high the Robustness Variable should be increased to accommodate increased packet loss This entry field allows an entry of 7 to 255 The default is 2 Querier State Choose Enabled to enable transmitting IGMP query packets or Disabled to disable the transmitting of IGMP query packets The default is Disabled Fast Done This parameter allows the user to enable the Fast Leave function Enabled this function will allow members of a multicast group to leave the group immediately without the implementation of the Last Member Query Timer when an IGMP Leave Report Packet is received by the Switch The default is Disabled Data Driven Learning Aged Out Version Querier Role This read only field describes the behavior of the Switch for sending query packets Querier will denote that the Switch is sending out IGMP query packets Non Querier will denote that the Switch is not sending out IGMP query packets This field will only read Querier when the Querier State and the State fields have been Enabled To modify the IGMP Snooping Router Port Settings click on the Modify Router Port hyperlink which will show the fo
96. 75 AA o o er een ee een PP reece eee ree er ere er eer 176 CPU Interace Filtrado as 193 CPUs CCS SS ALO Mei cta ao 193 ACE EMI Y ee ee A Pe re ee eee ene re en ee ee ee 207 ALO WM a ade 207 MONNOMO uranio encore enacetcccnecnc gece eseanessudsateesieeateemetneadenedece 209 Cable Diagnosis 209 ASIA A A A A BRO tee rere rn Serre eer apt ee eer eee eee ear een tenet eee ee ee eee eee 210 FON WN ZAU OM aia E A E seein amateen sates 211 o O cea unecaanst 212 Memor UZAO is AA AAA AAA A AAA AAA 213 Ea KO ie os 214 o oe Pr reine te Me Oatct EME noe Ne oe et eres Ree rn ee a ad een Reese ee ee ee eee eee eee 214 Ulea dro y Ween nen oe Ann O A O en to ae eae ee eee 216 TIAA NEU O seca este S 217 EO PP Cn a ON 219 Received A ee 219 in ios aig Seek Soe ee ade tore eee eee ee 221 PORE NCCC SS CONO ica 223 RADIOS AMONIO A AAA AAA AAA AA 223 RADIUS ACCOUME Clear A Ad 225 Autentico CALS ri A A A iii 227 Me ao A ano tecsce Boast aero E ocean seen 228 Authenticator DIAGMOSUCS ici eae a cin eee a Ocio 232 BrOWSe ARP AIG dd dd di 234 Browse UANL ie 234 ESI SIO OD ING tersa A O dates 234 Browse IGMP ROUEN PON sigs skied id 234 IGMP SMOOP ING Cor UD atinada acetil 235 IGMP SOO DING OS i a ee ae SiS etd ete Meet ete ee 236 SA A A ONE ee 236 Browse MED Rotten FPO eraan A o abs 236 ES Tele oft gts WE A A A Mee A 237 EED eset seats om ee ec ee Se ee ce A 237 DP Statisties o ys torcida toilette dialecto 237 LE DP Locator Into ao ad aaa 238 EL DP
97. AC Address field and ticking the corresponding check box To begin the initialization click Apply NOTE The user must first globally enable 802 1X in the 802 1X Settings window Security gt 802 1X gt 802 1X Settings before initializing ports Information in the Initialize Port s windows cannot be viewed before enabling 802 1X for either Port based 802 1X or MAC based 802 1X The Initialize Port s wndows display the following information Parameter Description From Port The beginning port in a range of ports to be initialized The ending port in a range of ports to be initialized Pot A read only field indicating a port on the Switch Auth PAE State The Authenticator PAE State will display one of the following Initialize Disconnected Connecting Authenticating Authenticated Aborting Held ForceAuth ForceUnauth and N A Backend_State The Backend Authentication State will display one of the following Request Response Success Fail Timeout Idle Initialize and N A Port Status The status of the controlled port can be Authorized Unauthorized or N A MAC Address The authenticated MAC address of the client connected to the corresponding port if any Reauthenticate Port s Users can display and configure reauthenticate ports for 802 1X port and MAC based using the two windows below To reauthenticate ports for the port side of 802 1X the user must first enable 802 1X by port in the 802 1X Settings window To
98. ACS TACACS RADIUS server host on a remote host The TACACS XTACACS TACACS RADIUS server host will then verify or deny the request and return the appropriate message to the Switch More than one authentication protocol can be run on the same physical server host but remember that TACACS XTACACS TACACS RADIUS are separate entities and are not compatible with each other The maximum supported number of server hosts is 16 To view the following window click Security gt Access Authentication Control gt Authentication Server Protocol TACACS w Timeout 1 255 B5 lsec Key Max 254 characters Saas Retransmit 1 255 times Total Entries 0 Protocol Timeout Key Retransmit Figure 5 37 Authentication Server Settings window Configure the following parameters to add an Authentication Server Host 164 Parameter Description IP Address The IP address of the remote server host the user wishes to add Port 1 65535 Enter a number between 1 and 65535 to define the virtual port number of the authentication protocol on a server host The default port number is 49 for TACACS XTACACS TACACS servers and 1813 for RADIUS servers but the user may set a unique port number for higher security Protocol The protocol used by the server host The user may choose one of the following TACACS Enter this parameter if the server host utilizes the TACACS protocol XTACACS Enter this parameter if the server host utilizes the XTACACS proto
99. All button Add ACL Profile Total Used Rule Entries Total Unused Rule Entries 3 509 Profle Protietwwe ownemwe Ethernet ACL Show Details J Add View Rules __ Delete IP ACL C Show Details_ Add View Rules __ Delete 3 IPv 4 PacketContent Figure 6 67 Access Profile List window for Packet Content example To view the configurations for a previously configured entry click on the corresponding Show Details button which will display the following window 189 Profile ID 4 Profile Type Packet Content Owner Type ACL source MAC FF FF FF FF FF FF Destination MAC EF EE FE RF EE EE Serice Provider Tag DxFFFF Customer Tag OxFFFF oseti Byte 2 of La Value OxFFFF Offset Byte 4 of L3 Value OxFFFF Show All Profiles Figure 6 68 Access Profile Detail Information window for Packet Content example To return to the Access Profile List window click Show All Profiles To add a rule to a previously configured entry click on the corresponding Add View Rules button and then Add Rule which will reveal the following window Profile Information Profile ID 4 Profile Type Packet Content Owner Type ACL Source MAC FF FF FF FF FF FF Destination MAC FF FF FF FF FF FF Service Provider Tag OxF FFF Customer Tag OxF FFF Offset 1 Byte 2 ofL3 Value OxFFFF Offset 2 Byte 4ofL3 Value OXFFFF Rule Detail Keep an inputfield as blank to treat the corresponding option as do not care Access ID 1 65535
100. Authenticator Session Statistics This window contains the session statistics objects for the Authenticator PAE associated with each port An entry appears in this table for each port that supports the Authenticator function To view the Authenticator Session Statistics window click Monitoring gt Port Access Control gt Authenticator Session Statistics Authenticator Session Statistics 0 0 0 0 o A Figure 7 21 Authenticator Session Statistics window The user may select the desired time interval to update the statistics between 7s and 60s where s stands for seconds The default value is one second 230 The following fields can be viewed Parameter Description Por rret omica on number assigned to tho Por by tne System in whioh e Por resides octets ee The number or octets receive ln user data fames on tis port during the session ramos Rx The number o user data armes received on Di port ding tne session A unique identifier for the session in the form of a printable ASCII string of at least three characters Authentic Method The authentication method used to establish the session Valid Authentic Methods include 1 Remote Authentic Server The Authentication Server is external to the Authenticator s System 2 Local Authentic Server The Authentication Server is located within the Authenticator s System Time The duration of the session in seconds Terminate Cause The reason fo
101. C Tick the check box to enable the Advanced Encryption Standard AES128 encryption algorithm with Cipher Block Chaining The default is enabled AES192 CBC Tick the check box to enable the Advanced Encryption Standard AES192 encryption algorithm with Cipher Block Chaining The default is enabled AES256 CBC Tick the check box to enable the Advanced Encryption Standard AES 256 encryption algorithm with Cipher Block Chaining The default is enabled ARC4 Tick the check box to enable the Arcfour encryption algorithm with Cipher Block Chaining The default is enabled Cast128 CBC Tick the check box to enable the Cast128 encryption algorithm with Cipher Block Chaining The default is enabled HMAC SHA1 Tick the check box to enable the HMAC Hash for Message Authentication Code mechanism utilizing the Secure Hash algorithm The default is enabled HMAC MD5 Tick the check box to enable the HMAC Hash for Message Authentication Code mechanism utilizing the MD5 Message Digest encryption algorithm The default is enabled Public Key Algorithm HMAC RSA Tick the check box to enable the HMAC Hash for Message Authentication Code mechanism utilizing the RSA encryption algorithm The default is enabled HMAC DSA Tick the check box to enable the HMAC Hash for Message Authentication Code mechanism utilizing the Digital Signature Algorithm encryption The default is enabled Click Apply to implement changes made 159 SSH User Authent
102. CPU ACL Profile window Use the drop down menu to select a Profile ID between 7 and 3 click the IPv4 ACL radio button and then use the drop down menu to select a protocol ICMP IGMP TCP UDP or Protocol ID Click Select and the following window will appear this window will vary depending on whether ICMP IGMP TCP UDP or Protocol ID has been selected Select Profile ID Select ACL Type AE O Ethernet ACL Pv4 ACL CMe O IPv6 ACL O Packet Content ACL You can select the field in the packet to create filtering mask L2 Header IPv4 DSCP DSCP IPv4 Address C source IP Mask C Destination IP Mask ICMP O CMF ICMP Type ICMP Code Figure 6 80 Add CPU ACL Profile window for IPv4 example Click on the boxes near the top of the window which will then turn red and reveal parameters for configuration To create a new entry enter the appropriate information and click Create To return to the CPU Access Profile List menu click lt lt Back 197 The following parameters can be set for IPv4 Parameter Description Select Profile 1D Enter an integer used to identify the access profile that will be configured with this command VLAN Selecting this option instructs the Switch to examine the VLAN part of each packet header and use this as the or part of the criterion for forwarding IPv4 DSCP Selecting this option instructs the Switch to examine the DiffServ Code part of each packet header and use thi
103. Choosing this parameter requires the user to input the following information to identify the SSH user Host Name Enter an alphanumeric string of no more than 32 characters to identify the remote SSH user Host IP Enter the corresponding IP address of the SSH user Password This parameter should be chosen if the administrator wishes to use an administrator defined password for authentication Upon entry of this parameter the Switch will prompt the administrator for a password and then to re type the password for confirmation Public Key This parameter should be chosen if the administrator wishes to use the public key on a SSH server for authentication Enter an alphanumeric string of no more than 32 characters to identify the remote SSH user This parameter is only used in conjunction with the Host Based choice in the Auth Mode field Enter the corresponding IP address of the SSH user This parameter is only used in conjunction with the Host Based choice in the Auth Mode field Click Apply to implement changes made NOTE To set the SSH User Authentication parameters on the Switch a User Account must be previously configured For more information on configuring local User Accounts on the Switch see the User Accounts section of this manual located in the Configuration section 160 Access Authentication Control The TACACS XTACACS TACACS RADIUS commands allow users to secure access to the Switch using th
104. Conigura OM ii scart Seed at terete et A A A A AAA AAA TA ede cei 45 RMON Sa a aes AN ee Spe ea a wae dec A E EE 45 TNMG RANGES CHING Sc dad ds dd a dd ri 46 gt Male IP Management ais ls cia 46 A oe een ee On eT Pe en ee eo eine er eee ae eee an eee ee eee eee eee ee eer Eee ree 48 A A am asesea acid ane 49 e tet detect eetaen ea bo eee 51 e atid Sonesidet sae asd Mera r T 52 o no o O 54 Frimware Upgrade abia 55 Contiquration File Back up REStOlS dba 55 PIO AG LOFIE esana A a a tex olnate 56 EEN o R O 56 Gratuitos ARPGIODAal SCUNnO ss I 56 Gratuitous ARP SCUINGS ri a io ii a da ds cele id eee ieee 57 ARP Spoon Prevention Sets ad O aa 58 PPPOE Girc it ID Insertion SA e ao 59 DA AAA Penn A a aa 60 JUDO MO as 60 A PSNI SS POP A O 61 Understanding VEE 7602510 fOMLY reseca a a a T a LUopS 61 MAN BDE SCHIPUO o a ds lod tdi eee 61 EFE SO IT VEAN S calas eapiesa ces scene eat es ieamsenaaee activos ates atearsenaay aces ase cones sated dpi ata at iodo tana 62 Ce IN Saa iaa 65 PO AS MAN ao id ib bid 67 COs aaan aa aa aa a 70 OIRO SENOS ana A A A ee ede 71 VEAN Translation Settings A ET a des 72 SUZ 1V PFOLOCO VLAN A A A E AA 12 SOZ AW Protocol Groun SENNO S e A A A A A E AA 72 SUZ IV Protocol VAIN SENO S in NAS 74 VEAN TURK SOUNO Sieira a a a S a A ici 75 E AA E ean ee yee 76 Asyminettic VLAN StM Sernin O A A 17 MAC based VLAN SGU GS sisas iia 77 PU PMO ASIS US ee ena does 78 POR TITUS AAA AA AAA AAA A 78 PAE A a oe eee 80
105. D with their respective weight value 4 1 the packets are sent in the following sequence A1 B1 C1 D1 A2 B2 C2 A3 B3 A4 For weighted round robin queuing if each QoS queue has the same weight value then each QoS queue has an equal opportunity to send packets just like round robin queuing The Switch has four priority queues and eight Classes of Service for each port Bandwidth Control The bandwidth control settings are used to place a ceiling on the transmitting and receiving data rates for any selected port To view this window click QoS gt Bandwidth Control From Port To Pot E w E 01 Mo Limit Rate 64 1024000 mw Disabled Jkbitsec Bandwidth Control Table Rx Rate Kbitiseci Mo Limit Mo Limit Tx Rate Kbitiseci Mo Limit Mo Limit Effective Rx Kbitsec Mo Limit Mo Limit Effective TX Kbitisech Mo Limit Mo Limit sO Limit Mo Limit Mo Limit No Limit Mo Lirit Mo pe Mo Limit Ho Limit Mo Limit Mo Lirit ON Limit Mo Limit Ho Limit Mo Limit Mo Limit Mo Limit Mo Lirit Mo Limit Mo Limit Mo Limit Wt No Limit No Lirit No Limit Mo Limit Ho EAN Ho Limit Ho E Ho Limit Ho Limit Mo Limit Ho Limit Mo Limit Ho Limit Mo Limit Mo Limit Mo Limit Mo Limit No Limit Mo Limit Mo Limit Mo Limit Mo Lirit Mo Limit Mo Lirit Mo Limit Mo Limit ar hie l init kia lid bla lo init bla l init Mo Limit he Effective Tx Rx Rate means th
106. DP MIB 1 0 8802 1 1 2 0 0 1 IldpStatsRemT ablesDeletes lldpStatsRemTablesDrops IldpStatsRemTablesAgeouts dot1agCfmFaultAlarm dot1agCfmMepHighestPrDefect IEEE8021 CFM MIB dot30amThresholdEvent dot30amEventLogTimestamp V2 DOT3 OAM MIB 1 3 6 1 2 1 158 0 1 dot30amEventLogOuli dot30amEventLogType dot30amEventLogLocation dot30amEventLogWindowHi dot30amEventLogWindowLo dot30amEventLogThresholdHi dot30amEventLogThresholdLo dot30amEventLogValue dot30amEventLogRunning Total dot30amEventLogEventT otal dot30amNonThresholdEvent dot30amEventLogTimestamp V2 DOT3 OAM MIB 1 3 6 1 2 1 158 0 2 dot30amEventLogOul dot30amEventLogType dot30amEventLogLocation dot30amEventLogEventT otal 264 Proprietary Trap List Trap Name OID Variable Bind as MIB Name SwlpMacBindingViolationTrap 1 3 6 1 4 1 171 12 23 5 0 1 swlpMacBindingStopLearning Trap 1 3 6 1 4 1 171 12 23 5 0 2 swlpMacBindingRecoverLearning I rap 1 3 6 1 4 1 171 12 23 5 0 3 swMacBasedAuthLoggedSuccess 1 3 6 1 4 1 171 12 35 11 1 0 1 SwMacBasedAuthLoggedFail 1 3 6 1 4 1 171 12 35 11 1 0 2 SwMacBasedAuthAgesOut 1 3 6 1 4 1 171 12 35 11 1 0 3 swPktStormOccurred 1 3 6 1 4 1 171 12 25 5 0 1 swPktStormCleared 1 3 6 1 4 1 171 12 25 5 0 2 agentGratuitousARP Trap 1 3 6 1 4 1 171 12 1 7 2 0 5 swSafeGuardChgToExhausted 1 3 6 1 4 1 171 12 19 4 1 0 1 swSafeGuardChgToNormal 1 3 6 1 4 1 171 12 19 4 1 0 2 swDoSAttackDetected 1 3 6 1 4 1 171 12 59 4 0 1 swSinglel
107. EPs that have been configured with the same management domain level and maintenance association identifier MAID Different MAs in an MD must have different MA Names Different MAs in different MDs may have the same MA Name The MEP list specified for a MA can be located in different devices MEPs must be created on ports of these devices explicitly A MEP will transmit CCM packets periodically across the MA The receiving MEP will verify these received CCM packets from other MEPs against this MEP list for configuration integrity check Maintenance Point A maintenance point in CFM is a point of demarcation on a port within a maintenance domain Maintenance points filter CFM frames within the boundaries of an MD by dropping frames that do not belong to the correct maintenance level There are two types of maintenance points Maintenance Endpoints MEPs and Maintenance Intermediate Points MIPs MEPS and MIP are manually configured by a network administrator A MEP exists at the edge of a maintenance domain defining the boundary of the MD MEP functions include filtering CFM messages so that they are confined to the MD A MEP can be configured to transmit Connectivity Check Messages CCMs and will transmit treacroute and loopback messages if configured to do so A MEP can be Inward facing or Outward facing An Inward facing MEP source CFM frames toward the bridge relay function not through the bridge port on which the MEP is configured An Inward
108. Enabled Hello Time 1 2 Bo lsec External Cost Port STP Restricted Role Restricted TCN Forward BPDU Hello Time A Auto 200000 AutoNo Autores Enabled False Enabled Auto 200000 AutolMo Autores Enabled Fase o False En Enabled Auto 200000 AutoMo Autos Autores Enabled False Enabled Auto 200000 AutolMo Autores Enabled False Enabled Auto 200000 Auto No Enabled Auto 200000 AutoNo Autores Enabled Enabled AutZ00000 Autoho Autores Enabled Enabled Auto 200000 Autoiho Autoyes Enabled Auto 200000 Auto o Autores Enabled Enabled Auto200000 Auto o Autot es Enabled Enabled Autor2 00000 Autowho Autores Enabled Enabled Autoz00000 Autoiho Autores Enabled Enabled 212 Auto 200000 Auto No Enabled Enabled Auto Mo Autores Enabled False Enabled 212 Auto 00000 Autola Autores Enabled False Enabled 212 Autw200000 Auto No Autofes Enabled False False Enabled 212 Auto 200000 Autoa Autores Enabled False False Enabled Zt Autor200000 Auto No Autores Enabled False False Enabled 2 2 Auto 200000 Auto o Autores Enabled False False Enabled qn Auto do Autores Enabled False False Auto 200000 A Fase ee nat O Auto 200000 Enabled Auto 200000 Auto No Autores Enabled False False Enabled 2 2 J i l i man Auto 200000 Port field MeTrunk Master T Trunk Member External Cost Edge P2P and Hello Time fields ValuetAfalue Valuel Configure
109. ID VLAN Mare default Disabled Modify Router Port 4111 Disabled Modify Router Port Figure 3 26 IGMP Snooping Settings window Clicking the Edit button will open this window VLAN ID VLAN Mame Querier Expiry Time Guerier P Was Response Time 1 25 Query Interval 1 65535 Last Listener Query Interval 1 25 Robustness Value 1 255 Guerier State Di E Fast Done Disabled v State i Data Driven Learning Aged Out Disabled vl Version I Guerier Role Hon Cuerier Figure 3 27 IGMP Snooping Settings Edit window 84 The following fields can be set Parameter Description VLAN ID This is the VLAN ID that along with the VLAN Name identifies the VLAN for which the user wishes to modify the IGMP Snooping Settings VLAN Name This is the VLAN Name that along with the VLAN ID identifies the VLAN for which the user wishes to modify the IGMP Snooping Settings Querier Expiry Displays the querier expiry time Time Querier IP The IP address of the device which acts as the IGMP querier for the network Max Response This determines the maximum amount of time in seconds to wait for reports from members Time 1 25 The Max Response Time field allows an entry between 7 and 25 seconds The default is 70 Query Interval The Query Interval field is used to set the time in seconds between transmitting IGMP 1 65535 queries Entries between 7 and 65535 seconds are allowed The default is 12
110. IDs on the network The Switch will compare the VID of a packet to be transmitted to the VID of the port that is to transmit the packet If the two VIDs are different the Switch will drop the packet Because of the existence of the PVID for untagged packets and the VID for tagged packets tag aware and tag unaware network devices can coexist on the same network A switch port can have only one PVID but can have as many VIDs as the Switch has memory in its VLAN table to store them Because some devices on a network may be tag unaware a decision must be made at each port on a tag aware device before packets are transmitted should the packet to be transmitted have a tag or not If the transmitting port is connected to a tag unaware device the packet should be untagged If the transmitting port is connected to a tag aware device the packet should be tagged Tagging and Untagging Every port on an 802 1Q compliant switch can be configured as tagging or untagging Ports with tagging enabled will put the VID number priority and other VLAN information into the header of all packets that flow into and out of it If a packet has previously been tagged the port will not alter the packet thus keeping the VLAN information intact Other 802 1Q compliant devices on the network to make packet forwarding decisions can then use the VLAN information in the tag Ports with untagging enabled will strip the 802 1Q tag from all packets that flow into and out of
111. IP Address Enter the IP address of the TF TP server where the certificate files are located Certificate File Name Enter the path and the filename of the certificate file to download This file must have a der extension Ex c cert der Key File Name Enter the path and the filename of the key file to download This file must have a der extension Ex c pkey der P NOTE Enabling the SSL command will disable the web based switch management To log on to the Switch again the header of the URL must begin with https Entering anything else into the address field of the web browser will result in an error and no authentication will be granted SSH SSH is an abbreviation of Secure Shell which is a program allowing secure remote login and secure network services over an insecure network It allows a secure login to remote host computers a safe method of executing commands on a remote end node and will provide secure encrypted and authenticated communication between two non trusted hosts SSH with its array of unmatched security features is an essential tool in today s networking environment It is a powerful guardian against numerous existing security hazards that now threaten network communications The steps required to use the SSH protocol for secure communication between a remote PC the SSH client and the Switch the SSH server are as follows 1 Create a user account with admin level access using the User Accounts windo
112. IP Management will be disabled To enable SIM for the Switch using the Web interface click Configuration gt Single IP Management gt Single IP Settings which will reveal the following window SIM State Disabled Role State Candidate Group Mame Discovery Interval 30 90 Hold Time Count 100 255 Apply Figure 2 41 Single IP Settings window disabled Use the drop down menus to change the SIM State to Enabled the Role State to Commander and then fill in the Group Name field Click Apply to let the changes take effect SIM State Enabled Role State Commander Group Mame Discovery Interval 30 90 Hold Time Count 100 255 Figure 2 42 Single IP Settings window enabled The following parameters can be set Parameters Description Use the pull down menu to either enable or disable the SIM state on the Switch Disabled will render all SIM functions on the Switch inoperable Role State Use the pull down menu to change the SIM role of the Switch The two choices are Candidate A Candidate Switch CaS is not the member of a SIM group but is connected to a Commander Switch This is the default setting for the SIM role Commander Choosing this parameter will make the Switch a Commander Switch CS The user may join other switches to this Switch over Ethernet to be part of its SIM group Choosing this option will also enable the Switch to be configured for SIM
113. IPv6 Enter the TFTP Server IP address for the type of IP selected Specify the path file name of the TFTP File Select the desired Image ID 1 Boot Up or 2 Click Download to initiate the file transfer Reboot System The following window is used to restart the Switch Do you want to save the settings Yes No If you do not save the settings all changes made in this session will be lost Figure 8 9 Reboot System window Clicking the Yes radio button will instruct the Switch to save the current configuration to non volatile RAM before restarting the Switch Clicking the No radio button instructs the Switch not to save the current configuration before restarting the Switch All of the configuration information entered from the last time Save Changes was executed will be lost Click the Reboot button to restart the Switch 249 Appendix A Technical Specification General Protocols IEEE 802 3 10BASE T Ethernet IEEE 802 3u 100BASE TX Fast Ethernet IEEE 802 3ab 1000BASE T Gigabit Ethernet IEEE 802 3z 1000BASE T SFP Mini GBIC IEEE 802 1D Spanning Tree IEEE 802 1w Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol IEEE 802 1s Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol IEEE 802 1Q VLAN IEEE 802 1p Priority Queues IEEE 802 1X Port Based Network Access Control IEEE 802 3ad Link Aggregation Control IEEE 802 3x Full duplex Flow Control IEEE 802 3 NWay auto negotiation Fiber Optic SFP Mini GBIC Support DEM 310GT 1000Base LX Single mode 10km DEM
114. If there is an error in the cable this feature can determine the type of error and the position where the error has occurred To view this window click Monitoring gt Cable Diagnostics From Fort 01 vw Link Status Test Result Cable Length The Cable Diagnostic is designed primarily for administrators or customer service representative to view tests on copper cables it can rapidly determine where errors occurred in the cable and the type of cable error which occurred Note The Cable Fault Distance is calculated from switch side Figure 7 1 Cable Diagnostics window Enter the range of ports to test and click Test The results will be displayed in the table on the lower half of the window NOTE If the Link Status field for an interface displays Link Up the value displayed in the Cable Length field may not be accurate for the interface 209 CPU Utilization This window displays the percentage of the CPU being used expressed as an integer percentage and calculated as a simple average by time interval To view this window click Monitoring gt CPU Utilization One Min Five Mins Unite Time Interval Ns x Record Number 200 Show Hide W Five Secs W One Min W Five Mins Figure 7 2 CPU Utilization window To view the CPU utilization by port use the real time graphic of the Switch at the top of the Web page by simply clicking on a port Click Apply to implement the configured settings The window wil
115. Jumbo Frame Enabled Settings Spanning Tree Disabled Settings MLD Snooping Disabled Settings RMON Disabled Settings IGMP Snooping Disabled Settings Safeguard Engine Disabled Settings MAC Notification Disabled Settings Syslog Global State Disabled Settings 802 1X Disabled Settings SSL Disabled Settings SSH Disabled Settings GVRP Disabled Settings Port Mirror Disabled Settings Password Encryption Disabled Settings Single IP Management Disabled Settings Telnet Enabled TCP 23 Settings CLI Paging Enabled Settings Web Enabled TCP 80 Settings VLAN Trunk Disabled Settings Figure 1 2 Main Web Manager page Area Function Select the folder or window to be displayed The folder icons can be opened to display the hyperlinked window buttons and subfolders contained within them Click the D Link logo to go to the D Link website Presents a graphical near real time image of the front panel of the Switch This area displays the Switch s ports and expansion modules showing port activity duplex mode or flow control depending on the specified mode Various areas of the graphic can be selected for performing management functions including port configuration Areas Presents switch information based on your selection and the entry of configuration data NOTICE Any changes made to the Switch configuration during the current session must be saved in Cl the Save Configuration window Save gt Save Configuration or use the command line interf
116. Le SSeS a Si lt C O Z E m Figure 7 20 Authenticator Statistics window 13 g The user may also select the desired time interval to update the statistics between 7s and 60s where stands for seconds The default value is one second 228 The following fields can be viewed Parameter Description Pon The enticaton number assigned tothe Por by the System in which the Por resides The number of valid EAPOL frames that have been received by this Authenticator TxReqld The number of EAP Req ld frames that have been transmitted by this Authenticator RxLogOff The number of EAPOL Logoff frames that have been received by this Authenticator Tx Req The number of EAP Request frames other than Rq ld frames that have been transmitted by this Authenticator Rx Respld The number of EAP Resp ld frames that have been received by this Authenticator Rx Resp The number of valid EAP Response frames other than Resp ld frames that have been received by this Authenticator Rx Invalid The number of EAPOL frames that have been received by this Authenticator in which the frame type is not recognized The number of EAPOL frames that have been received by this Authenticator in which the Packet Body Length field is invalid Last Version The protocol version number carried in the most recently received EAPOL frame Last Source The source MAC address carried in the most recently received EAPOL frame 229
117. M Full Master the other side of the connection must be set for 1000M Full_ Slave Any other configuration will result in a link down status for both ports Displays the flow control scheme used for the various port configurations Ports configured for full duplex use 802 3x flow control half duplex ports use backpressure flow control and Auto ports use an automatic selection of the two The default is Disabled When Enabled destination and source MAC addresses are automatically listed in the forwarding table The default setting is Enabled This applies only to the Combo ports If configuring the Combo ports this defines the type of transport medium used SFP ports should be set at Fiber and the Combo 1000BASE T ports should be set at Copper This can be specified as Auto Normal or Cross In Normal state the port is in MDIX mode and can be connected to a PC NIC using a straight cable If it is in Cross state the port is in MDI mode and can be connected to a port in MDIX mode on another switch through a straight cable Click Apply to implement the new settings on the Switch 20 Port Description Settings The Switch supports a port description feature where the user may name various ports on the Switch To view the following window click Configuration gt Port Configuration gt Port Description Settings Fram Port To Port Medium Type Description o pm ot Copper Jf ________ Figure 2 9 Port Description Settings
118. MO aca rei 147 Flost based Network ACCESS CONTO ut A a a 148 Ann nn A A O 149 A A e a T based isa Sra thiy a E ead sages ee 150 Authentication RADIUS SOI Sl ti A AAA 151 Guest VEAN Configurador A A Paden eee 152 A A e ee enna rene eer are 153 lira o a S AAA ete ee et E E nee SNP A REE eee a en nee A oe eT 153 Reauthentcate Ports sia e a Ged iensdseteus a tous Re aa eta 154 SOS MOS td aa 155 Download Certicap ota 156 A ne ane nae EME ally Pe ae MneIe etm on nt eee Re ee tty E wee Eee ae ne eae ne ees ee ete 156 SoFo SNG fm APIO O O O en ee ore 158 SSH Authmode and Algorithm Settings ccocooccncococnncnoncnnnnonnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnrnnnnnnrnnnnnrnnnnnnrnrnnnnnnrrnnrnrrnnnrirrrnnrnnnnneos 158 Son User Authentication LISIS sssri a a idas 160 ACCESS AUMentCA OVA li ie 161 Au thenticaton FOSA Sd ol 162 Application Authentication Settings sisas canonistas 162 AUTEntC AON enV EU dd 163 PAUTIIEMUCATION Se era cidos 164 LOGIN Method Lista a AAA AA AA ti 165 Enable MEMO IS Sa das 166 LotallEnable Password Suing Susi iaa 167 MAC BbasediAccess Contour isos 168 MAC based Access Control Settings aaa 168 MAC based Access Control Local Setas ii cute Mea ee E dd 170 DOS Prevention Selina o e a 171 DHCP Server Screening CEMIS A A ade ovaeadie era ee 172 DHCP Server Screening Forn Settings x isc ei 172 DIG RP Oller Perm EMV SENG asipar a a aa oa aa 174 A 175 ACLConNg raton Wiza is ich Sct Canta ae nde 2 adie a a a a Dadian eee ne 1
119. OAMPDUs Tx Unsupported OAMPDU Tx Frames Lost Due To OAM Information OAMPDU Foc Unique Event Notification OAMPDU Foc Duplicate Event Notification OAMPDU Rx Loopback Control OAMPDU Rx Variable Request OAMPDU Rx Variable Response OAMPDU Rx Organization Specific OAMPDUs Rx Unsupported CAMPDU Fx 5005050650006 50000500 Port 4 Information CAMPO Tx Information CAMP DU Rx Unique Event Notification OAMPOL Tx Unique Event Notification OAMPDU Rx E bi 2 eet AAA A m Figure 7 34 Browse Ethernet OAM Statistics window 239 Connectivity Fault Management CFM Fault Table This window will display the fault conditions detected by the MEPs on the Switch To view this window click Monitoring gt CFM gt CFM Fault Table as shown below MD Name MA Mame Note MD Mac22 characters MA Max 22 characters Figure 7 35 Browse CFM Fault MEP window Parameter Description MD Name Enter the maintenance domain name to display MA Names Enter the maintenance association name to display Click Find to display connection faults for the specified MD and MA CFM MP Table This window is used to browse the CFM port MP list on the Switch To view this window click Monitoring gt CFM gt CFM MP Table as shown below Level 0 7 Direction MAC Address MD Name MA Name Direction Figure 7 36 Browse CFM Port MP List window The following parameters can be configured Parameter Description Por The port to
120. P Snooping Multicast VLAN settings on the Switch To view this window click L2 Features gt IGMP Snooping gt IGMP Snooping Multicast VLAN Settings ISM VLAN Global State 6 Enabled Disabled WLAN Mare VID 2 4094 State Replace Source IP Member Port 8 0 1 46 source Port fe g 1 46 Tagged Member Port e 0 1 4 6 Untagged Source Port e c 1 4 6 a Remap Priority value 0 7 o M _ Replace Priority Total Entries 1 ID VLAN Name Replace Source F LIMP SF LISP Remap Priority 111 4111 Disabled Group List Figure 3 30 IGMP Snooping Multicast VLAN Settings window The following fields can be set Parameter Description ISM VLAN Global Click the Enabled or Disabled radio button to enable or disable multicast VLAN State VLAN Name This is the VLAN Name that along with the VLAN ID identifies the VLAN the user wishes to add or modify the IGMP Snooping Settings for VID 2 4094 This is the VLAN ID that along with the VLAN Name identifies the VLAN the user wishes to add or modify the IGMP Snooping Settings for State Enable or disable multicast VLANs for the chosen VLAN Replace Source IP With the IGMP snooping function the IGMP report packet sent by the host will be forwarded to the source port Before forwarding of the packet the source IP address in the join packet needs to be replaced by this IP address If none is specified the source IP address will not be replaced Member Port e g A range
121. P View Table window The following parameters can be set 40 Parameter View Name Type an alphanumeric string of up to 32 characters This is used to identify the new SNMP view being created Subtree OID Type the Object Identifier OID Subtree for the view The OID identifies an object tree MIB tree that will be included or excluded from access by an SNMP manager Description View Type Select Included to include this object in the list of objects that an SNMP manager can access Select Excluded to exclude this object from the list of objects that an SNMP manager can access To implement your new settings click Apply To delete an entry click the corresponding Delete button SNMP Group Table An SNMP Group created with this table maps SNMP users identified in the SNMP User Table window or community strings to the views created in the previous window To view this window click Configuration gt SNMP Settings gt SNMP Group Table Add Group Group Mame Read View Mame Write View Mame Motity View Mame Lser based Security Model SNMP wt Security Level Total Entries 9 Group Name Read View Mame Write View Mame Motity View Mame Liserbased Security Model SMM Py security Level MoAuthNoF riw public public initial private private ReadGroup ReadGroup Write Group Write Group Community Community restricted Community Community Community Community Community Community
122. P function on the Switch To view this window for configuration click Configuration gt SNMP Settings gt RMON RMON Status O Enabled Disabled Apply Figure 2 39 RMON window To enable or disable RMON for SNMP use the radio button Click Apply when finished 45 Time Range Settings This window is used in conjunction with the Access Profile feature to determine a starting point and an ending point based on days of the week when an Access Profile configuration will be enabled on the Switch Once configured here the time range settings are to be applied to an access profile rule using the Access Profile table The user may enter up to 64 time range entries on the Switch To open this window click Configuration gt Time Range Settings Range Name A Max Support 32 Characters Hours HH MM SS StartTime 00 v 00 v 00 EndTime 00 vijoo v 00 Weekdays Mon Tue Ol ved El Thu O FiO sal sun SelectAll Days C Total Entries 0 Range Mame lays Start Time End Time Figure 2 40 Time Range Settings window Single IP Management Simply put D Link Single IP Management is a concept that will stack switches together over Ethernet instead of using stacking ports or modules There are some advantages in implementing the Single IP Management feature 1 SIM can simplify management of small workgroups or wiring closets while scaling the network to handle increased bandwidth demand 2 SIM can reduce the number of IP ad
123. P or UDP Click Select and the following window will appear this window will vary depending on whether TCP or UDP has been selected Select Profile ID Select ACL Type Ethernet ACL ES O IPv4 ACL IPv6 ACL TCP O Packet Content ACL You can select the field in the packet to create filtering mask IPyb Class IPyb Flow Label IPvb Address IPv6 Class CIPE Class IPv6 Flow Label Pye Flow Label IPv Address O ipveSource Mask TCP C TCP Source Port Mask D FFFFJ Destination Port Mask 0 FFFF Figure 6 60 Add ACL Profile window for IPv6 example Click on the boxes at the top of the table which will then turn red and reveal parameters for configuration To create a new entry enter the correct information and click Create To return to the Access Profile List window click lt lt Back The following parameters can be set for IPv6 Parameter Description IPv6 Class Ticking this check box will instruct the Switch to examine the class field of the IPv6 header The class field is a part of the packet header that is similar to the Type of Service ToS or Precedence bits field in IPv4 IPv6 Flow Label Ticking this check box will instruct the Switch to examine the flow label field of the IPv6 header The flow label field is used by a source to label sequences of packets such as non default quality of service or real time service packets Ticking this check box will specify that the rule applies to TC
124. P traffic The user can tick and enter a specific TCP Source Port Mask or TCP Destination Port Mask IPv6 UDP Ticking this check box will specify that the rule applies to UDP traffic aa a naa can tick and enter a specific UDP Source Port Mask or UDP Destination Port Click Apply to implement changes made Click Create to view the new Access Profile List entry in the Access Profile List window shown below To add another Access Profile click Add ACL Profile To delete a profile click the corresponding Delete button To view the specific configurations for an entry click the Show Details button To add a rule to the Access Profile entry click the Add View Rules button To remove all listed profiles click on the Delete All button 185 Add ACL Profile Total Used Rule Entries Total Unused Rule Entries 1 511 pr naa A p ae Show Details J add view Rules l__ Delete ACL Show Details Jladd view Rules __ Delete Figure 6 61 Access Profile List window for IPv6 example To view the configurations for a previously configured entry click on the corresponding Show Details button which will sa the enn window ACL Profile Details Profile ID 3 Profile Type IPyb Owner Type ACL IFv Flow Label Yes Show All Profiles Figure 6 62 Access Profile Detail Information window for IPv6 example To return to the Access Profile List window click Show All Profiles To add a rule to a previously configured entry click on the corresp
125. P will be familiar to most networking professionals However since RSTP and MSTP have been recently introduced to D Link managed Ethernet switches a brief introduction to the technology is provided below followed by a description of how to set up STP RSTP and MSTP 802 1Q 2005 MSTP Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol or MSTP is a standard defined by the IEEE community that allows multiple VLANs to be mapped to a single spanning tree instance which will provide multiple pathways across the network Therefore these MSTP configurations will balance the traffic load preventing wide scale disruptions when a single spanning tree instance fails This will allow for faster convergences of new topologies for the failed instance Frames designated for these VLANs will be processed quickly and completely throughout interconnected bridges utilizing any of the three Spanning tree protocols STP RSTP or MSTP This protocol will also tag BPDU packets so receiving devices can distinguish spanning tree instances spanning tree regions and the VLANs associated with them An MSTI ID will classify these instances MSTP will connect multiple spanning trees with a Common and Internal Spanning Tree CIST The CIST will automatically determine each MSTP region its maximum possible extent and will appear as one virtual bridge that runs a single spanning tree Consequentially frames assigned to different VLANs will follow different data routes within administratively es
126. PMSColdStart 1 3 6 1 4 1 171 12 8 6 0 11 swSinglelPMSWarmStart 1 3 6 1 4 1 171 12 8 6 0 12 swSinglelPMSLinkDown swlpMacBindingPortindex swlpMacBindingViolationIP swlpMacBindingViolationMac swlpMacBindingPortIndex swlpMacBindingPortIndex swMacBasedAuthInfoMaclindex swMacBasedAuthInfoPortlIndex swMacBasedAuthVID swMacBasedAuthInftoMacindex swMacBasedAuthInftoPortindex swMacBasedAuthVID swMacBasedAuthInftoMacindex swMacBasedAuthIntoPortindex swMacBasedAuthVID swPktStormCtriPortindex swPktStormCtriPortindex agentGratuitousARPlpAddr agentGratuitousARPMacAddr agentGratuitousARPPortNumber agentGratuitousARPInterfaceName swSafeGuardCurrentStatus swSafeGuardCurrentStatus swDoSCtrlType swDoSNotifyVarlpAddr swDoSNotifyVarPortNumber swSinglelPMSID swSinglelPMSMacAddr swSinglelPMSID swSinglelPMSMacAddr swSinglelPMSID V2 265 IPMacBind MIB IPMacBind MIB IPMacBind MIB MBA MIB MBA MIB MBA MIB PktStormCtrl MIB PktStormCtrl MIB Genmgmt MIB SafeGuard Engine MIB SafeGuard Engine MIB DoSPrev MIB SINGLE IP MIB SINGLE IP MIB SINGLE IP MIB 1 3 6 1 4 1 171 12 8 6 0 13 swSinglelPMSMacAddr iflndex swSinglelPMSLinkUp swSinglelPMSID SINGLE IP MIB 1 3 6 1 4 1 171 12 8 6 0 14 swSinglelPMSMacAddr SINGLE IP MIB SINGLE IP MIB swERPSSPDetectedTrap V2 ERPS MIB SWERPSNodeld 1 3 6 1 4 1 171 12 78 4 0 1 iflndex swSinglelPMSAuthFail swSinglelPMSID 1 3 6 1 4 1 171 12 8 6 0
127. Parameter Description Server IP Address The IP address of the DHCP server Client s MAC The MAC address of the DHCP client Only multiple legal DHCP servers on the network Address need to be entered in this field If there is only one legal DHCP server on the network no input to this field is allowed Choose the range of ports that you want to use as the DHCP server or check the All Ports box if you wish to use all the ports on the Switch Click Apply to implement changes 174 ACL ACL Configuration Wizard Access Profile List CPU Access Profile List ACL Finder ACL Flow Meter Access profiles allow the user to establish criteria to determine whether or not the Switch will forward packets based on the information contained in each packet s header These criteria can be specified on a basis of Packet Content MAC address or IP address ACL Configuration Wizard This window will aid with the creation of access profiles and ACL Rules The ACL Wizard will create the access rule and profile automatically To view this window click ACL gt ACL Configuration Wizard General ACL Rules Type Namal e Profile ID 1 512 Access ID 1 B5535 Po to sign From Any To Any Action Permit Option Rate Limiting wi ie 64 1 024000 Parts aw feo Apply Note ACL Wizard will create the access profile and rule automatically For adwanecd access protilefrule setting you can manually configure itin Acce
128. RPS function on the Switch STP and LBD should be disabled on the ring ports before enabling ERPS The ERPS cannot be enabled before the R APS VLAN is created and ring ports RPL port RPL owner are configured Note that these parameters cannot be changed when ERPS is enabled To view this window click L2 Features gt ERPS Settings ERPS State Enabled Disabled ERPS Log O Enabled 6 Disabled ERPS Trap O Enabled Disabled R APS VLAN Configuration Settings RAPSVID 1 4094 West Port East Port RPL Port RPL Owner Ring MEL 0 7 Protected VLANs e g 1 fee Hold Off Time 0 10000 ms Guard Time 10 2000 ms wre Time 12 mi Total Entries 0 R APS VLAN Curent Ring State WestPort EastPort RPLPort RPL Owner Ring MEL Protected VLANs Hold Off Time Guard Time WTR Time Note B Blocking F Forwarding Signal Fail Figure 3 68 ERPS Settings window The fields that can be configured are described below Parameter Description ERPS State To enable or disable the ERPS State ERPS Log To enable or disable the ERPS Log ERPS Trap To enable or disable the ERPS Trap R APS VLAN Specify the VLAN which will be the R APS VLAN Enter the R APS VLAN ID West Port East port RPL Owner status Ring MEL Protected VLAN Hold Off Timer Guard Time and WTR Time West Port Specifies the port as the west ring port ERPS uses cardinal direction terms East and West to designate how the ports on node
129. Service TOS Mapping To view this window click QoS gt ToS Mapping Class 0 Y Class 0 Y Class 0 Y class 0 Class 0 W Class 0 H Class 0 vl Class 0 x 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 T Figure 4 9 TOS Mapping window The following parameter may be set Parameter Description Class ID This field is used to enter a Class ID between Class 0 and Class 3 Click Apply to set the changes 134 xStack DES 3200 10 18 28 28F Layer 2 Ethernet Managed Switch User Manual DSCP Mapping This window is used to set up DSCP Mapping To view this window click QoS gt DSCP Mapping OSCP Value Class ID DSCP Class ID gt 0 E Figure 4 10 DSCP Mapping window The following parameters may be set Parameter Description DSCP Value This field is used to enter a DSCP value in the space provided which will instruct the Switch to examine the DiffServ Code part of each packet header and use this as the main or part of the criterion for forwarding The user may choose a value between 0 and 63 Class ID This field is used to enter a Class ID between Class 0 and Class 3 135 Security Safeguard Engine Trusted Host IP MAC Port Binding Port Security 802 1X RADIUS Attributes Assignment SSL Settings SSH Access Authentication Control MAC based Access Control DoS Prevention Settings DHCP Server Screening Settings Safeguard Engine Periodically malicious hosts on the network wil
130. Status Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Figure 3 41 Loopback Detection Settings window Parameter Description Use the drop down menu to enable or disable loopback detection The default is Disabled Interval 1 32767 Set a loop detect Interval between 7 and 32767 seconds The default is 10 seconds Mode Choose Port Based or VLAN Based Recover Time Time allowed in seconds for recovery when a loopback is detected The Loop detect 0 or 60 1000000 Recover Time can be set at 0 seconds or 60 to 1000000 seconds Entering 0 will disable the Loopdetect Recover Time The default is 60 seconds Use the drop down menu to select a beginning port number Use the drop down menu to select an ending port number State Use the drop down menu to toggle between Enabled and Disabled Trap Status Choose the condition for sending traps The options are Loop Detected Trap is sent when the loop condition is detected Loop Cleared Trap is sent when the loop condition is cleared None Do not send a trap for loopback detection This is the default status Both Send both cleared and detected traps Click Apply to implement changes made 95 Spanning Tree This Switch supports three versions of the Spanning Tree Protocol STP Rapid STP and MSTP ST
131. T100 A type of terminal that uses ASCII characters VT100 screens have a text based appearance 273
132. The Switch has separate hardware queues on every physical port to which packets from various applications can be mapped to and in turn prioritized View the following map to see how the Switch implements 802 1P priority queuing 125 xStack DES 3200 10 18 28 28F Layer 2 Ethernet Managed Switch User Manual Implementation of QoS 802 1p Priority Tagging QoS QoS QoS QoS Class 0 Class 1 Class 2 Class 3 Packets without QoS tags will be forwarded to the QoS class based on the QoS 802 1p default priority Incoming packets tagged with the QoS priorities 0 7 will be forwarded to the Figure 4 1 Mapping QoS on the Switch The previous picture shows the default priority setting for the Switch Class 3 has the highest priority of the four priority queues on the Switch In order to implement QoS the user is required to instruct the Switch to examine the header of a packet to see if it has the proper identifying tag tagged Then the user may forward these tagged packets to designated queues on the Switch where they will be emptied based on priority For example if a user wishes to have a videoconference between two remotely set computers the administrator can add priority tags to the video packets being sent out utilizing the Access Profile commands Then on the receiving end the administrator instructs the Switch to examine packets for this tag acquires the tagged packets and maps them to a class queue on the Switch Th
133. URG urgent ACK acknowledgement PSH push RST reset SYN synchronize FIN finish or Check All to filter certain flag bits within the packets Tick UDP to use the UDP port number contained in an incoming packet as the forwarding criterion Ticking UDP requires specifying a source port mask and or a destination port mask Source Port Mask Tick and specify a TCP port mask for the source port to filter in hex form hex 0x0 Oxffff Destination Port Mask Tick and specify a TCP port mask for the destination port to filter in hex form hex Ox0 Oxffff Tick Protocol ID Mask and enter a value defining the protocol ID in the packet header to mask Protocol ID Protocol ID Mask 0 FF Tick and enter a value defining the mask options behind the IP header User Define O FFFFFFFF Tick and enter a user defined value Click Apply to implement changes made Click Create to view the new CPU Access Profile List entry in the CPU Access Profile List window shown below To add another Access Profile click Add CPU ACL Profile To delete a profile click the corresponding Delete button to view the specific configurations for an entry click the Show Details button To add a rule to the CPU Access Profile entry click the Add View Rules button 198 NN 1N 4 O NM0O 1 QC lar D a lla Aj A DANILA 00 10 18 28 28F Layer 2 Ethernet Managed Switch User Manual CPU Interface Filtering State Disabled Ena
134. View Rules Delete F TE EE E Figure 6 55 Access Profile List window for IPv4 example To view the configurations for a previously configured entry click on the corresponding Show Details button which will display the following window i CL Profile Details Profile ID 2 Profile Type IP Owner Type ACL DScEP Yes Show All Profiles Figure 6 56 Access Profile Detail Information window for IPv4 example To return to the Access Profile List window click Show All Profiles To add a rule to a previously configured entry click on the corresponding Add View Rules button and then click Add Rule on the Access Rule List window which will reveal the following window 182 Profile Information Profile ID Profile Type Owner Type DSCP Rule Detail Keep an input field as blank to treat the corresponding option as do not care Access ID 1 65535 1 C Auto Assign DSCP 63 e 9 0 63 Rule Action Action Permit v Priority 0 7 Replace Priority Replace DSCP 0 63 Time Range Name C Counter Disabled w Ports g e 9 1 4 6 9 Figure 6 57 Add Access Rule window for IPv4 example The following parameters may be configured for the IP IPv4 filter Parameter Description Mask 0 FFF Specifies a VLAN ID Destination IP Specifies an IP address for the destination IP address Address Destination IP Mask Specifies a destination IP address mask for the destination IP address
135. a port number it makes an entry into its forwarding table These entries are then used to forward packets through the Switch To view the MAC Address Table window click Monitoring gt MAC Address Table Port o e VLAN Name MAC Address 00 00 00 00 00 00 View All Entry Clear All Entry Total Entries 2 YLAN Name MAC Address Type default 00 32 28 53 10 2D Self default 00 50 60 36 89 48 Dynamic Figure 7 41 MAC Address Table window The functions used in the MAC address table are described below Parameter Description Pot The port to which the MAC address below corresponds VLAN Name Enter a VLAN Name for the forwarding table to be browsed by MAC Address Enter a MAC address for the forwarding table to be browsed by Allows the user to move to a sector of the database corresponding to a user defined port VLAN or MAC address Clear Dynamic Click this button will allow the user to delete all dynamic entries of the address table Entries View All Entry Click this button will allow the user to view all entries of the address table Clear All Entry Click this button will allow the user to delete all entries of the address table 243 System Log The web manager allows the Switch s history log as compiled by the Switch s management agent to be viewed To view the Switch history log click Monitoring gt System Log Date Time 0000 00 00 09 16 55 0000 00 00 08 55 26 0000 00 00 08 45 10 0000 00 00 08
136. ac port address discarded by IP RINGING mac port binding Creating IMPB entry failed due to no ACL rule available Creating IMPB entry failed due to no ACL rule available IP lt ipaddr gt MAC lt macaddr gt Port lt portNum gt the number of blocked entries reaches the Port lt portNum gt enters stop IMPB learning state threshold on a port User manually recover from IMPB stop learning state Port lt portNum gt recovers from IMPB stop learning state Warning Management IP address was changed into lt ipAddr gt by Username lt username gt IP lt ipaddr gt IP Address change activity Management IP address was changed into lt ipAddr gt by ee eee by console console Username lt username gt added User lt username gt Password was changed by Username an J y lt username gt IP lt ipaddr gt Password change activity User lt username gt Password was changed by console l Informational by console Username lt username gt 260 Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q gt 2 2 gt gt gt gt D gt gt J ma ma IP and Informational Password IP Address change activity Changed Engine normal mode Sagra PO L Safeguard Engine enters EXHAUSTED mode Warning exhausted mode Packet Storm Poa CrASL SOM Port lt portNum gt Broadcast storm is occurring occurrence Broadcast storm cleared Port lt portNum gt Broadcast
137. ace CLI command save config 10 Web Pages When you connect to the management mode of the Switch with a Web browser a login window is displayed Enter a user name and password to access the Switch s management mode Below is a list and description of the main folders available in the Web interface Configuration Contains main windows concerning Device Information System Information Serial Port Settings IP Address lPv6 Interface Settings IPv6 Route Settings IPv6 Neighbor Settings Port Configuration Static ARP Settings User Accounts System Log Configuration DHCP Relay DHCP Auto Configuration Settings MAC Address Aging Time Web Settings Telnet Settings Password Encryption CLI Paging Settings Firmware Information SNTP Settings SMTP Settings MAC Notification Settings SNMP Settings Time Range Settings Single IP Management Gratuitous ARP ARP Spoofing Prevention Settings and PPPoE Circuit ID Insertion Settings L2 Features Contains main windows concerning Jumbo Frame 802 1Q Static VLAN Q in Q 802 1v Protocol VLAN VLAN Trunk Settings GVRP Settings Asymmetric VLAN Settings MAC based VLAN Settings PVID Auto Assign Settings Port Trunking LACP Port Settings Traffic Segmentation L2PT Settings IGMP Snooping MLD Snooping Settings Port Mirror Loopback Detection Settings Spanning Tree Forwarding amp Filtering NLB Settings LLDP Ethernet OAM Connectivity Failure Management and ERPS Settings QoS Contai
138. age by simply clicking on a port To view the following graph of UMB cast packets received on the Switch click Monitoring gt Packets gt UMB_ cast Rx 1000 ann Unicast B00 Multicast rog Broadcast 600 500 400 300 200 100 UnittPackets sec Time Interval DEN Record Number 200 Show Hide W Unicast M Multicast W Broadcast Figure 7 9 UMB_cast Rx window for Unicast Multicast and Broadcast Packets To view the UMB_ cast Rx Table window click the View Table link Rx Packets Totalisec Packets Multicast Broadcast Tx Packets Totalisec Figure 7 10 UMB_cast Rx Table window for Unicast Multicast and Broadcast Packets 216 The following fields may be set or viewed Parameter Description Pot Use the drop down menu to choose the port that will display statistics Time Interval Select the desired setting between 7s and 60s where s stands for seconds The default value is one second Record Number Select number of times the Switch will be polled between 20 and 200 The default value is 200 Counts the total number of good packets that were received by a unicast address Counts the total number of good packets that were received by a multicast address Broadcast Counts the total number of good packets that were received by a broadcast address Show Hide Check whether or not to display Multicast Broadcast and Unicast Packets Clear Clicking this button
139. al value before being forwarded by the Switch Replace DSCP 0 63 Select this option to instruct the Switch to replace the DSCP value in a packet that meets the selected criteria with the value entered in the adjacent field Time Range Name Tick the check box and enter the name of the Time Range settings that has been previously configured in the Time Range Settings window This will set specific times when this access rule will be implemented on the Switch Enable or disable the counter settings Ports sid Enter a range of ports to be configured Click Apply to display the following Access Rule List window Profile Type Action Show Details Delete Rules Figure 6 64 Access Rule List window for IPv6 example 187 f a gt a a ANO JN gt Y al f B MLL S so NO 10 18 28 28F l aver 2 Ethernet IV V 1 O la O J La y Cl L Cc ICITIOL IVIC 1 a l Switrh lear Man al 1 OWItCn User Manual To view the configurations for a previously configured rule click on the corresponding Show Details button which will display the following Access Rule Detail Information window Profile ID 3 Access ID 1 Profile Type IPyb Action Perrnit Ports 5 IPv6 Flow Label 00006 Show All Rules Figure 6 65 Access Rule Detail Information window for IPv6 example To create a Packet Content ACL click Add ACL Profile in the Access Profile List wndow and then use the drop down menu to select a Pr
140. an advertisement received on the port from an LLDP neighbor To set the LLDP Notification Interval enter a value in seconds 5 to 3600 Click Apply to implement changes made 107 LLDP Port Settings To view this window click L2 Features gt LLDP gt LLDP Port Settings From Port 01 M Subtype Pra To Part Notification Admin Status 01 Disabled w Txand Rx w Action Address Disabled w Apply Note The IPv4APvb Address should be the Switch s Address Motification Admin Status Address Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Tx and Rx Tx and Rx Tx and Rx Tx and Rx Tx and Rx TH and Rx Tx and Rx TH and Rx Tx and Rx Tx and Rx Tx and Rx Tx and Rx Tx and Rx TH and Rx Tx and Rx Tx and Rx Tx and Rx Tx and Rx Tx and Rx TH and Rx Tx and Rx Tx and Rx Tx and Rx Tx and Rx Tx and Rx Tx and Rx Tx and Rx Tx and Rx Figure 3 53 LLDP Port Settings window The following parameters can be set Parameter Description de Port To Use the pull down menu to select a range of ports to be configured ort Notification Use the pull down menu to enable or disable the status of the LLDP notification This function controls the SNMP trap however it cannot implement traps
141. and an agent The community string acts like a password to permit access to the agent on the Switch One or more of the following characteristics can be associated with the community string Any MIB view that defines the subset of all MIB objects will be accessible to the SNMP community Read write or read only level permission for the MIB objects accessible to the SNMP community To configure SNMP Community entries click Configuration gt SNMP Settings gt SNMP Community Table Add Community Access Right Read Only El Total Entries 2 View Mame Access Right private Cammunityview read_write public Carnmunityview read_only Figure 2 35 SNMP Community Table window The following parameters can set Parameter Description Community Name Type an alphanumeric string of up to 32 characters that is used to identify members of an SNMP community This string is used like a password to give remote SNMP managers access to MIB objects in the Switch s SNMP agent View Name Type an alphanumeric string of up to 32 characters that is used to identify the group of MIB objects that a remote SNMP manager is allowed to access on the Switch The view name must exist in the SNMP View Table Access Right Read Only Specifies that SNMP community members using the community string created can only read the contents of the MIBs on the Switch Read Write Specifies that SNMP community members using the community string created can read fro
142. and click Apply To view this window click L2 Features gt MLD Snooping Settings MLD Snooping Global Settings MLO Snooping State O Enabled 6 Disabled Total Entries 1 VLAN Name default Disabled Modify Router Port Figure 3 37 MLD Snooping Settings window To configure the settings for an existing entry click the corresponding Edit button which will display the following window VLAN ID VLAN Name default Query Interval 1 65535 Max Response Time 1 25 SEC Robustness Value 1 255 Last Listener Query Interval 1 25 sec Fast Done Disabled State Disabled w Version 2 Querer Role HMon Guerier Figure 3 38 MLD Snooping Settings Edit window 92 The following parameters may be viewed or modified Parameter Description VLAN ID This is the VLAN ID that along with the VLAN Name identifies the VLAN for which the user wishes to modify the MLD Snooping Settings VLAN Name This is the VLAN Name that along with the VLAN ID identifies the VLAN for which the user wishes to modify the MLD Snooping Settings Query Interval The Query Interval field is used to set the time in seconds between transmitting MLD queries 1 65535 Entries between 7 and 65535 seconds are allowed The default is 725 Max Response This determines the maximum amount of time in seconds to wait for reports from members Time 1 25 The Max Response Time field allows an entry between 1 and 25 seconds The default is 70
143. ased profile configuration Pv6 address based profile configuration and Packet Content Mask The window shown below is the Add CPU ACL Profile window for Ethernet 193 Select Profile ID Select ACL Type Ethernet ACL O IPv4 ACL O IPY6 ACL Packet Content ACL You can select the field inthe packet to create filtering mask MAC Address Ethernet Type Payload sourcemacMask C Destination MAC Mask sd 802 10 VLAN 1 LAN 802 1P 802 1P Figure 6 73 Add CPU ACL Profile window for Ethernet example Parameter Description Select Profile ID Use the drop down menu to select a unique identifier number for this profile set This value can 1 3 be set from 7 to 3 Select ACL Type Select profile based on Ethernet MAC Address IPv4 address IPv6 or packet content mask This will change the menu according to the requirements for the type of profile Select Ethernet ACL to instruct the Switch to examine the layer 2 part of each packet header Select IPv4 ACL to instruct the Switch to examine the IPv4 address in each frame s header Select IPv6 ACL to instruct the Switch to examine the IPv6 address in each frame s header Select Packet Content ACL to specify a mask to hide the content of the packet header MAC address 802 1Q VLAN Ticking this option instructs the Switch to examine the VLAN identifier of each packet header and use this as the full or partial criterion for forwarding 802 1p Ticking this option
144. ask 0xFFFF Offset 2 Value 0x2222 Mask OxFFFF Counter Total Matched Counter 0 Show All Rules Figure 6 71 Access Rule Detail Information window for Packet Content example NOTE Address Resolution Protocol ARP is the standard for finding a host s hardware address MAC Address However ARP is vulnerable as it can be easily spoofed and utilized to attack a LAN For a more detailed explanation on how ARP works and how to employ D Link s advanced unique Packet Content ACL to prevent ARP spoofing attack please see the section titled ARP Spoofing Prevention Settings on page 58 192 CPU Interface Filtering Due to a chipset limitation and needed extra switch security the Switch incorporates CPU Interface filtering This added feature increases the running security of the Switch by enabling the user to create a list of access rules for packets destined for the Switch s CPU interface Employed similarly to the Access Profile feature previously mentioned CPU interface filtering examines Ethernet IP and Packet Content Mask packet headers destined for the CPU and will either forward them or filter them based on the user s implementation As an added feature for the CPU Filtering the Switch allows the CPU filtering mechanism to be enabled or disabled globally permitting the user to create various lists of rules without immediately enabling them Creating an access profile for the CPU is divided into two basic parts The first is to
145. ated with VLAN X In the form of a VLAN list command PVID is updated with the last item on the VLAN list When a user removes a port from the untagged membership of the PVID s VLAN the ports PVID will be assigned to a default VLAN When PVID Auto Assign is Disabled PVID can only be changed by PVID configuration user changes explicitly The VLAN configuration will not automatically change the PVID The default setting is Enabled To view this window click L2 Features gt PVID Auto Assign Settings PVID Auto Assign State Enabled Disabled Figure 3 19 PVID Auto Assign Settings window Port Trunking Understanding Port Trunk Groups Port trunk groups are used to combine a number of ports together to make a single high bandwidth data pipeline The Switch supports up to fourteen port trunk groups with two to eight ports in each group An Example of Link Aggregation Ethernet Backbone Uplink BERR Ryy F A 5 estantes A ie i 10100 e Il 10100 Mbps Connection 10 vd Connection ayo End Station Clients Figure 3 20 Example of Port Trunk Group The Switch treats all ports in a trunk group as a single port Data transmitted to a specific host destination address will always be transmitted over the same port in a trunk group This allows packets in a data stream to arrive in the same order they were sent 78 NOTE If any ports within the trunk group become disconnected packets intended for the disco
146. ation System Contact Apply Figure 2 2 System Information window The fields that can be configured are described below Parameter Description System Name Enter a system name for the Switch if so desired This name will identify it in the Switch network System Location Enter the location of the Switch if so desired System Contact Enter a contact name for the Switch if so desired Click Apply to implement changes made 13 Serial Port Settings The following window allows the Baud Rate and the Auto Logout to be changed as well as containing information about the Serial Port Settings Click Configuration gt Serial Port Settings to display this window Baud Rate 2600 7 Auto Logout 10 minutes Data Bits a Parity Bits Mone Stop Bits 1 Apply Figure 2 3 Serial Port Settings window Parameter Description Baud Rate This field specifies the baud rate for the serial port on the Switch There are four possible baud rates to choose from 9600 19200 38400 and 115200 For a connection to the Switch using the CLI interface the baud rate must be set to 9600 which is the default setting Auto Logout Select the logout time used for the console interface This automatically logs the user out after an idle period of time as defined Choose from the following options 2 Minutes 5 Minutes 10 Minutes 15 Minutes or Never The default setting is 70 minutes Click Apply to implement
147. authentication RADIUS password and view the Guest VLAN configuration to be associated with the MAC based Access Control function of the Switch To enable the MAC based Access Control Global Settings on the Switch click Security gt MAC based Access Control gt MAC based Access Control Settings 168 MBA Global State Method Authentication Failover Authorization Attributes RADIUS Authorization Trap Config Guest VLAN VLAN Name Member Ports 9 1 5 9 Port Settings From Port To Port State ha Shem OEnabled Disabled default CI No Limit Password Disabled Max User 1 128 Enabled Local Authorization Enabled Log Enabled Enabled Apply a AAA VLAN ID 1 4094 C Apply Mode Aging Time 1 1440 Hold Time 1 300 Max User 1 128 o E o Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled v Disabled v Host Based v 1440 min infinite sec infinite sec I No Limit Hold Time sec Aging Time min Max User Host Based Host Based Host Based HostBased HostBased Host Based Host Based Host Based Host Based Host Based HostBased Host Based Host Based Figure 5 41 MAC based Access Control Settings window The following parameters may be viewed or set Parameter Description MBA Global State Password Authentication Failover Max User 1 128 Use
148. be used to mask the tag values That is the final filter is the result of the AND operation between the customer service tag values and their corresponding masks Specifies the 2 byte value of the chunk which needs to be examined The mask option can be used to mask the 2 byte value of the chunk The final filter is the result of the AND operation between the chunk value and the mask o Select Permit to specify that the packets that match the access profile are forwarded by the Switch according to any additional rule added see below Select Deny to specify the packets that match the access profile are not forwarded by the Switch and will be filtered Select Mirror to specify that packets that match the access profile are mirrored to a port defined in the config mirror port command Port Mirroring must be enabled and a target port must be set Priority 0 7 Enter a priority value if you want to re write the 802 1p user priority of a packet to the value entered in the Priority field which meets the criteria specified previously in this command before forwarding it on to the specified CoS queue For more information on priority queues CoS queues and mapping for 802 1p see the QoS section of this manual Replace Priority Click on the box to enable this option and manually enter the replacement value used to re write the 802 1p user priority value entered in the Priority field which meets the criteria specified previously in this comman
149. being configured to implement changes made 83 IGMP Snooping Internet Group Management Protocol IGMP snooping allows the Switch to recognize IGMP queries and reports sent between network stations or devices and an IGMP host When enabled for IGMP snooping the Switch can add or remove a port to a specific device based on IGMP messages passing through the Switch In order to use IGMP Snooping it must first be enabled for the entire Switch Then fine tune the settings for each VLAN using the IGMP Snooping windows in the L2 Features folder When enabled for IGMP snooping the Switch can open or close a port to a specific multicast group member based on IGMP messages sent from the device to the IGMP host or vice versa The Switch monitors IGMP messages and discontinues forwarding multicast packets when there are no longer hosts requesting that they continue IGMP Snooping Settings Use this window to enable or disable IGMP snooping on the Switch The IGMP Snooping State under IGMP Snooping Global Settings can be enabled or disabled and a Max Learning Entry Value between 1 and 1024 can be entered in the field under IGMP Data Driven Learning Settings Click Apply to modify the settings To view this window click L2 Features gt IGMP Snooping gt IGMP Snooping Settings IGMP Snooping Global Settings IGMP Snooping State Disabled Enabled IGMP Data Driven Learning Settings Max Learned Entry value 1 1024 Total Entries 2 V
150. below for a description of the parameters in the new window NOTE The Switch supports up to 4k static VLAN entries WLAN List Addedit VLAN Find VLAN VLAN Batch settings Total Entries 1 VID VLAN Name default Name should be less than 32 characters Advertisement Enabled Y Select All 1 Tagged O Untagged 5 Forbidden O MotMember all JO OO Om Tagged Untagged Forbidden Mot Member OO Of Tagged Ports Untagged Ports 12345678391011 1213141516 17 18192021 2223242525627 28 Forbidden Ports Figure 3 8 802 1Q Static VLAN window Add Edit VLAN tab Edit The following fields can then be set in the Add Edit VLAN tab Parameter Description VID VLAN ID Allows the entry of a VLAN ID or displays the VLAN ID of an existing VLAN in the Edit window VLANs can be identified by either the VID or the VLAN name VLAN Name Allows the entry of a name for a new VLAN or modifying the VLAN name in the Edit window 68 MO VLAN Name should be no more than 32 characters in length Advertisement Enabling this function will allow the Switch to send out GVRP packets to outside sources notifying that they may join the existing VLAN Port Settings Allows an individual port to be specified as member of a VLAN O Specifies the port as 802 1Q tagged Checking the box will designate the port as Tagged Untagged Specifies the port as 802 1Q untagged Specifies the port as 802 1Q untagged Checking the box w
151. between Enabled and Disabled This is used to turn a port trunking group on or off This is useful for diagnostics to quickly isolate a bandwidth intensive network device or to have an absolute backup aggregation group that is not under automatic control Active Ports Shows the ports that are currently forwarding packets 79 Member Ports Choose the members of a trunked group Up to eight ports per group can be assigned to a group Flooding Ports These ports are designated for flooding broadcast multicast and DLF unicast Destination Lookup Fail packets from the CPU in a trunk group The port is defined by software and doesn t actually exist in the hardware Click Apply to implement changes made LACP Port Settings This window is used to create port trunking groups on the Switch The user may set which ports will be active and passive in processing and sending LACP control frames To view this window click L2 Features gt LACP Port Settings From Fort To Part Activity Passive Passive Passive Passive Passive Passive Passive Passive Passive Passive Passive Passive Passive Passive Passive Passive Passive Passive Passive Passive Passive Passive Passive Passive Passive Passive Passive Passive Passive Figure 3 22 LACP Port Settings window The following fields can be set Parameter Description From Port To Port A consecutive group of ports may be configured starting with the selec
152. ble method Enable Admin failed through SSH authenticated by AAA local_enable Successful Enable Admin through Web authenticated by AAA none method Successful Enable Admin through Web SSL authenticated by AAA none Successful Enable Admin through Console authenticated by AAA local_enable method Username lt username gt Enable Admin failed through Console authenticated by AAA local_enable method Username lt username gt Successful Enable Admin through Web from lt userlP gt authenticated by AAA local_enable method Username lt username gt Enable Admin failed through Web from lt userlP gt authenticated by AAA local_enable method Username lt username gt Successful Enable Admin through Web SSL from lt userlP gt authenticated by AAA local_enable method Username lt username gt Enable Admin failed through Web SSL from lt userlP gt authenticated by AAA local_enable method Username lt username gt Successful Enable Admin through Telnet from lt userlP gt authenticated by AAA local_enable method Username lt username gt Enable Admin failed through Telnet from lt userlP gt authenticated by AAA local_enable method Username lt username gt Successful Enable Admin through SSH from lt userlP gt authenticated by AAA local_enable method Username lt username gt Enable Admin failed through SSH from lt userlP gt authenticated by AAA local_enable method Username lt us
153. bled Add CPU ACL Profile Total Used Rule Entries Total Unused Rule Entries 1 14 Profile ID Profile Type ownerType Ethernet CPUACL Show Details Add View Rules _ Delete IP CPUACL Show Details Add View Rules ___Delete___ Figure 6 81 CPU Access Profile List window for IPv4 example To view the configurations for a previously configured entry click on the corresponding Show Details button which will display the following window PU ACL Profile Details Profile ID 2 Profile Type IF Owner Type CPU ACL DScEP Yes Show All Profiles Figure 6 82 CPU Access Profile Detail Information window for IPv4 example To return to the CPU Access Profile List window click Show All Profiles To add a rule to a previously configured entry click on the corresponding Add View Rules button and then click Add Rule on the CPU Access Rule List window which will reveal the following window Profile Information Profile ID Profile Type Owner Type CPU ACL Rule Detail Keep an inputfield as blank to treat the corresponding option as do not care Access ID 1 5 DSCP e 9 0 63 Rule Action Action Permit ka Time Range Mame Ports e g 1 4 6 9 Apply Figure 6 83 CPU Add Access Rule window for IPv4 example 199 The following parameters may be configured for the IP IPv4 filter Parameter Description Access ID 1 5 Type in a unique identifier number for this access T
154. cated using the TACACS protocol from a remote TACACS server server_group Adding a previously configured server group will require the user to be authenticated using a user defined server group previously configured on the Switch Local Enable Password Settings This window will configure the locally enabled password for the enable admin command When a user chooses the local_ enable method to promote user level privileges to administrator privileges he or she will be prompted to enter the password configured here that is locally set on the Switch To view the following window click Security gt Access Authentication Control gt Local Enable Password Settings 167 Old Local Enable Password Max 15 characters PA New Local Enable Password Sa Confirm Local Enable Password A Figure 5 40 Local Enable Password Settings window To set the Local Enable Password configure the following parameters and click Apply Parameter Description Old Local Enable If a password was previously configured for this entry enter it here in order to change it to Password Max 15 a new password characters New Local Enable Enter the new password that you wish to set on the Switch to authenticate users Password attempting to access Administrator Level privileges on the Switch The user may set a password of up to 15 characters Confirm Local Enable Confirm the new password entered above Entering a different password here from the
155. ccounting Request as well as a timeout UnknownTypes The number of RADIUS packets of unknown type which were received from this server on the accounting port PacketsDropped The number of RADIUS packets which were received from this server on the accounting port and dropped for some other reason 226 xStack DES 3200 10 18 28 28F Layer 2 Ethernet Managed Switch User Manual Authenticator State The following section describes the 802 1X State on the Switch To view the Authenticator State click Monitoring gt Port Access Control gt Authenticator State Authenticator State Time Interval FEES Auth PAE State Backend State PortStatus ForceAuth Success Authorized Force Auth SUCCESS Authorized ForceAuth Success Authorized ForceAuth Success Authorized Force Auth Success Authorized ForceAuth Success Authorized ForceAuth Success Authorized ForceAuth SUCCESS Authorized ForceAuth Success Authorized ForceAuth Success Authorized Force Auth SUCCESS Authorized Force Auth Success Authorized ForceAuth Success Authorized Force Auth Success Authorized ForceAuth Success Authorized ForceAuth SUCCESS Authorized ForceAuth Success Authorized ForceAuth Success Authorized ForceAuth Success Authorized Force Auth Success Authorized ForceAuth Success Authorized ForceAuth SUCCESS Authorized ForceAuth Success Authorized ForceAuth Success Authorized ForceAuth SUCCESS Authorized Figure 7 19 Authenticator State window This window display
156. ce Name Neighbor IPv6 Address and the Link Layer MAC Address and then click the Add button To look for an IPv6 Neighbor Settings table entry enter the Interface Name select the desired State All Address Static or Dynamic in the middle section of this window and then click the Find button To delete all the entries being displayed on the table at the bottom of this window click the Clear button 18 The following parameters may be configured or viewed Parameter Description Interface Name Enter the name of the IPv6 neighbor To search for all the current interfaces on the Switch go to the second Interface Name field in the middle part of the window tick the All check box and then click the Find button Neighbor IPv6 Enter the neighbor IPv6 address Address Link Layer MAC Enter the link layer MAC address Address State Use the drop down menu to select All Address Static or Dynamic Port Configuration This section contains information for configuring various attributes and properties for individual physical ports including port speed and flow control Port Settings Various port settings including State Speed Duplex Flow Control Address Learning Medium Type and MDIX can be configured on the Switch To view the following window click Configuration gt Port Configuration gt Port Settings From Port To Fort State speed Duplex Flow Control Address Learning Medium Type Pot or enano Baco Disab
157. ch If the Countdown timer has expired and yet the Packet Storm continues the port will be placed in Shutdown Rest mode The port will be recovered after 5 minutes or the user manually resets the port using the Port Configuration window in the Configuration folder and selecting the disabled port and returning it to an Enabled status Choosing this option obligates the user to configure the Interval setting as well which will provide packet count samplings from the Switch s chip to determine if a Packet Storm is occurring Count Down The Count Down timer is set to determine the amount of time in minutes that the Switch will wait 0 or 5 30 before shutting down the port that is experiencing a traffic storm Only the switch continues to experience a traffic storm during this countdown period and the switch will shutdown the port This parameter is only useful for ports configured as Shutdown in their Action field and therefore will not operate for Hardware based Traffic Control implementations The possible time settings for this field are 0 5to 30 minutes Zero means that the port will not enter shutdown rest mode Time Interval The Interval will set the time between Multicast and Broadcast packet counts sent from the Switch s 5 30 chip to the Traffic Control function These packet counts are the determining factor in deciding when incoming packets exceed the Threshold value The Interval may be set between 5 and 30 seconds with the default s
158. choose either all of the ports selected as None or all of the ports selected as Egress Click Clear All to clear all the settings at the top of this window Click Apply to implement the changes made To delete an entry in the static multicast forwarding table click the corresponding Delete button To modify an entry in the static multicast forwarding table click the corresponding Edit button and make the desired changes at the top of the window before clicking the Apply button 104 Multicast Filtering Mode Users can configure the multicast filtering mode To view this window click L2 Features gt Forwarding amp Filtering gt Multicast Filtering Mode Filtering Mode Forward Unregistered Groups y Apply Multicast Filtering Mode Forward Unregistered Groups Forward Unregistered Groups Forward Unregistered Groups Forward Unregistered Groups Forward Unregistered Groups Forward Unregistered Groups Forward Unregistered Groups Forward Unregistered Groups Forward Unregistered Groups Forward Unregistered Groups Forward Unregistered Groups Forward Unregistered Groups Forward Unregistered Groups Forward Unregistered Groups Forward Unregistered Groups Forward Unregistered Groups Forward Unregistered Groups Forward Unregistered Groups Forward Unregistered Groups Forward Unregistered Groups Forward Unregistered Groups Forward Unregistered Groups Forward Unregistered Groups Forward Unregistered Groups Forward Unregistered Grou
159. cify that the access profile will apply only to packets with this 802 1p priority value Ethernet Type Specify access profile is applied to the Ethernet type value in each frame s header Select Permit to specify that the packets that match the access profile are forwarded by the Switch according to any additional rule added see below Select Deny to specify the packets that match the access profile are not forwarded by the Switch and will be filtered Time Range Tick the check box and enter the name of the Time Range settings that has been previously Name configured in the Time Range Settings window This will set specific times when this access rule will be implemented on the Switch Ports Enter a range of ports to be configured Click Apply to display the following Access Rule List window 196 Profile Type Action Ethernet Permit Show Details Delete Rules Figure 6 78 CPU Access Rule List window for Ethernet example To view the configurations for previously configured rules click on the corresponding Show Details button which will display the following CPU Access Rule Detail Information window PU ACL Rule Details Profile ID 1 ACCESS ID 1 Profile Type Ethernet Action Permit Ports 6 802 1P Bi Show All Rules Figure 6 79 CPU Access Rule Detail Information window for Ethernet example To create an IPv4 ACL click Add CPU ACL Profile in the CPU Access Profile List window This will open the Add
160. clears all statistics counters on this window View Table Clicking this button instructs the Switch to display a table rather than a line graph View Graphic Clicking this button instructs the Switch to display a line graph rather than a table Transmitted Tx These windows display the Transmitted Tx packets on the Switch To select a port to view these statistics for select the port by using the Port pull down menu The user may also use the real time graphic of the Switch at the top of the Web page by simply clicking on a port To view the following graph of packets transmitted from the Switch click Monitoring gt Packets gt Transmitted Tx View Table Ay 1000 900 Bytes 00 a WT pA A A O E Packets roo 600 500 400 300 200 100 UnitiPackets sec or Bylesfseci Time Interval EN Record Number 200 ShowHide Iv Bytes W Packets Figure 7 11 Transmitted Tx window for Bytes and Packets To view the Transmitted Tx Table window click the link View Table 217 xStack DES 3200 10 18 28 28F Layer 2 Ethernet Managed Switch User Manual View Graphic Ap Port 1 Figure 7 12 Transmitted Tx Table window for Bytes and Packets The following fields may be set or viewed Parameter Description Select the desired setting between 7s and 60s where s stands for seconds The default value is one second 218 1 vQtank NEC_29NN 10 1 2 92 92E l avar 2 Etharnat Manana Qw
161. col TACACS Enter this parameter if the server host utilizes the TACACS protocol RADIUS Enter this parameter if the server host utilizes the RADIUS protocol Timeout 1 255 Enter the time in seconds the Switch will wait for the server host to reply to an authentication request The default value is 5 seconds Key Authentication key to be shared with a configured TACACS or RADIUS servers only Specify an alphanumeric string up to 254 characters Retransmit 1 255 Enter the value in the retransmit field to change how many times the device will resend an authentication request when the server does not respond Click Apply to add the server host Entries will be displayed in the table on the lower half of this window NOTE More than one authentication protocol can be run on the same physical server host but remember that TACACS XTACACS TACACS are separate entities and are not compatible with each other Login Method Lists This window is used to configure a user defined or default Login Method List of authentication techniques for users logging on to the Switch The sequence of techniques implemented in this command will affect the authentication result For example if a user enters a sequence of techniques for example TACACS XTACACS local the Switch will send an authentication request to the first TACACS host in the server group If no response comes from the server host the Switch will send an authentication reques
162. controls the LLDP packet forwarding message based on Message individual ports If LLDP is enabled on a port it will flood the LLDP packet to all ports that have the same port VLAN and will advertise to other stations attached to the same IEEE 802 LAN Message Tx This interval controls how often active ports retransmit advertisements to their neighbors To eget change the packet transmission interval enter a value in seconds 5 to 32768 5 32768 Message Tx Hold This function calculates the Time to Live for creating and transmitting the LLDP advertisements Multiplier 2 10 to LLDP neighbors by changing the multiplier used by an LLDP Switch When the Time to Live for an advertisement expires the advertised data is then deleted from the neighbor Switch s MIB LLDP Reinit The LLDP reinitialization delay interval is the minimum time that an LLDP port will wait before Delay 1 10 reinitializing after receiving an LLDP disable command To change the LLDP Reinit Delay enter a value in seconds 1 to 10 LLDP Tx Delay LLDP TX Delay allows the user to change the minimum time delay interval for any LLDP port 1 8192 which will delay advertising any successive LLDP advertisements due to change in the LLDP MIB content To change the LLDP TX Delay enter a value in seconds 1 to 8192 LLDP Notification LLDP Notification Interval is used to send notifications to configured SNMP trap receiver s when Interval 5 3600 an LLDP change is detected in
163. cription Click the corresponding radio button to select a previously configured Group ID from the drop down menu Click the corresponding radio button to select a previously configured Group Name from the drop down menu Click the radio button to enter the VID This is the VLAN ID that along with the VLAN Name identifies the VLAN the user wishes to create Click the radio button to enter a VLAN Name This is the VLAN Name that along with the VLAN ID identifies the VLAN the user wishes to create 802 1p Priority This parameter is specified to re write the 802 1p default priority previously set in the Switch which is used to determine the CoS queue to which packets are forwarded to Once this field is specified packets accepted by the Switch that match this priority are forwarded to the CoS queue specified previously by the user For more information on priority queues CoS queues and mapping for 802 1p see the QoS section of this manual Port List e g 1 6 Select the specified ports you wish to configure by entering the port number in this field or tick the Select All Ports box Search Port List This function allows the user to search all previously configured port list settings and display them on the lower half of the table To search for a port list enter the port number you wish to view and click Find To display all previously configured port lists on the bottom half of the window click the Show All button to clear all
164. d before forwarding it on to the specified CoS queue Otherwise a packet will have its incoming 802 1p user priority re written to its original value before being forwarded by the Switch Replace DSCP Select this option to instruct the Switch to replace the DSCP value in a packet that meets the selected criteria with the value entered in the adjacent field Time Range Name Tick the check box and enter the name of the Time Range settings that has been previously configured in the Time Range Settings window This will set specific times when this access rule will be implemented on the Switch Enable or disable the counter for this ACL rule Ports Enter a range of ports to be configured 191 lt Jf if S T S SSI OVAr p SAHI 11 12 7027 034 Y AVET Profile Type Action Packet Content Permit Figure 6 70 Access Rule List window for Packet Content example To view the configurations for a previously configured rule click on the corresponding Show Details button which will display the following Access Rule Detail Information window ess Rule Detail Informatior ACL Rule Details Profile ID 4 Access ID 1 Profile Type Packet Content Action Permit Ports 1 Priority 5 Replace DSCP 56 source MAC 00 03 02 03 04 05 Mask FF FF FF FF FF FF Destination MAC 00 03 02 03 04 04 Mask FF FF FF FF FF FF Service Provider Tag DBA Mask OxFFFFI Customer Tag MBBBB Mask OxFFFFY Offset 1 Value 01111 M
165. d of control If the user selects this mode all packets will be sent to the CPU thus all packets will not be forwarded by the hardware until the S W learns the entries for the ports The port will check ARP packets and IP packets by IP MAC port binding entries When the packet is found by the entry the MAC address will be set to dynamic If the packet is not found by the entry the MAC address will be set to block Other packets will be dropped The default mode is Enabled Strict if not specified Enabled Loose This mode provides a looser way of control If the user selects loose mode ARP packets and IP Broadcast packets will be sent to the CPU The packets will still be forwarded by the hardware until a specific source MAC address is blocked by the software The port will check ARP packets and IP Broadcast packets by IP MAC port binding entries When the packet is found by the entry the MAC address will be set to dynamic If the packet is not found by the entry the MAC address will be set to block Other packets will be bypassed 140 Allow Zero IP Use the drop down menu to enable or disable this feature Zero IP configures the state which allows ARP packets with 0 0 0 0 source IP to bypass By default the DHCP packet with broadcast DA will be flooded When set to Disabled the broadcast DHCP packet received by the specified port will not be forwarded The user may set the mode for this IP MAC port binding settings by choosing ARP
166. d on isolated enterprise LANs As Ethernet has been expanded to operate on the much larger scale carrier networks that encompass multiple administrative domains the demands of the much larger and more complex networks required a new set of OAM capabilities Since these larger scale networks have a very large user base carry more diversified network applications and typically span a much larger geographical area than traditional enterprise Ethernet LANs where link uptime is crucial a means of dealing with connectivity faults able to operate in Ethernet became necessary Since none of the existing OAM protocols could adequately address this new circumstance Ethernet Connectivity Fault Management has been developed in order to meet the new operational management needs created by the application of Ethernet technologies to MANs and WANs Ethernet CFM provides Ethernet network service providers with various benefits such as end to end service level OAM and lower operating expenses all operated on top of a familiar Ethernet platform CFM introduces some new terms and concepts to Ethernet these are briefly described below Maintenance Domain A maintenance domain is generic term referring to a management area created for the purpose of managing and administering a network A maintenance domain is operated by a single entity or owner and defined by a boundary with a set of ports internal to this boundary An Ethernet CFM maintenance domain referred
167. d value gt Value2 Actual value Figure 3 43 STP Port Settings window In addition to setting Spanning Tree parameters for use on the switch level the Switch allows for the configuration of groups of ports each port group of which will have its own spanning tree and will require some of its own configuration settings An STP Group will use the switch level parameters entered above with the addition of Port Priority and Port Cost An STP Group spanning tree works in the same way as the switch level spanning tree but the root bridge concept is replaced with a root port concept A root port is a port of the group that is elected based on port priority and port cost to be the connection to the network for the group Redundant links will be blocked just as redundant links are blocked on the switch level The STP on the switch level blocks redundant links between switches and similar network devices The port level STP will block redundant links within an STP Group It is advisable to define an STP Group to correspond to a VLAN group of ports 99 The following fields can be set Parameter Description From Port To Port A consecutive group of ports may be configured starting with the selected port External Cost 0 Auto External Cost This defines a metric that indicates the relative cost of forwarding packets to the specified port list Port cost can be set automatically or as a metric value The default value is O auto
168. ddress in the Multicast Listener Query Message 91 2 Multicast Listener Report Version 1 Comparable to the Host Membership Report in IGMPv2 and labeled as 131 in the ICMP packet header this message is sent by the listening port to the Switch stating that it is interested in receiving multicast data from a multicast address in response to the Multicast Listener Query message 3 Multicast Listener Done Akin to the Leave Group Message in IGMPv2 and labeled as 132 in the ICMPv6 packet header this message is sent by the multicast listening port stating that it is no longer interested in receiving multicast data from a specific multicast group address therefore stating that it is done with the multicast data from this address Once this message is received by the Switch it will no longer forward multicast traffic from a specific multicast group address to this listening port If implementing MLD snooping version 2 two types of messages are transferred between devices The two messages are defined by two ICMPv6 packet headers labeled 130 and 143 1 Multicast Listener Query Version 2 Similar to the IGMPv3 Membership Query for IPv4 and labeled as 130 in the ICMPv6 packet header this message is sent by the router to ask if any link is requesting multicast data With MLD snooping version 2 there are three types of MLD query messages emitted by the router as described below e The router sends a General Query message to lear
169. de Settings Figure 2 13 System Log Settings window The following parameters can be set Parameter Description System Log Use the radio buttons to either enable or disable the system log feature Save Mode Use this drop down menu to choose the method that will trigger a log entry Choose among On Demand Time Interval and Log Trigger min 1 65535 Enter a time interval in minutes for which a log entry is to be made To modify the system log settings on this window enter the appropriate information and click Apply System Log Server The Switch can send Syslog messages to up to four designated servers using the System Log Server To configure the system log settings click Configuration gt System Log Configuration gt System Log Server Add System Log Server Server ID w Severity Warning Mi Server IP Address Facility Local UDP Port 514 or 6000 65535 Status Disabled System Log Server List server O Server F Address Facility UDP Port Figure 2 14 System Log Server window The following parameters can be set 24 Parameter Description Syslog server settings index 1 4 This drop down menu allows you to select the level of messages that will be sent The options are Warning Informational and All Server IP Address The IP address of the Syslog server some of the operating system daemons and processes have been assigned Facility values Processes
170. destination port Destination Port Specifies a UDP port for the destination port Mask 0 FFFF Specifies a UDP port mask for the destination port Protocol ID Protocol ID___ e g 0 255 Specifies that the Switch will examine the protocol field in each packet and if this field contains the value entered here apply the following rules Select Permit to specify that the packets that match the access profile are forwarded by the Switch according to any additional rule added see below Select Deny to specify the packets that match the access profile are not forwarded by the Switch and will be filtered Select Mirror to specify that packets that match the access profile are mirrored to a port defined in the config mirror port command Port Mirroring must be enabled and a target port must be set Priority 0 7 Enter a priority value if you want to re write the 802 1p user priority of a packet to the value entered in the Priority field which meets the criteria specified previously in this command before forwarding it on to the specified CoS queue For more information on priority queues CoS queues and mapping for 802 1p see the QoS section of this manual Replace Priority Click on the box to enable this option and manually enter the replacement value used to re write the 802 1p user priority value entered in the Priority field which meets the criteria specified previously in this command before forwarding it on to the specified CoS
171. dmin failed through Console authenticated by AAA server lt serverlP gt Username lt username gt Enable Admin failed through Console due to AAA server timeout or improper configuration Username lt username gt Successful Enable Admin through Web from lt userlP gt authenticated by AAA server lt serverlP gt Username lt username gt Enable Admin failed through Web from lt userlP gt authenticated by AAA server lt serverlP gt Username lt username gt Successful Enable Admin through Web SSL from lt userlP gt authenticated by AAA server lt serverlP gt Username lt username gt Enable Admin failed through Web SSL from lt userlP gt authenticated by AAA server lt serverlP gt Username lt username gt Successful Enable Admin through Telnet from lt userlP gt authenticated by AAA server lt serverlP gt Username lt username gt Enable Admin failed through Telnet from lt userlP gt authenticated by AAA server lt serverlP gt Username lt username gt Enable Admin failed through Telnet from lt userlP gt due to AAA server timeout or improper configuration Username lt username gt Successful Enable Admin through SSH from lt userlP gt authenticated by AAA server lt serverlP gt Username lt username gt 259 Informational Informational Informational Informational Enable Admin failed Enable Admin failed through SSH from lt userlP gt through SSH authent
172. dow is displayed Profile Type Action Figure 6 76 initial CPU Access Rule List window Click Add Rule which will reveal the following window 195 Profile Information Profile ID 1 Profile Type Ethernet Owner Type CPU ACL VLAN OXFFF source MAC FF FF FF FF FF FF Destination MAC FF FF FF FF FF FF 202 1P Yes Ethernet Type Yes Rule Detail Keep an input field as blank to treatthe corresponding option as do not care Access ID 1 5 1 Source MAC Address po e 9 00 00 00 00 FF FF Destination MAC Address A e 9 00 00 00 00 FF FF 802 1P 0 7 Ethernet Type 0 FFFF Rule Action os Es Action Permit w Time Range Name l L Ports SS e 9 1 4 5 9 Figure 6 77 CPU Add Access Rule window for Ethernet example Profile Information and the available configuration parameters viewable in the menu will vary depending on the options that were chosen in the Add CPU Access Profile menu To set the Access Rule for Ethernet adjust the following parameters as applicable for the CPU Access Profile being configured and click Apply Parameter Description Access ID 1 5 Type in a unique identifier number for this access This value can be set from 7 to 5 VLAN Use this to specify that the access profile will apply to only to the VLAN in the VLAN Name field MAC Address Specify that the access profile will apply to the Source MAC Address and or Destination MAC Address 802 1p 0 7 Enter a value from O to 7 to spe
173. dress needed in your network 3 SIM can eliminate any specialized cables for stacking connectivity and remove the distance barriers that typically limit your topology options when using other stacking technology Switches using D Link Single IP Management labeled here as SIM must conform to the following rules SIM is an optional feature on the Switch and can easily be enabled or disabled through the Command Line Interface or Web Interface SIM grouping has no effect on the normal operation of the Switch in the user s network There are three classifications for SIM The Commander Switch CS which is the master switch of the group Member Switch MS which is a switch that is recognized by the CS a member of a SIM group and a Candidate Switch CaS which is a Switch that has a physical link to the SIM group but has not been recognized by the CS as a member of the SIM group A SIM group can only have one Commander Switch CS All switches in a particular SIM group must be in the same IP subnet broadcast domain Members of a SIM group cannot cross a router A SIM group accepts up to 33 switches numbered 0 32 including the Commander Switch numbered 0 There is no limit to the number of SIM groups in the same IP subnet broadcast domain however a single switch can only belong to one group If multiple VLANs are configured the SIM group will only utilize the system VLAN on any switch SIM allows intermediate devices that do not sup
174. e TACACS XTACACS TACACS RADIUS protocols When a user logs in to the Switch or tries to access the administrator level privilege he or she is prompted for a password lf TACACS XTACACS TACACS RADIUS authentication is enabled on the Switch it will contact a TACACS XTACACS TACACS RADIUS server to verify the user If the user is verified he or she is granted access to the Switch There are currently three versions of the TACACS security protocol each a separate entity The Switch s software supports the following versions of TACACS TACACS Terminal Access Controller Access Control System Provides password checking and authentication and notification of user actions for security purposes utilizing via one or more centralized TACACS servers utilizing the UDP protocol for packet transmission Extended TACACS XTACACS An extension of the TACACS protocol with the ability to provide more types of authentication requests and more types of response codes than TACACS This protocol also uses UDP to transmit packets TACACS Terminal Access Controller Access Control System plus Provides detailed access control for authentication for network devices TACACS is facilitated through Authentication commands via one or more centralized servers The TACACS protocol encrypts all traffic between the Switch and the TACACS daemon using the TCP protocol to ensure reliable delivery In order for the TACACS XTACACS TACACS RADIUS security function
175. e 8 6 Reset System window 247 Ping Test Users can Ping either an IPv4 address or an IPv6 address Ping is a small program that sends ICMP Echo packets to the IP address you specify The destination node then responds to or echoes the packets sent from the Switch This is very useful to verify connectivity between the Switch and other nodes on the network Open the Tools drop down menu on the left hand side of the menu bar at the top of the Web manager and click Ping Test to open the following window IPv4 Ping Test Enter the IF address ofthe device or station you wantto ping then click Start Target IF Address 0 0 0 0 Repeat Pinging for Infinite times Ol 1 258 times Timeout 1 99 sec IPv6 Ping Test Enter the IF address ofthe device or station you wantto ping then click Start Interface Mame A Repeat Pinging for Infinite times Of 288 times Size 1 6000 Timeout 1 10 sec Figure 8 7 Ping Test window The user may click the Infinite times radio button in the Repeat Pinging for field which will tell the ping program to keep sending ICMP Echo packets to the specified IP address until the program is stopped The user may opt to choose a specific number of times to ping the Target IP Address by clicking its radio button and entering a number between 7 and 255 Click Start to initiate the Ping program The following parameters may be configured or viewed Parameter Descri
176. e Time Range settings that has been previously configured in the Time Range Settings window This will set specific times when this access rule will be implemented on the Switch Ports sd Enter a range of ports to be configured Click Apply to display the following Access Rule List window Time Range Name Profile Type Action Fermit Show Details Delete Rules Figure 6 90 CPU Access Rule List window for IPv6 example To view the configurations for a previously configured rule click on the corresponding Show Details button which will display the following CPU Access Rule Detail Information window PU ACL Rule Details Profile ID a Access ID 1 Profile Type IP Action Permit Ports IPvb Flow Label Show All Rules 5 000006 Figure 6 91 CPU Access Rule Detail Information window for IPv6 example To create a Packet Content ACL click Add CPU ACL Profile in the CPU Access Profile List window and then use the drop down menu to select a Profile ID between 7 and 3 and click the Packet Content ACL radio button Click Select and the following window will appear 203 Select Profile ID Select ACL Type O Ethernet ACL O Prd ACL O IPv6 ACL Packet Content ACL You can select the field inthe packet to create filtering mask Packet Content Offset 0 15 mask ogoogo C Offset 16 31 offset 32 47 C Offset 49 83 Figure 6 92 Add CPU ACL Profile window for Packet Content example Click on the box at t
177. e User Name and Password fields and click OK This will open the Web based user interface The Switch management features available in the web based manager are explained below Web based User Interface The user interface provides access to various Switch configuration and management windows allows you to view performance statistics and permits you to graphically monitor the system status Areas of the User Interface The figure below shows the user interface The user interface is divided into three distinct areas as described in the table A i 4 i rrr ee es E E E gt Dt Tink FE Pontoon GE Portola sungaty 3 5 9 9 tt i i 7 19 A E Gita E xStack 53110218 6 10 26 Power Console 4 l D Li 7 1115 1 m Sette s RIGS bara ES oses y 12 2 2 4 AR 24 14 16 18 20 ta E E 28 gt Apply System Up Time 0 days 1 57 13 Logged in as administrator Anonymous 10 41 44 9 D Logout ball DES 3200 28F ii z e 3 Configuration 5 L2 Features Device Information 5 Qos Device Type DES 3200 28F MAC Address 00 00 01 02 03 04 H B Security System Name IP Address 10 76 97 4 Static E 5 a System Location Mask 255 0 0 0 System Contact Gateway 10 1 1 254 Boot PROM Version 1 00 8003 Management VLAN default Firmware Version 1 20 B008 Login Timeout Minutes 10 mins Hardware Version At Dual Image Supported System Time 00 00 0 01 57 12 E 4 Device Status and Quick Configurations SNTP Disabled Settinas
178. e actual bandwidth of the switch port if it s not the same as the configured rate which means the bandwidth may be assigned by higher priority esource such as RADIUS server Figure 4 2 Bandwidth Control window The following parameters can be set or are displayed Parameter Description A consecutive group of ports may be configured starting with the selected port This drop down menu allows you to select between Ax receive Tx transmit and Both This setting will determine whether the bandwidth ceiling is applied to receiving transmitting or both receiving and transmitting packets From Port To Port Type No Limit Use the drop down menu to specify the selected port has limited or unlimited bandwidth This field allows you to enter the data rate in Kbits per second that will be the limit for the selected port The value must be a multiple of 62 5 up to 1024000 Rate 64 1024000 Click Apply to set the bandwidth control for the selected ports Results of configured Bandwidth Settings will be displayed in the Bandwidth Control Table on the lower half of the window 127 Traffic Control On a computer network packets such as Multicast packets and Broadcast packets continually flood the network as normal procedure At times this traffic may increase due to a malicious endstation on the network or a malfunctioning device such as a faulty network card Thus switch throughput problems will arise and consequen
179. e drop down menu to enable or disable system capabilities Click Apply to implement changes made System Description System Capabilities 109 LLDP Dot1 TLVs Settings LLDP Dot1 TLVs are organizationally specific TLVs which are defined in IEEE 802 1 and used to configure an individual port or group of ports to exclude one or more of the IEEE 802 1 organizational port VLAN ID TLV data types from outbound LLDP advertisements To view this window click L2 Features gt LLDP gt LLDP Dot1 TLVs Settings From Port D PYID Disabled Protocol VLAN ID Disabled vw VLANName ov i VLAN Name Disabled v VLAN Name Protocol Identity Disabled EAPOL Port PYID State Partand Protocol VID State VLAN Mame State Protocol Identity State Protocol Identity Disabled Enabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled D
180. e limit for routing a DHCP packet If a value of 0 is entered the Switch will not process the value in the seconds field of the BOOTP or DHCP packet If a non zero value is entered the Switch will use that value along with the hop count to determine whether to forward a given BOOTP or DHCP packet This field can be toggled between Enabled and Disabled using the pull down menu It is used to enable or disable the DHCP Agent Information Option 82 on the Switch The default is Disabled Enabled When this field is toggled to Enabled the relay agent will insert and remove DHCP relay information option 82 field in messages between DHCP servers and clients When the relay agent receives the DHCP request it adds the option 82 information and the IP address of the relay agent if the relay agent is configured to the packet Once the option 82 information has been added to the packet it is sent on to the DHCP server When the DHCP server receives the packet if the server is capable of option 82 it can implement policies like restricting the number of IP addresses that can be assigned to a single remote ID or circuit ID Then the DHCP server echoes the option 82 field in the DHCP reply The DHCP server unicasts the reply to the back to the relay agent if the request was relayed to the server by the relay agent The switch verifies that it originally inserted the option 82 data Finally the relay agent removes the option 82 field and forwards the pac
181. e machine transitions from AUTHENTICATING to AUTHENTICATED as a result of the Backend Authentication state machine indicating successful authentication of the Supplicant authSuccess TRUE 232 Auth Timeout Counts the number of times that the state machine transitions from AUTHENTICATING to ABORTING as a result of the Backend Authentication state machine indicating authentication timeout authTimeout TRUE Counts the number of times that the state machine transitions from AUTHENTICATING to HELD as a result of the Backend Authentication state machine indicating authentication failure authFail TRUE Auth Reauth Counts the number of times that the state machine transitions from AUTHENTICATING to ABORTING as a result of a reauthentication request reAuthenticate TRUE Counts the number of times that the state machine transitions from AUTHENTICATING to ABORTING as a result of an EAPOL Start message being received from the Supplicant Auth LogOff Counts the number of times that the state machine transitions from AUTHENTICATING to ABORTING as a result of an EAPOL Logoff message being received from the Supplicant Authed Reauth Counts the number of times that the state machine transitions from AUTHENTICATED to CONNECTING as a result of a reauthentication request reAuthenticate TRUE Authed Start Counts the number of times that the state machine transitions from AUTHENTICATED to CONNECTING as a result of an EAPOL Start message b
182. ec No Limit Ho Limit No Limit Mo Limit Queue Bandwidth Control Table On Port 4 Queue Max Rate Kbit sec 0 No Limit 1 No Limit 2 No Limit 3 Mo Limit Oueye Bandwidth Control Table On Port 5 Figure 4 4 Queue Bandwidth Control Settings window 130 A A i me if pmm A 1 r ry J nak DE S_297NN 10 18 98 9R8EF avar 2 Etharnat Jananad Switrr lear Man igl ES 3200 10 1 8 28 28F Layer 2 Ethernet Mar laged owiicn User Manual The following parameters can be set or are displayed Parameter Description A consecutive group of ports may be configured starting with the selected port Use to define the range of CoS value configured for the selected ports Use the No Limit check box to specify the selected port has limited or unlimited bandwidth Max Rate Max rate is a limitation When it is specified packet transmitted from the queue will not exceed 64 1024000 the specified limitation even though the bandwidth is available The value must be between 64 and 1024000 Actual rate rate entered minimum granularity minimal granularity for example 62 5 100 62 5 62 5 Inumber implies the closest smaller integer Click Apply to set the changes 802 1p Default Priority The Switch allows the assignment of a default 802 1p priority to each port on the Switch To view this window click QoS gt 802 1p Default Priority Priority o a Settings Effective Priority 1 ola m S G m a G m G G a
183. econds The default value is 20 Bridge Forward Delay The Forward Delay can be from 4 to 30 seconds Any port on the Switch spends this 4 30 time in the listening state while moving from the blocking state to the forwarding state Tx Hold Count 1 10 Used to set the maximum number of Hello packets transmitted per interval The count can be specified from 7 to 10 The default is 6 Max Hops 6 40 Used to set the number of hops between devices in a spanning tree region before the BPDU bridge protocol data unit packet sent by the Switch will be discarded Each switch on the hop count will reduce the hop count by one until the value reaches zero The Switch will then discard the BPDU packet and the information held for the port will age out The user may set a hop count from 6 to 40 The default is 20 Click Apply to implement changes made 98 NOTE The Hello Time cannot be longer than the Max Age Otherwise a configuration error will occur Observe the following formulas when setting the above parameters Max Age lt 2 x Forward Delay 1 second Max Age 2 2 x Hello Time 1 second STP Port Settings STP can be set up on a port per port basis To view the following window click L2 Features gt Spanning Tree gt STP Port Settings Frorn Port To Part eN as WN Auto w External Cost 0 Auto Migrate Edge Auto w P2P Port STF Enabled y Restricted Role False v Restricted TON Fi Forward BPDU
184. ed Cache Timeout This field will set the time between a new key exchange between a client and a host using 60 86400 the SSL function A new SSL session is established every time the client and host go through a key exchange Specifying a longer timeout will allow the SSL session to reuse the master key on future connections with that particular host therefore speeding up the negotiation process The default setting is 600 seconds SSL Ciphersuite Settings 156 RSA with This ciphersuite combines the RSA key exchange stream cipher RC4 encryption with 128 RC4 128 MD5 bit keys and the MD5 Hash Algorithm Use the pull down menu to enable or disable this ciphersuite This field is enabled by default RSA with 3DES EDE This ciphersuite combines the RSA key exchange CBC Block Cipher 3DES EDE CBC SHA encryption and the SHA Hash Algorithm Use the pull down menu to enable or disable this ciphersuite This field is enabled by default DHE DSS with 3DES This ciphersuite combines the DSA Diffie Hellman key exchange CBC Block Cipher EDE CBC SHA 3DES_EDE encryption and SHA Hash Algorithm Use the pull down menu to enable or disable this ciphersuite This field is enabled by default RSA EXPORT with This ciphersuite combines the RSA Export key exchange and stream cipher RC4 encryption RC4 40 MD5 with 40 bit keys Use the pull down menu to enable or disable this ciphersuite This field is enabled by default SSL Certificate Download Server
185. ed in the Reports field To view this window click Monitoring gt IGMP Snooping gt IGMP Snooping Group O VLAN Mame VID List fe g 1 4 6 Group iP Address Clear Data Driven View all View All Data Driven Clear All Data Driven IGMP Snooping Group Table Total Entries 0 VID VLAN Mame Source Group Member Ports Router Ports Reports Up time oe ee Filter Mode Note Clear data driven group by VLAN ID or YLAN Name when group IF address is Empty Figure 7 26 IGMP Snooping Group window The following fields can be searched Parameter Description VLAN Name The VLAN ID of the multicast group VID List The VLAN ports of the multicast group e g 1 4 6 Group IP Address The IP address of the multicast group Enter the appropriate information and click Find The searched entries will be shown in the IGMP Snooping Group Table Click View All to see all the entries 235 Click View All Data Driven to display all the data driven groups learned in the IGMP Snooping Group Table Click Clear Data Driven to clear the specific data driven groups learned in IGMP Snooping Group Table Click Clear All Data Driven to clear all data driven groups learned in IGMP Snooping Group Table NOTE To configure IGMP snooping for the Switch go to the L2 Features folder and select IGMP Snooping gt IGMP Snooping Settings IGMP Snooping Host This window displays current IGMP Snooping host information on the Switch To view
186. ed objects is maintained by the SNMP agent and used to manage the device These objects are defined in a Management Information Base MIB which provides a standard presentation of the information controlled by the on board SNMP agent SNMP defines both the format of the MIB specifications and the protocol used to access this information over the network The Switch supports the SNMP versions 1 2c and 3 Choose which version to monitor and control the Switch The three versions of SNMP vary in the level of security provided between the management station and the network device In SNMP v 1 and v 2 user authentication is accomplished using community strings which function like passwords The remote user SNMP application and the Switch SNMP must use the same community string SNMP packets from any station that has not been authenticated are ignored dropped The default community strings for the Switch used for SNMP v 1 and v 2 management access are e public Allows authorized management stations to retrieve MIB objects e private Allows authorized management stations to retrieve and modify MIB objects 39 SNMPv3 uses a more sophisticated authentication process that is separated into two parts The first part is to maintain a list of users and their attributes that are allowed to act as SNMP managers The second part describes what each user on that list can do as an SNMP manager The Switch allows groups of users to be listed and c
187. eing received from the Supplicant Authed LogOff Counts the number of times that the state machine transitions from AUTHENTICATED to DISCONNECTED as a result of an EAPOL Logoff message being received from the Supplicant Responses Counts the number of times that the state machine sends an initial Access Request packet to the Authentication server i e executes sendRespToServer on entry to the RESPONSE state Indicates that the Authenticator attempted communication with the Authentication Server AccessChallenges Counts the number of times that the state machine receives an initial Access Challenge packet from the Authentication server i e aReq becomes TRUE causing exit from the RESPONSE state Indicates that the Authentication Server has communication with the Authenticator OtherReqToSupp Counts the number of times that the state machine sends an EAP Request packet other than an Identity Notification Failure or Success message to the Supplicant i e executes txReq on entry to the REQUEST state Indicates that the Authenticator chose an EAP method NonNakRespFromSup Counts the number of times that the state machine receives a response from the Supplicant to an initial EAP Request and the response is something other than EAP NAK i e rxResp becomes TRUE causing the state machine to transition from REQUEST to RESPONSE and the response is not an EAP NAK Indicates that the Supplicant can respond to the Authenticator s c
188. elds may be configured Parameter Description Profile ID Use the drop down menu to select the pre configured Profile ID that will be used to configure the Flow Metering parameters Access ID Enter the Access ID that will be used to configure the Flow Metering parameters enter a value 1 65535 between 7 and 65535 Violate Specifies the action when the packet is in red color mode e Permit Permits the packet e Replace DSCP Change the DSCP of the packet Single rate Two Color Marker marks packets green or red based on a rate and burst size This is useful when only burst size matters e Rate 64 1024000 Kbps Specifies the committed bandwidth in Kbps for the flow The range is from 64 to 1024000 The unit is Kbps e Burst Size 0 1016 Kbyte Specifies the burst size for this flow The range is from O to 1016 The unit is Kbyte e Drop Drops the packet Click Apply to implement changes made click lt lt Back to return to the ACL Flow Meter window 208 Monitoring Cable Diagnostics CPU Utilization Port Utilization Packet Size Memory Utilization Packets Errors Port Access Control Browse ARP Table Browse VLAN IGMP Snooping LLDP Ethernet OAM Connectivity Fault Management MAC based Access Authentication State Browse Session Table MAC Address Table System Log Cable Diagnostics This window displays the details of copper cables attached to specific ports on the Switch
189. elnet authenticated by AAA server Login failed through Telnet authenticated by AAA server Login failed through Telnet due to AAA server timeout or improper configuration Successful login through SSH authenticated by AAA server Login failed through SSH authenticated by AAA server Login failed through SSH due to AAA server timeout or improper configuration Successful login through Console authenticated by AAA Informational server lt serverlP gt Username lt username gt Login failed through Console authenticated by AAA server lt serverlP gt Username lt username gt Login failed through Console due to AAA server timeout or improper configuration Username lt username gt Successful login through Web from lt userlP gt authenticated by AAA server lt serverlP gt Username Informational lt username gt Login failed through Web from lt userlP gt authenticated by AAA server lt serverlP gt Username lt username gt Login failed through Web from lt userlP gt due to AAA server timeout or improper configuration Username lt username gt Successful login through Web SSL from lt userlP gt authenticated by AAA server lt serverlP gt Username Informational lt username gt Login failed through Web SSL from lt userlP gt authenticated by AAA server lt serverlP gt Username lt username gt Login failed through Web SSL from lt userlP gt due to AAA server timeout or improper conf
190. els are set between 0 and 7 where 0 is the lowest and 7 is the highest This is the control creations of MIPs None Don t create MIPs This is the default value Auto MIPs can always be created on any ports in this MD if that port is not configured with a MEP of this MD For the intermediate switch in a MA the setting must be auto in order for the MIPs to be created on this device Explicit MIPs can be created on any ports in this MD only if the next existent lower level has a MEP configured on that port and that port is not configured with a MEP of this MD SenderlD TLV This is the control transmission of the SenderlD TLV None Don t transmit sender ID TLV This is the default value Chassis Transmit sender ID TLV with chassis ID information Manage Transmit sender ID TLV with managed address information Chassis Manage Transmit sender ID TLV with chassis ID information and manage address information Click Apply to implement the changes made 116 CFM MA Settings To view this window click on L2 Features gt CFM gt CFM Settings gt Add MA button MD MA VLAN ID 1 4094 Total Entries 1 VID MAName Sender ID MEP ID s Defer 10 seconds MIP Port Table Add MEP Figure 3 61 CFM MA Settings window The following parameters can be set Parameter Description MA To enter the maintenance association name VLAN ID VLAN Identifier Different MA must be associated with different VLAN
191. ely identify a multiple spanning tree instance set on the Switch The Switch initially possesses one C ST or Common Internal Spanning Tree of which the user may modify the parameters for but cannot change the MSTI ID for and cannot be deleted To view this window click L2 Features gt Spanning Tree gt MST Configuration Identification MST Configuration identification Settings Configuration Mame 00 00 01 02 03 04 Instance ID Settings Type Add VID v Total Entries 1 MSTI ID VID List CIST 1 4094 Figure 3 44 MST Configuration Identification window The window above contains the following information Parameter Description Configuration Name A previously configured name set on the Switch to uniquely identify the MSTI Multiple Spanning Tree Instance If a configuration name is not set this field will show the MAC address to the device running MSTP This field can be set in the STP Bridge Global Set tings window Revision Level This value along with the Configuration Name will identify the MSTP region configured on 0 65535 the Switch The user may choose a value between 0 and 65535 with a default setting of 0 MSTI ID 1 8 This field shows the MSTI IDs currently set on the Switch This field will always have the CIST MSTI which may be configured but not deleted Clicking the hyperlinked name will open a new window for configuring parameters associated with that particular MSTI Type This field allows the
192. ement CRM iia A a 114 CFNES Stinson dt eee 116 GFMIMASetngs dd y IA A A A 117 CFM MEP Sengo sarria A AA edabdevacetuitored a Sheed 118 PIMP RUGS CURLIN GS racehorse aaa Ls A ee otc 120 CIVIL ODD ACK SENINGS saeia a a a a NN a o O o o se a ate act 121 CFMANKTaco SCUInGgS acces E ee ee ee a a ee ee ee te See 122 ERPS SS UIA S ia 123 DO E ecard eee det Saeed tea odessa ro este uence 125 Advantages 8 6 yam ee A A A E eee er 125 Understanding Q09 un crip to nr erect a os e al Ophea eee ae Oey OO en ee er eae ene ee Car eee 126 Bandwidth COMMON aria da 127 Tamne COTO PEPE cinta EE O O 128 Queue Bandwidth Control Settings iii A is 130 SOZ lp DET ultra dt lada aabt 131 902 1 USEF PHONY sacd A A A A 131 QOS SCNEGUIING setings lis 132 PMOMy Wiel PINO taa 133 TOS Ma a e e tpn ston 134 BSS Oca 219 Rat POM RT eR Re ner a Ene eC ene eae ee eae eee 135 Anne EE 136 Sa legquard Endler lodos iaa lil 136 RUS CCG MOS A OS 138 P MAC RO Bid os 138 NEP BiNdINd GlObAlSCUINOS ci ea 139 IMP Binding Foroen S it A E id 140 IMP Binding Entry SeN Sn isis 141 DHCP MOOD ING EME Sr o a a tae 142 MAC Sl Loves SE A e o eer nea A ts area eer a ere er eee wena eee 142 A 142 POR SECU POR SOULS it a dla 142 Por Security FOB ENTIE S cx ei aa 144 O A A II A E A TAPIA 144 Understanding 802 1X Port based and Host based Network Access Control occccoccccoccnccccncccccnconcnonocnnoncnnnonnnonnnnconcnononos 147 Por based NetWork ACCESS CO
193. en in turn the administrator will set a priority for this queue so that will be emptied before any other packet is forwarded This result for the end user is receiving all packets sent as quickly as possible thus prioritizing the queue and allowing for an uninterrupted stream of packets which optimizes the use of bandwidth available for the video conference Understanding QoS The Switch has four priority queues These priority queues are labeled from O to 3 with 3 being the highest priority and O the lowest priority queue The eight priority tags specified in IEEE 802 1p are mapped to the Switch s priority tags as follows Priority O is assigned to the Switch s Q1 queue Priority 1 is assigned to the Switch s QO queue Priority 2 is assigned to the Switch s QO queue Priority 3 is assigned to the Switch s Q1 queue Priority 4 is assigned to the Switch s Q2 queue Priority 5 is assigned to the Switch s Q2 queue Priority 6 is assigned to the Switch s Q3 queue Priority 7 is assigned to the Switch s Q3 queue 126 For strict priority based scheduling any packets residing in the higher priority queues are transmitted first Multiple strict priority queues empty based on their priority tags Only when these queues are empty are packets of lower priority transmitted For weighted round robin queuing the number of packets sent from each priority queue depends upon the assigned weight For a configuration of four QoS queues A
194. ength of LBM to be sent The defaultis LBM to be sent The default is O LBM Payload Pattern An arbitrary amount of data to be included in a Data TLV along with an indication whether the Data TLV is to be included LBMs Priority The 802 1p priority to be set in the transmitted LBMs If not specified it uses the same priority as CCMs and LTMs sent by the MA Click Apply to implement changes made 121 CFM Linktrace Settings On this page the user can configure the CFM link track message To view this window click L2 Features gt CFM gt CFM Linktrace Settings HAC Address pene TL 2255 pouPrionty None E Transaction ID Source MEP Destination Figure 3 67 CFM Linktrace Settings window The fields that can be configured are described below Parameter Description e e AAA AAA Mi Aa 2 dl oe TA MAC Address To enter the destination MAC address Link trace message TTL value The default value is 64 The range is 2 255 PDU Priority The 802 1p priority to be set in the transmitted LTM If not specified it uses the same priority as CCMs sent by the MEP Click Apply to implement changes made Type the MEP Name or MA Name and MEP ID in the spaces provided and click on Find to view details for the linktrace in the table below Click on the View Detail link to display the details of any listed CFM Linktrace set 122 ERPS Settings This page is used to enable the Ethernet Ring Protection Switching E
195. ent changes made 82 BPDU Attack Protection Settings This menu is used to configure the BPDU protection function for the ports on the switch In generally there are two states in BPDU protection function One is normal state and another is under attack state The under attack state have three modes drop block and shutdown A BPDU protection enabled port will enter an under attack state when it receives one STP BPDU packet And it will take action based on the configuration Thus BPDU protection can only be enabled on STP disabled port BPDU protection has a higher priority than the Forward BPDU setting configured in the STP Port Settings menu L2 Features gt Spanning Tree gt STP Port Settings That is when a port configured to the Forward BPDU STP Port Settings window and BPDU protection is enabled then the port will not forward STP BPDU BPDU protection also has a higher priority than the Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling port setting in the determination of BPDU handling That is when a port is configured as Layer 2 Protocol Tunnel port for Tunnel STP L2 Features gt L2PT Settings it will forward STP BPDU But if the port is BPDU protection enabled then the port will not forward STP BPDU To view this window click L2 Features gt BPDU Protection Settings a uE BPDU Protection Global State O Enabled Disabled Log Status Bon m het Recover Time 50 1000000 lso sec Infinite Trap Status N one From Port S
196. ent software In addition to the standard MIB II the Switch also supports its own proprietary enterprise MIB as an extended Management Information Base Specifying the MIB Object Identifier may also retrieve the proprietary MIB MIB values can be either read only or read write The Switch incorporates a flexible SNMP management for the switching environment SNMP management can be customized to suit the needs of the networks and the preferences of the network administrator The Switch supports the Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP versions 1 2c and 3 The administrator can specify the SNMP version used to monitor and control the Switch The three versions of SNMP vary in the level of security provided between the management station and the network device SNMP View Table This window is used to assign views to community strings or SNMP groups that define which MIB objects can be accessed by a remote SNMP manager To configure SNMP View Settings for the Switch click Configuration gt SNMP Settings gt SNMP View Table View Type Included we Total Entries 8 View Mame Subtree restricted 1 3 6 1 2 1 1 Included restricted 1 3 6 1 2 1 11 Included Delete restricted 1 3 6 1 6 3 10 2 1 included Delete restricted 1 3 6 1 6 3 11 2 1 Included Delete restricted 1 3 6 1 6 3 15 1 1 Included Delete Community view 1 included Delete Communitywiew 1 3 6 1 6 3 Excluded Delete Communityview 1 3 6 1 6 3 1 Included Delete Figure 2 32 SNM
197. er may use the default Method List or other Method List configured by the user See the Login Method Lists window in this section for more information Enable Method List Using the pull down menu configure an application for normal login on the user level utilizing a previously configured method list The user may use the default Method List or other Method List configured by the user See the Enable Method Lists window in this section for more information Click Apply to implement changes made Authentication Server Group This window will allow users to set up Authentication Server Groups on the Switch A server group is a technique used to group TACACS XTACACS TACACS RADIUS server hosts into user defined categories for authentication using method lists The user may define the type of server group by protocol or by previously defined server group The Switch has three built in Authentication Server Groups that cannot be removed but can be modified Up to eight authentications server hosts may be added to any particular group To view the following window click Security gt Access Authentication Control gt Authentication Server Group Sever Group List Edit Sever Group Group Name Max 15 characters Total Entries 4 radius ate tacacs tacacs xtacacs Figure 5 35 Authentication Server Group Settings window Server Group List tab The Switch has four built in Authentication Server Groups that cannot be re
198. er part of the window NOTE For more information and configuration examples for the 802 1X Guest VLAN function please refer to the Guest VLAN Configuration Example located on the D Link Website Initialize Port s Existing 802 1X port and MAC based settings are displayed and can be configured using the two windows below To initialize ports for the port side of 802 1X the user must first enable 802 1X by port in the 802 1X Settings window To view the following window click Security gt 802 1X gt Initialize Port s From Part m v ToPon E e Initialize Port Table Auth PAE State Backend_State Port Status Figure 5 24 Initialize Port s window for Port based 802 1X This window allows initialization of a port or group of ports The Initialize Port Table in the bottom half of the window displays the current status of the port s To initialize ports choose the range of ports in the From Port and To Port fields To begin the initialization click Apply To initialize ports for the MAC based side of 802 1X the user must first enable 802 1X by MAC address in the 802 1 X Settings window To view the following window click Security gt 802 1X gt Initialize Port s Apply Figure 5 25 Initialize Port s window for MAC based 802 1X 153 To initialize ports choose the range of ports in the From Port and To Port fields Next the user must specify the MAC address to be initialized by entering it into the M
199. ername lt username gt Configuration successfully Configuration successfully downloaded Username downloaded lt username gt IP lt ipaddr gt Informational Informational Configuration successfully Configuration successfully by console downloaded by console downloaded Username lt username gt Configuration download Configuration download was unsuccessful Username Warni vast arning was unsuccessful lt username gt IP lt ipaddr gt Configuration successfully Configuration successfully uploaded Username a a uploaded lt username gt IP lt ipaddr gt 203 Informational Configuration download by Configuration download by console was unsuccessful console was unsuccessful Username lt username gt Configuration successfully Configuration successfully by console uploaded j Informational uploaded by console Username lt username gt Configuration upload was Configuration upload was unsuccessful Username Warnin unsuccessful lt username gt IP lt ipaddr gt 9 Configuration upload by Configuration upload by console was unsuccessful sea console was unsuccessful Username lt username gt J Log message successfully Log message successfully uploaded Username e Informational uploaded lt username gt IP lt ipaddr gt Log message successfully Log message successfully by console uploaded Informational uploaded by console Username lt username gt Log m
200. ername gt Successful Enable Admin through Console authenticated by AAA none method Username lt username gt Successful Enable Admin through Web from lt userlP gt authenticated by AAA none method Username lt username gt Successful Enable Admin through Web SSL from lt userlP gt authenticated by AAA none method Username lt username gt 258 Informational Informational Informational Informational Successful Enable Admin through SSH authenticated by AAA none method Successful Enable Admin Enable Admin failed through Console authenticated by AAA server Enable Admin failed through Console due to AAA server timeout or improper configuration Successful Enable Admin through Web authenticated by AAA server Enable Admin failed through Web authenticated by AAA server Successful Enable Admin through Web SSL Enable Admin failed through Telnet authenticated by AAA server Enable Admin failed through Telnet due to AAA server timeout or improper configuration Successful Enable Admin through SSH authenticated by AAA server Successful Enable Admin through Telnet from lt userlP gt authenticated by AAA none method Username lt username gt Successful Enable Admin through SSH from lt userlP gt authenticated by AAA none method Username lt username gt Successful Enable Admin through Console authenticated by AAA server lt serverlP gt Username lt username gt Enable A
201. es the VLAN ID carried in the data packets it receives from private networks into those used in the Service Providers network To view this window click L2 Features gt Q in Q gt VLAN Translation CVID Entry Settings OYID List 1 4094 SID 1 4094 ess a Delete All Total Entries O A N S ID Action Figure 3 12 VLAN Translation Settings window The following fields can be set Parameter Description Specify to Add or Replace Service Provider VLAN ID SVID packets The customer VLAN ID List to which the tagged packets will be added This configures the VLAN to join the Service Providers VLAN as a tagged member Click Apply to make a new entry and Delete All to remove a VLAN Translation entry 802 1v Protocol VLAN The window allows the user to create Protocol VLAN groups and add protocols to that group The 802 1v Protocol VLAN Group Settings supports multiple VLANs for each protocol and allows the user to configure the untagged ports of different protocols on the same physical port For example it allows the user to configure an 802 1Q and 802 1v untagged port on the same physical port The lower half of the window displays any previously created groups 802 1v Protocol Group Settings To view this window click L2 Features gt 802 1v Protocol VLAN gt 802 1v Protocol Group Settings Add Protocol VLAN Group Note Mame should be less than 32 characters Add Protocol for Protocol VLAN Group Grou
202. escription Select Profile 1D Enter an integer used to identify the access profile that will be configured with this command Rule Detail This field will instruct the Switch to mask the packet header beginning with the offset value specified Offset 0 15 Enter a value in hex form to mask the packet from the beginning of the packet to the 15th byte Offset 16 31 Enter a value in hex form to mask the packet from byte 16 to byte 37 Offset 32 47 Enter a value in hex form to mask the packet from byte 32 to byte 47 Offset 48 63 Enter a value in hex form to mask the packet from byte 48 to byte 63 Offset 64 79 Enter a value in hex form to mask the packet from byte 64 to byte 79 Select Permit to specify that the packets that match the access profile are forwarded by the Switch according to any additional rule added see below Select Deny to specify the packets that match the access profile are not forwarded by the Switch and will be filtered Time Range Name Tick the check box and enter the name of the Time Range settings that has been previously configured in the Time Range Settings window This will set specific times when this access rule will be implemented on the Switch Ports Enter a range of ports to be configured Click Apply to display the following CPU Access Rule List window 206 A mm YT AAAA AA A IAA XO E al sn RA J kW my P Df 4 _ 7 7 Q JO Q P Q Ji NA Tt Mior nar Y ULUVU
203. essage upload was Log message upload was unsuccessful Username Souk Warning unsuccessful lt username gt IP lt ipaddr gt Log message upload by Log message upload by console was unsuccessful Warni arning console was unsuccessful Username lt username gt Interface Port link up Port lt portNum gt link up lt link state gt Informational Port link down Port lt portNum gt link down Informational Successful login through _ Successful login through Console Username Console Informational Console lt username gt poo AEG LOUN Login failed through Console Username lt username gt Warning Console logo through Console Logout through Console Username lt username gt Informational Console session timed out Console session timed out Username lt username gt Informational Web Successful login through Successful login through Web Username lt username gt aaa Web IP lt ipaddr gt Login failed through Web Login failed through Web Username lt username gt IP Warning lt ipaddr gt Logout through Web Logout through Web Username lt username gt IP is lt ipaddr gt Wen ceso Web session timed out Username lt username gt IP ae lt ipaddr gt Successful login through Successful login through Web SSL Username ene ee Web SSL lt username gt IP lt ipaddr gt Login failed through Web _ Login failed through Web SSL Username lt username gt Warnin SSL IP lt ipaddr gt J Login failed
204. ets received that were 64 octets in length excluding framing bits but including FCS octets The total number of packets including bad packets received that were between 65 and 127 octets in length inclusive excluding framing bits but including FCS octets The total number of packets including bad packets received that were between 128 and 255 octets in length inclusive excluding framing bits but including FCS octets The total number of packets including bad packets received that were between 256 and 511 octets in length inclusive excluding framing bits but including FCS octets The total number of packets including bad packets received that were between 512 and 1023 octets in length inclusive excluding framing bits but including FCS octets 1024 1518 The total number of packets including bad packets received that were between 1024 and 1518 octets in length inclusive excluding framing bits but including FCS octets Show Hide Check whether or not to display 64 65 127 128 255 256 511 512 1023 and 1024 1518 packets received Clicking this button clears all statistics counters on this window View Table Clicking this button instructs the Switch to display a table rather than a line graph View Graphic Clicking this button instructs the Switch to display a line graph rather than a table Memory Utilization The Switch displays memory utilization information for DRAM and Flash To view this window click Monitoring
205. etting of 5 seconds Threshold This value represents the upper threshold at which the specified traffic control is switched on The 64 1000000 threshold value is measured in Kbit sec when the action is set to drop mode it is measured in pps packets sec when the action is set to shutdown mode That is the number of broadcast multicast Unknown unicast packets received by the Switch that will trigger the storm traffic control measures The configurable threshold range is from 64 to 1000000 with a default setting of 64 Actual rate rate entered minimum granularity minimal granularity for example 62 5 100 62 5 62 5 Inumber implies the closest smaller integer Storm Control Select the type of Storm Type to detect Broadcast Multicast Unknown Unicast Broadcast Type Multicast Broadcast Unknown Unicast Multicast Unknown Unicast Broadcast Multicast Unknown Unicast or None Once selected use the pull down menu to enable or disable this storm detection Traffic Trap Setting Storm Trap Enable sending of Storm Trap messages when the type of action taken by the Traffic Control function in handling a Traffic Storm is one of the following None Will not send any Storm trap warning messages regardless of action taken by the Traffic Control mechanism Storm Occurred Will send Storm Trap warning messages upon the occurrence of a Traffic Storm only Storm Cleared Will send Storm Trap messages when a T
206. f g eo TT ws 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 2 bytes 1 byte 1 byte Sub option type Length Circuit ID type Length VLAN the incoming VLAN ID of DHCP client packet Module For a standalone switch the Module is always 0 for a stackable switch the Module is the Unit ID g Port The incoming port number of DHCP client packet port number starts from 1 wp Aoo ES Remote ID sub option format default 1 2 3 4 5 e e e e e 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 6 bytes Sub option type Length Remote ID type Length MAC address The Switch s system MAC address G gee Oe N Remote ID sub option format for user configured string 1 2 3 4 5 ASCII Remote ID String up to 127 characters 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte N bytes Sub option type Length Remote ID type Length ok ee ae oN a User configured Remote ID Figure 2 16 Circuit ID and Remote ID Sub option Format 28 DHCP Relay Interface Settings This window allows the user to set up a server by IP address for relaying DHCP BOOTP information to the Switch The user may enter a previously configured IP interface on the Switch that will be connected directly to the DHCP server using the following window Properly configured settings will be displayed in the DHCP Relay Interface Table at the bottom of the following window The user may add up to four server IP s per IP interface on the Switch To enable and configure DHCP Relay Global Settings on
207. ffic between the clients To view this window click L2 Features gt Asymmetric VLAN Settings Asymmetric VLAN State Disabled Enabled Apply Figure 3 17 Asymmetric VLAN Settings window Click Apply to implement changes MAC based VLAN Settings This window is used to create MAC based VLAN entries on the switch A MAC Address can be mapped to any existing static VLAN and multiple MAC addresses can be mapped to the same VLAN When a static MAC based VLAN entry is created for a user the traffic from this user is able to be serviced under the specified VLAN Therefore each entry specifies a relationship of a source MAC address with a VLAN To view this window click L2 Features gt MAC based VLAN Settings MAC Address oS VLAN Name ooo Total Entries 0 MAC Address VLAN ID Figure 3 18 MAC based VLAN Settings window The following fields can be set Parameter Description MAC Address Specify the MAC address to be mapped VLAN Name Enter the VLAN name of a previously configured VLAN Click Find Add or Delete All for changes to take effect T PVID Auto Assign Settings This enables or disables PVID Auto Assign on the Switch PVID is the VLAN that the switch will use for forwarding and filtering purposes If PVID Auto Assign is Enabled PVID will be possibly changed by previously set PVID or VLAN configurations When a user configures a port to VLAN X s untagged membership this port s PVID will be upd
208. fic encryption algorithms and key sizes to be used for an authentication session The Switch possesses four possible ciphersuites for the SSL function which are all enabled by default To utilize a particular ciphersuite disable the unwanted ciphersuites leaving the desired one for authentication When the SSL function has been enabled the web will become disabled To manage the Switch through the web based management while utilizing the SSL function the web browser must support SSL encryption and the header of the URL must begin with https Ex https 10 90 90 90 Any other method will result in an error and no access can be authorized for the web based management To view this window click Security gt SSL Settings SSL Settings SoL State O Enabled Disabled Cache Timeout 60 86400 600 sec Note Web will be disabled if SSL is enabled SSL Ciphersuite Settings RSA with RC4_128_MD5 O Disabled Enabled RSA with 3DES EDE CBC SHA Disabled Enabled DHE DSS with 3DES EDE CBC SHA O Disabled Enabled RSA EXPORT with RC4 40 MDS O Disabled Enabled SSL Certificate Download Server F Address Certificate File Name Current Certificate Loaded with RSA Certificate Figure 5 28 SSL Settings window To set up the SSL function on the Switch configure the following parameters and click Apply Parameter Description SSL Settings SSL Status Enable or Disable the SSL status on the switch The default is disabl
209. for a BOOTP server to provide it with this information before using the default or previously entered settings IP Interface The current IP Interface being assigned an IP address on this window Management This allows the entry of a VLAN Name from which a management station will be allowed to VLAN Name manage the Switch using TCP IP in band via web manager or Telnet Management stations that are on VLANs other than the one entered here will not be able to manage the Switch in band unless their IP addresses are entered in the Security IP Management window If VLANs have not yet been configured for the Switch the default VLAN contains all of the Switch s ports There are no entries in the Security IP Management table by default so any management station that can connect to the Switch can access the Switch until a management VLAN is specified or Management Station IP Addresses are assigned Interface Admin Toggle between Enabled and Disabled This must be set to Enabled when setting an IP address State on this window IPv4 Address Enter the desired IPv4 address to be set The default address is 10 90 90 90 A Bitmask that determines the extent of the subnet that the Switch is on Should be of the form XXX XXX XXX XXX where each xxx is a number represented in decimal between O and 255 The value should be 255 0 0 0 for a Class A network 255 255 0 0 for a Class B network and 255 255 255 0 for a Class C network but custom subnet masks are allo
210. g 1 7 12 AA Clan Figure 5 4 IMP Binding Global Settings window The following parameters can be set Parameter Description Trap Log This field will enable and disable the sending of trap log messages for IP MAC port binding When Enabled the Switch will send a trap log message to the SNMP agent and the Switch log when an ARP packet is received that doesn t match the IP MAC port binding configuration set on the Switch DHCP Snoop State Use the pull down menu to enable or disable the DHCP Snooping State for IP MAC port binding ARP Inspection When this is Enabled the Switch will filter ARP packets which have unauthorized sender MACs IP addresses and ingress ports ARP inspection is only active on IP MAC port binding enabled ports Recover Learning Enter the ports for which the ARP check function has stopped This will allow recovery or an Ports e g 1 7 12 unfreezing of the ARP check on the ports listed in this field Alternatively tick All to force the recovery of all learning ports Click Apply to implement the settings made 139 IMP Binding Port Settings Select a port or a range of ports with the From Port and To Port fields Enable or disable the port with the State Allow Zero IP Forward DHCP Packet Mode and SLT fields and configure the port s Max Entry value To view this window click Security gt IP MAC Port Binding gt IMP Binding Port Settings From Port To Port State 04 w 01 Allo
211. gine on the Switch To display the Switch s SNMP Engine ID click Configuration gt SNMP Settings gt SNMP Engine ID Engine ID s00000303003228531020 Note Engine ID length is 10 64 the accepted character is from 0 to F Figure 2 37 SNMP Engine ID window To change the Engine ID enter the new Engine ID in the space provided and click the Apply button 44 xStack DES 3200 10 18 28 28F Layer 2 Ethernet Managed Switch User Manual SNMP Trap Configuration The following window is used to enable and disable trap settings for the SNMP function on the Switch To view this window for configuration click Configuration gt SNMP Settings gt SNMP Trap Configuration SMMP Trap Enabled SHMP Authentication Traps Enabled SNMP Link Change Traps Enabled SNMP LinkChange Traps Port Settings From Patt To Port State 01 Enabled v State Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled gt 1 2 3 4 5 Bi T 8 J x Figure 2 38 SNMP Trap Configuration window To enable or disable the SNMP Trap State SNMP Authentication Traps SNMP Link Change Traps and configure SNMP Link Change Trap Port Settings use the corresponding pull down menus Click Apply to let the changes take effect RMON Users can enable and disable remote monitoring RMON status for the SNM
212. hackers or other malicious sources To view this window click Security gt DoS Prevention Settings Dos Prevention Trap Log Disabled Enabled Prevention Settings Type C Land Attack C Blat Attack LI Smurf Attack C TCP Null Scan C TCP mascan C TCP SYNFIN L TCP SYN SrcPort less 1024 Pl all Action Drop v Porto Priority o Rx Rate 64 1024000 NoLimit Enabled w Apply Clear All Counters DoS Attack Prevention List Action Port Priority Rx Rate Kbitiseci Frame Counts Land Attack Enabled Blat Attack Enabled Smurt Attack Enabled TCP Mull Scan Enabled TCP Xmascan Enabled TCP SYMFIM Enabled TCP SYN SrcPort less 1024 Disabled Figure 5 43 DoS Prevention Settings window Set the following parameters and then click Apply Parameter Description DoS Prevention Trap Use the radio button to enable or disable this feature Log Type Tick the check box for each type of DoS attack Land Attack Blat Attack Smurf Attack TCP Null Scan TCP Xmasscan TCP SYNFIN TCP SYN SrcPort less 1024 and All 171 Action Toggle between Drop and Mirror Pot Select the Port which the log will be mirrored to Priority 0 7 Select the Priority for the mirror port Rx Rate 64 1024000 Enter a value between 64 and 1024000 or tick the No Limit check box Toggle to enable or disable DoS Prevention Click to clear the DoS prevention trap logs for the corresponding types of DoS attacks DHCP Server Screen
213. he common ARP Spoofing attack that is wide spread today This is why the Packet Content ACL is able to inspect any specified content of a packet in different protocol layers Click Apply to implement changes made Click Create to view the new CPU Access Profile List entry in the CPU Access Profile List window shown below To add another CPU Access Profile click Add CPU ACL Profile To delete a profile click the corresponding Delete button To view the specific configurations for an entry click the Show Details button To add a rule to the CPU Access Profile entry click the Add View Rules button 204 hr nin lanual er 2 Ethernet Managed Switch User M CPU Interface Filtering State Disabled Enabled add CPU ACL Profile Total Used Rule Entries Total Unused Rule Entries 2 13 Prafile ID Prefle Type ommertae A A Packet Content CPUACL Show Details Jlada uien Rules Delete F _CPUACL Show Details J Add View Rules EEE a IPF vE CPU ACL Add View Rules Figure 6 93 CPU Access Profile List window for Packet Content example To view the configurations for a previously configured entry click on the corresponding Show Details button which will display the following window PU ACL Profile Details Profile ID 1 Profile Type Packet Content Owner Type CPUACL Offset 0 15 0x00000000 Ox00000000 0x00000000 0x00000000 Offset 16 31 0x00000000 Ox00000000 0x00000000 Oxdo000000 Offset 32 47 000000000 0x000000
214. he packet GVRP The Group VLAN Registration Protocol GVRP enables the port to dynamically become a member of a VLAN GVRP is Disabled by default Ingress Checking This field can be toggled using the space bar between Enabled and Disabled Enabled enables the port to compare the VID tag of an incoming packet with the PVID number assigned to the port If the two are different the port filters drops the packet Disabled disables ingress fil tering Ingress Checking is Enabled by default Acceptable Frame This field denotes the type of frame that will be accepted by the port The user may choose Type between Tagged Only which means only VLAN tagged frames will be accepted and All which mean both tagged and untagged frames will be accepted All is enabled by default Click Apply to implement changes made 76 Asymmetric VLAN Settings Shared VLAN Learning is a primary example of the requirement for Asymmetric VLANs Under normal circumstances a pair of devices communicating in a VLAN environment will both send and receive using the same VLAN however there are some circumstances in which it is convenient to make use of two distinct VLANs one used for A to transmit to B and the other used for B to transmit to A in these cases Asymmetric VLANs are needed An example of when this type of configuration might be required would be if the client was on a distinct IP subnet or if there was some confidentiality related need to segregate tra
215. he top of the table which will then turn red and reveal parameters for configuration To create a new entry enter the correct information and click Create To return to the CPU Access Profile List window click lt lt Back The following parameters can be set for Packet Content Parameter Description Select Profile Enter an integer used to identify the access profile that will be configured with this command ID Packet Content Allows users to examine up to five specified offset packet content chunks within a packet at one time and specifies the frame content offset mask and layer There are five packet content chunk offsets that can be configured A packet content chunk mask presents four bytes Up to five packet content offset chunks can be selected Offset 0 15 mask Enter a value in hex form to mask the packet from byte O to byte 15 Offset 16 31 mask Enter a value in hex form to mask the packet from byte 16 to byte 31 Offset 32 47 mask Enter a value in hex form to mask the packet from byte 32 to byte 47 Offset 48 63 mask Enter a value in hex form to mask the packet from byte 48 to byte 63 Offset 64 79 mask Enter a value in hex form to mask the packet from byte 64 to byte 79 Note Only one packet content mask profile can be created With this advanced unique Packet Content Mask also known as Packet Content Access Control List ACL the D Link xStack switch family can effectively mitigate some network attacks like t
216. hich will be authenticated for the Switch Once a queried MAC address is matched in this table it will be placed in the VLAN associated with it here The switch administrator may enter up to 128 MAC addresses to be authenticated using the local method configured here To enable the MAC based Access Control Local MAC Settings on the switch click Security gt MAC based Access Control gt MAC based Access Control Local Settings 170 MAC Address WLANName MANDO Delete By MAC Delete By VLAN Find By MAC Find By WLAN View All Total Entries 0 MAC Address Figure 5 42 MAC based Access Control Local Settings window To add a MAC address to the local authentication list enter the MAC address and the target VLAN name into their appropriate fields and click Add To change a MAC address or a VLAN in the list click the corresponding Edit By Name or Edit By ID button To delete a MAC address entry enter its parameters into the appropriate fields and click Delete By MAC to delete a VLAN enter its parameters into the appropriate fields and click Delete By VLAN To search for a MAC or a VLAN enter the information in the appropriate fields and click Find By MAC or Find By VLAN Click on the View All button to display all current MAC based Access Control Local Settings entries listed by MAC Address VLAN Name and VLAN ID DoS Prevention Settings The Switch supports Denial of Service DoS prevention to mitigate DoD attacks from
217. his value can be set from 7 to 5 DSCP Selecting this option instructs the Switch to examine the DiffServ Code part of each packet header and use this as the criteria or part of the criterion for forwarding VLAN Selecting this option instructs the Switch to examine the VLAN part of each packet header and use this as the or part of the criterion for forwarding IP Address Select the option and enter the Source IP Address or the Destination IP Address This will be used as the criteria for forwarding decisions Tick GMP to instruct the Switch to examine the Internet Group Management Protocol IGMP field in each frame s header Tick GMP Type to further specify that the access profile will apply an IGMP type value Tick TCP to use the TCP port number contained in an incoming packet as the forwarding criterion Ticking TCP requires specifying a source port mask and or a destination port mask The user may also identify which flag bits to filter Flag bits are parts of a packet that determine what to do with the packet The user may filter packets by filtering certain flag bits within the packets by checking the boxes corresponding to the flag bits of the TCP field Tick UDP to use the UDP port number contained in an incoming packet as the forwarding criterion Ticking UDP requires specifying a source port mask and or a destination port Select CMP to instruct the Switch to examine the Internet Control Message Protocol ICMP field in each frame s
218. hmode and Algorithm Settings SSH Authentication Mode Settings Password Public Key Host Based Encryption Algorithm 3DES CBC AES128 CBC AES192 CBC AES256 CBC Cast128 CBC ARC4 Blow fish CBC Twofish128 Twofish192 Twofish256 Data Integrity Algorithm HMAC MD5 HMAC SHA1 Public Key Algorithm HMAC RSA HMAC DSA Figure 5 30 SSH Authmode and Algorithm Settings window 158 The following algorithms may be set Parameter Description SSH Authentication Mode Settings Password This parameter may be enabled if the administrator wishes to use a locally configured password for authentication on the Switch The default is enabled Public Key This parameter may be enabled if the administrator wishes to use a public key configuration set on a SSH server for authentication on the Switch The default is enabled Host based This parameter may be enabled if the administrator wishes to use a host computer for authentication This parameter is intended for Linux users requiring SSH authentication techniques and the host computer is running the Linux operating system with a SSH program previously installed The default is enabled Encryption Algorithm 3DES CBC Tick the check box to enable the Triple Data Encryption Standard encryption algorithm with Cipher Block Chaining The default is enabled Blow fish CBC Tick the check box to enable the Blowfish encryption algorithm with Cipher Block Chaining The default is enabled AES128 CB
219. hosen EAP method Bac Auth Success Counts the number of times that the state machine receives an Accept message from the Authentication Server i e aSuccess becomes TRUE causing a transition from RESPONSE to SUCCESS Indicates that the Supplicant has successfully authenticated to the Authentication Server Bac Auth Fail Counts the number of times that the state machine receives a Reject message from the Authentication Server i e aFail becomes TRUE causing a transition from RESPONSE to FAIL Indicates that the Supplicant has not authenticated to the Authentication Server 233 Browse ARP Table This window displays current ARP entries on the Switch To search a specific ARP entry enter an Interface Name or an IP Address at the top of the window and click Find Click the Show Static button to display static ARP table entries To clear the ARP Table click Clear All The view this window click Monitoring gt Browse ARP Table neriace Name Bem Paseress O Total Entries 4 Interface Mame IP Address MAC Address System 10 0 0 0 FF FF FF FF FF FF Local Broadcast System 10 24 2205 O0 50 8D 36 89 48 Dynamic System 10 90 90 90 O0 32 26 53 10 20 Local System 10 255 255 255 FF FF FF FF FF FF LocallBroadcast Figure 7 23 Browse ARP Table window Browse VLAN This window allows the VLAN status for each of the Switch s ports to be viewed by VLAN Enter a VID VLAN ID in the field at the top of the window and click the Find but
220. icated authenticated by AAA server lt serverlP gt Username by AAA server lt username gt Enable Admin failed through SSH due to AAA Enable Admin failed through SSH from lt userlP gt due to AAA server timeout or improper configuration Username lt username gt Warning server timeout or improper configuration AAA server response is AAA server lt serverlP gt Protocol lt protocolname gt Wann wrong response is wrong J A onenn SUpport iuis AAA doesn t support this functionality Informational functionality VAA serwer imedoii An i lt serverlP gt Protocol lt protocol gt connection Warning Port security has exceeded its maximum learning size Port security violation Port lt portNum gt MAC and will not learn any new lt macaddr gt addresses Port security Unauthentiucated IP Unathenticated IP MAC address and discarded by ip mac port binding IP lt ipaddr gt MAC lt macadar gt Port lt portNum gt Dynamic IMPB entry is Dynamic IMPB entry is conflicting with static ARP IP conflict with static ARP lt ipaddr gt MAC lt macaddr gt Port lt portNum gt Dynamic IMPB entry is Dynamic IMPB entry is conflicting with static FDB IP conflict with static FDB lt ipaddr gt MAC lt macaddr gt Port lt portNum gt Dynamic IMPB entry Dynamic IMPB entry is conflicting with static IMPB IP conflicts with static IMPB lt ipaddr gt MAC lt macaddr gt Port lt portNum gt IP M
221. ication Lists The following windows are used to configure parameters for users attempting to access the Switch through SSH To access the following window click Security gt SSH gt SSH User Authentication Lists Total Entries 1 Wiser Mame Auth Mode Host Mame Hast iP RG Password Hote Maximum 8 entries and Host Mame should be less than 32 characters Figure 5 31 SSH User Authentication Lists window In the example above the User Account RG has been previously set using the User Accounts window in the Configuration folder A User Account MUST be set in order to set the parameters for the SSH user To edit the parameters for a SSH user click on the corresponding Edit button which will reveal the following window to configure Total Entries 1 Wiser Mame Auth Mi ode Host Mame Host IF Ro Password Y Ooo o e Hote Maximum 8 entries and Host Hare should be less than 32 characters Figure 5 32 SSH User Authentication Lists Edit window The user may set the following parameters Parameter Description Enter a User Name of no more than 15 characters to identify the SSH user This User Name must be a previously configured user account on the Switch Auth Mode The administrator may choose one of the following to set the authorization for users attempting to access the Switch Host Based This parameter should be chosen if the administrator wishes to use a remote SSH server for authentication purposes
222. idate switch enabled for SIM The CS will then serve as the in band entry point for access to the MS The CS s IP address will become the path to all MS s of the group and the CS s Administrator s password and or authentication will control access to all MS s of the SIM group With SIM enabled the applications in the CS will redirect the packet instead of executing the packets The applications will decode the packet from the administrator modify some data and then send it to the MS After execution the CS may receive a response packet from the MS which it will encode and send it back to the administrator When a CaS becomes a MS it automatically becomes a member of the first SNMP community includes read write and read only to which the CS belongs However if a MS has its own IP address it can belong to SNMP communities to which other switches in the group including the CS do not belong The Upgrade to v1 6 To better improve SIM management the Switch has been upgraded to version 1 6 in this release Many improvements have been made including 1 The Commander Switch CS now has the capability to automatically rediscover member switches that have left the SIM group either through a reboot or web malfunction This feature is accomplished through the use of Discover packets and Maintain packets that previously set SIM members will emit after a reboot Once a MS has had its MAC address and password saved to the CS s database if a reboo
223. if System ipaddress XXX XXX XXX XXX yyy yyy yyy yyy Where the x s represent the IP address to be assigned to the IP interface named System and the y s represent the corresponding subnet mask Alternatively you can enter config ipif System ipaddress xxx xxx xxx xxx z Where the x s represent the IP address to be assigned to the IP interface named System and the z represents the corresponding number of subnets in CIDR notation The IP interface named System on the Switch can be assigned an IP address and subnet mask which can then be used to connect a management station to the Switch s Telnet or Web based management agent The system message Success indicates that the command was executed successfully The Switch can now be configured and managed via Telnet and the CLI or via the Web based management agent using the above IP address to connect to the Switch IPv6 Address Settings Users can display the Switch s current IPv6 interface settings To view the following window click Configuration gt IPv6 Interface Settings Interface Mame System VLAN Name Admin State IPv Address Automatic Link Local Address Disabled Y NS Retransmit Time 0 4294967295 mss IPve Type IPv6 Address Figure 2 5 IPv6 Interface Settings window To configure IPv6 interface settings enter an IPv6 Address and click Apply The new entry will appear in the table at the bottom of the window After making the desired changes click the Appl
224. ified port before a successful authentication is made This port is locked until the point when a Client with the correct username and password and MAC address if 802 1X is enabled by MAC address is granted access and therefore successfully unlocks the port Once the port is unlocked normal traffic is allowed to pass through the port The following figure displays a more detailed explanation of how the authentication process is completed between the three roles stated above 502 1X Authentication process Switch RADIUS Server Workstation Authentication Server Client Authenticator _ y e RADIUS Access Request RADIUS Access Challenge RADIUS Access Request RADIUS Access Accept Port Authorized RADIUS Account Stop RADIUS Ack Port Unauthorized OTP One Time Password Figure 5 16 The 802 1X Authentication Process The D Link implementation of 802 1X allows network administrators to choose between two types of Access Control used on the Switch which are 146 1 Port based Access Control This method requires only one user to be authenticated per port by a remote RADIUS server to allow the remaining users on the same port access to the network 2 Host based Access Control Using this method the Switch will automatically learn up to 448 MAC addresses by port and set them in a list Each MAC address must be authenticated by the Switch using a remote RADIUS server befo
225. iguration Username lt username gt Successful login through Telnet from lt userlP gt authenticated by AAA server lt serverlP gt Username Informational lt username gt Login failed through Telnet from lt userlP gt authenticated by Warnin AAA server lt serverlP gt Username lt username gt J Login failed through Telnet from lt userlP gt due to AAA server timeout or improper configuration Username lt username gt Successful login through SSH from lt userlP gt authenticated by AAA server lt serverlP gt Username Informational lt username gt Login failed through SSH from lt userlP gt authenticated by AAA server lt serverlP gt Username lt username gt Login failed through SSH from lt userlP gt due to AAA server timeout or improper Configuration Username lt username gt 257 Successful Enable Admin through Console authenticated by AAA local_enable method Enable Admin failed through Console authenticated by AAA local_enable method Successful Enable Admin through Web authenticated by AAA local_enable method Enable Admin failed through Web authenticated by AAA local_enable method Successful Enable Admin through Web SSL authenticated by AAA local_enable method Enable Admin failed through Web SSL authenticated by AAA local_enable method Successful Enable Admin local_enable method Successful Enable Admin through SSH authenticated by AAA local_ena
226. ill designate the port as untagged the box Specifies the port as 802 1Q untagged Checking the box will designate the port as untagged designate the port as untagged Forbidden Select this to specify the port as not being a member of the VLAN and that the port is forbidden from becoming a member of the VLAN dynamically Not Member Member Allows an individual port to be specified as a non VLAN member an individual port to be Allows an individual port to be specified as a non VLAN member as a non VLAN member Click to implement changes made To search for a VLAN click the Find VLAN tab at the top of the window see below enter a VLAN ID and click Find to display the settings for a previously configured VLAN VLAN List Add Edit VLAN Find VLAN VLAN Batch Settings Total Entries 1 vD Figure 3 9 802 1Q Static VLAN window Find VLAN tab To create a VLAN Batch entry click the VLAN Batch Settings tab at the top of the window which will display the following window 69 VLAN List Add Edit VLAN Find WLAN VLAN Batch Settings Total Entries 1 Advertisement Disabled PortList e g 1 5 Figure 3 10 802 1Q Static VLAN window VLAN Batch Settings tab The following fields can be set in the VLAN Batch Settings tab Parameter Description VID List e g 2 5 Enter a VLAN ID List that can be added deleted or configured Advertisement Enabling this function will allow the Switch to send out
227. ilter in hex form hex Ox0 Oxffff TCP Flag Bits Tick URG urgent ACK acknowledgement PSH push RST reset SYN synchronize FIN finish or Check All to filter certain flag bits within the packets Tick UDP to use the UDP port number contained in an incoming packet as the forwarding criterion Ticking UDP requires specifying a source port mask and or a destination port mask Source Port Mask Tick and specify a TCP port mask for the source port to filter in hex form hex Ox0 Oxffff Destination Port Mask Tick and specify a TCP port mask for the destination port to filter in hex form hex Ox0 Oxffff Protocol ID Tick Protocol ID Mask and enter a value defining the protocol ID in the packet header to mask Protocol ID Mask 0 FF Tick and enter a value defining the mask options behind the IP header Click Apply to implement changes made Click Create to view the new Access Profile List entry in the Access Profile List window shown below To add another Access Profile click Add ACL Profile To delete a profile click the corresponding Delete button to view the specific configurations for an entry click the Show Details button To add a rule to the Access Profile entry click the Add View Rules button To remove all listed profiles click on the Delete All button add ACL Profile Total Used Rule Entries Total Unused Rule Entries 0 512 TT Pranie Type oware YY E Ethernet Show Details Add
228. information is then routed to the Service Provider s main network and regarded there as one VLAN with one set of protocols and one routing behavior Regulations for Q in Q VLANs Some rules and regulations apply with the implementation of the Q in Q VLAN procedure 66 1 All ports must be configured for the SPVID and its corresponding TPID on the Service Provider s edge switch 2 All ports must be configured as Access Ports or Uplink ports Access ports can only be Ethernet ports while Uplink ports must be Gigabit ports 3 Provider Edge switches must allow frames of at least 1522 bytes or more due to the addition of the SPVID tag 4 Access Ports must be an un tagged port of the service provider VLANs Uplink Ports must be a tagged port of the service provider VLANs 5 The switch cannot have both Q in Q and normal VLANs co existing Once the change of VLAN is made all Access Control lists are cleared and must be reconfigured Before Q in Q VLANs are enabled users need to disable STP and GVRP manually All packets sent from the CPU to the Access ports must be untagged 802 1Q Static VLAN This window lists all previously configured VLANs by VLAN ID and VLAN Name To view this window click L2 Features gt 802 1Q Static VLAN WLAN List Addvedit VLAN Find VLAM VLAN Batch Settings Total Entries 1 IO YLAN Mame Advertisement Tagged Ports Untagaed Ports Forbidden Ports LAA 14 default Enabled 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
229. ing Settings This function allows the user to not only restrict all DHCP Server packets but also to receive any specified DHCP server packet by any specified DHCP client it is useful when one or more DHCP servers are present on the network and both provide DHCP services to different distinct groups of clients The DHCP Server Screening folder contains two windows DHCP Server Screening Port Settings and DHCP Offer Permit Entry Setting DHCP Server Screening Port Settings The Switch supports DHCP Server Screening a feature that denies access to rogue DHCP servers When the DHCP server screening function is enabled all DHCP server packets will be filtered from a specific port To view this window click Security gt DHCP Server Screening gt DHCP Server Screening Port Settings as shown below 172 xStack DES 3200 10 18 28 28F Layer 2 Ethernet Managed Switch User Manual DHCP Server Screening Trap State Enabled Disabled DHCP Server Screening Log State Enabled Disabled Illegal Server Log Suppress Duration O min 5 mins O 30 mins Apply From Port State 1 e Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled 1 2 3 A 5 6 T E g Figure 5 44 DHCP Screening Port Settings Use the radio buttons a
230. io applications which are sensitive to even slight delays or for data from specified end users whose data transmissions warrant special consideration The Switch allows you to further tailor how priority tagged data packets are handled on your network Using queues to manage priority tagged data allows you to specify its relative priority to suit the needs of your network There may be circumstances where it would be advantageous to group two or more differently tagged packets into the same queue Generally however it is recommended that the highest priority queue Queue 7 be reserved for data packets with a priority value of 7 Packets that have not been given any priority value are placed in Queue O and thus given the lowest priority for delivery Strict mode and weighted round robin system are employed on the Switch to determine the rate at which the queues are emptied of packets The ratio used for clearing the queues is 4 1 This means that the highest priority queue Queue 7 will clear 4 packets for every 1 packet cleared from Queue 0 Remember the priority queue settings on the Switch are for all ports and all devices connected to the Switch will be affected This priority queuing system will be especially beneficial if your network employs switches with the capability of assigning priority tags VLAN Description A Virtual Local Area Network VLAN is a network topology configured according to a logical scheme rather than the physical
231. irror a fast port onto a slower port For example if you try to mirror the traffic from a 100 Mbps port onto a 10 Mbps port this can cause throughput problems The port you are copying frames from should always support an equal or lower speed than the port to which you are sending the copies Also the target port for the mirroring cannot be a member of a trunk group Please note a target port and a source port cannot be the same port Loopback Detection Settings The Loopback Detection function is used to detect the loop created by a specific port Choose the loopback detection operation mode Two modes are supported port based and VLAN based In the port based mode the port will be shut down be disabled when a loop is detected in VLAN based mode the port cannot process packets on the VLAN on which the loop is detected The default mode is port based The Loopback Detection port or VLAN will restart be able to forwarding when the Loopback Detection Recover Time times out The Loopback Detection function can be implemented on a range of ports at a time The user may enable or disable this function using the pull down menu 94 To view this window click L2 Features gt Loopback Detection Settings Loopback Detection Global Settings State O Disabled Enabled Interval 1 32767 Mode PortBased Recover Time 0 or 60 1000000 Trap Status N one m l From Fort To Forn State of v Disabled Loopdetect Detection State Loop
232. isabled Port State Describes the current running state of the port whether Enabled or Disabled Connection Status This field will read the uplink status of the individual ports whether Enabled or Disabled Reason Describes the reason why the port has been error disabled such as a STP loopback occurrence Static ARP Settings The Address Resolution Protocol ARP is a TCP IP protocol that converts IP addresses into physical addresses This table allows network managers to view define modify and delete ARP information for specific devices Static entries can be defined in the ARP Table When static entries are defined a permanent entry is entered and is used to translate IP address to MAC addresses To view this window click Configuration gt Static ARP Settings Global Settings ARP Aging Time 0 65535 rnin Add Static ARP Entry Total Entries 3 Interface IP Address MAC Address System 10 0 0 0 FF FF FF FF FF FF LocalBroadcast System 10 90 90 90 00 32 28 53 10 20 Local System 10 255 255 255 FF FF FF FF FF FF LocaliBroadcast Figure 2 11 Static ARP Settings window The following fields can be set Parameter Description ARP Aging Time The user may globally set the maximum amount of time in seconds that an Address 0 65535 Resolution Protocol ARP entry can remain in the Switch s ARP table without being accessed before it is dropped from the table The value may be set in the range of O to 65535 seconds wi
233. isabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled EAPOL LAC Figure 3 55 LLDP Dot1 TLVs Settings window The following parameters can be set Parameter Description ike Port To Use the pull down menu to select a range of ports to be configured ort PVID Use the drop down menu to enable or disable the advertise PVID Protocol VLAN ID Use the drop down menu to enable or disable the advertise Protocol VLAN ID VLAN Name Use the drop down menu to enable or disable the advertise VLAN Name Protocol Identity Use the drop down menu to enable or disable the advertise Protocol Identity Click Apply to implement changes made 110 LLDP Dot3 TLVs Settings This window is used to configure an individual port or group of ports to exclude one or more IEEE 802 3 organizational specific TLV data type from outbound LLDP advertisements To view this window click L2 Features gt LLDP gt LLDP Dot3 TLVs Settings From Port of v To Fort 0 v MAGFHY Configuration Status Disabled w Link Aggregation Disabled we Apply Maximum Frame Size Disabled MACIPHY Configuration Status Link Aggregation Maximum Frame Size Disabled E
234. isabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Figure 3 54 LLDP Basic TLVs Settings window Use the drop down menus to enable or disable the settings for the Basic TLVs Settings Click Apply to implement changes made The following parameters can be set Parameter Description Heat Port To Use the pull down menu to select a range of ports to be configured ort Port Description Use the drop down menu to enable or disable port description System Name Use the drop down menu to enable or disable system name Use the drop down menu to enable or disable system description Use th
235. it does not the packet is dropped If it has the same VID the packet is forwarded and the destination port transmits it on its attached network segment This process is referred to as ingress filtering and is used to conserve bandwidth within the Switch by dropping packets that are not on the same VLAN as the ingress port at the point of reception This eliminates the subsequent processing of packets that will just be dropped by the destination port Default VLANs The Switch initially configures one VLAN VID 1 called default The factory default setting assigns all ports on the Switch to the default As new VLANs are configured in Port based mode their respective member ports are removed from the default 64 Packets cannot cross VLANs If a member of one VLAN wants to connect to another VLAN the link must be through an external router destination port Packets with unknown source addresses will be flooded to all ports ip NOTE If no VLANs are configured on the Switch then all packets will be forwarded to any L Broadcast and multicast packets will also be flooded to all ports An example is presented below Table 3 1 VLAN Example Assigned Ports Port based VLANs Port based VLANs limit traffic that flows into and out of switch ports Thus all devices connected to a port are members of the VLAN s the port belongs to whether there is a single computer directly connected to a switch or an entire department O
236. itch Click Apply to implement changes made 98 PPPOE Circuit ID Insertion Settings When the setting is enabled the system will insert the circuit ID tag to the received PPPoE discover and request packet if the tag is absent and remove the circuit ID tag from the received PPPoE offer and session confirmation packet The insert circuit ID will contain the following information Client MAC address Device ID and Port number Additionally the option of user defined strings can be inserted into the circuit ID By default Switch IP address is used as the device ID to encode the circuit ID option To view this window click Configuration gt PPPoE Circuit ID Insertion Settings as shown below PPPoE Circuit ID Insertion State O Enabled Disabled From Port To Port State Circuit ID 01 Enabled SwitchIP Apply v o State Circuit ID Enabled Switch IP Enabled Switch IP Enabled Switch IP Enabled Switch IP Enabled Switch IP Enabled Switch IP Enabled Switch IP Enabled Switch IP Enabled Switch IP Enabled Switch IP Enabled Switch IP Enabled Switch IP Enabled Switch IP Enabled Switch IP Enabled Switch IP Enabled Switch IP Enabled Switch IP Enabled Switch IP Enabled Switch IP Enabled Switch IP Enabled Switch IP OO iN WD on amp wih ah O h _ eos MN Figure 2 62 PPPoE
237. itoh lear Manial xStack DES 3200 10 18 28 28F Layer 2 Ethernet Managed Switch User Manual J A t A oD Errors The Web Manager allows port error statistics compiled by the Switch s management agent to be viewed as either a line graph or a table Four windows are offered Received RX To select a port to view these statistics for select the port by using the Port pull down menu The user may also use the real time graphic of the Switch at the top of the Web page by simply clicking on a port To view the following graph of error packets received on the Switch click Monitoring gt Errors gt Received RX View Table Apply 1000 ano A BOO Undersize Fou OverSize Bue Fragment 500 400 200 Drop 200 100 Unit Packets Time Interval 11 S Record Number 200 ShowHide MW CRCEror i UnderSize OverSize W Fragment i Jabber W Drop Figure 7 13 Received Rx window for errors To view the Received Rx Table window for errors click the link View Table which will show the following table Ex Error EX Frame CRCError Undersize Oversize Fragment Figure 7 14 Received Rx Table window for errors 219 The following fields can be set Parameter Description Use the drop down menu to choose the port that will display statistics Time Interval Select the desired setting between 7s and 60s where s stands for seconds The default value is one second Record Number Selec
238. itor network performance especially during peak demand as bottlenecks can quickly develop if the QoS settings are not suitable To view this window click QoS gt QoS Scheduling Settings 005 Scheduling Mechanism Settings Scheduling Mechanism Strict OoS Scheduling Weight Settings Mechanism Weight 1 55 Class 0 strict Class 1 strict Class 2 strict Class 3 Strict Apply Figure 4 7 QoS Scheduling Settings window The Scheduling Mechanism has the following parameters Parameter Description Scheduling Toggle between Strict and Weight Fair Strict is the highest class of service and the first to Mechanism process traffic That is the highest class of service will finish before other queues empty Weight Fair uses the weighted round robin algorithm to handle packets in an even distribution in priority classes of service Weight 1 55 Enter a Weight value between 7 and 55 Click Apply to set the changes 132 xStack DES 3200 10 18 28 28F Layer 2 Ethernet Managed Switch User Manual Priority Mapping This window is used to set up Priority Mapping To view this window click QoS gt Priority Mapping Priority Ethernet Priority IF Priority 202 1p 202 1p 202 1p 202 1p 202 1p 202 1p Figure 4 8 Priority Mapping window The following parameter may be set Parameter Description Click Apply to set the changes 133 TOS Mapping This window is used to set up Type of
239. k Apply to implement changes made Click Create to view the new CPU Access Profile List entry in the CPU Access Profile List window shown below To add another Access Profile click Add CPU ACL Profile To delete a profile click the corresponding Delete button To view the specific configurations for an entry click the Show Details button To add a rule to the CPU Access Profile entry click the Add View Rules button 201 AAA AGA SES AS gt OJO L Iian Y DA S 3200 10 18 28 28F IV aed Switch User Man UV ULUU 1U 1 O ZO GU OWILU POC IVICA IVIALIAaAY i Uo IV ITEL on ok TNOrnNn GAOT ELICITICL a r dl II lUc OF J AVWAar r O ZO Edy Z J yCtank 1 AUDIdadUNn DI CPU Interface Filtering State Disabled Enabled Add CPU ACL Profile Total Used Rule Entries Total Unused Rule Entries 2 13 Ethemel CPUACL P CPUACL rv crac Figure 6 87 CPU Access Profile List window for IPv6 example To view the configurations for a previously configured entry click on the corresponding Show Details button which will display the following window PU ACL Profile Details Profile ID 3 Profile Type IPYE Owner Type CPU ACL IPv6 Flow Label Yes Show All Profiles Figure 6 88 CPU Access Profile Detail Information window for IPv6 example To return to the CPU Access Profile List window click Show All Profiles To add a rule to a previously configured entry click on the corresponding Add View Rules butt
240. k topology The table below compares how the three protocols differ regarding the port state transition All three protocols calculate a stable topology in the same way Every segment will have a single path to the root bridge All bridges listen for BPDU packets However BPDU packets are sent more frequently with every Hello packet BPDU packets are sent even if a BPDU packet was not received Therefore each link between bridges is sensitive to the status of the link Ultimately this difference results in faster detection of failed links and thus faster topology adjustment A drawback of STP is this absence of immediate feedback from adjacent bridges y Discarding Discarding Blocking No Table 3 1 Comparing Port States Learning No No No N N Yes Yes RSTP is capable of a more rapid transition to a forwarding state it no longer relies on timer configurations RSTP compliant bridges are sensitive to feedback from other RSTP compliant bridge links Ports do not need to wait for the topology to stabilize before transitioning to a forwarding state In order to allow this rapid transition the protocol introduces two new variables the edge port and the point to point P2P port Edge Port The edge port is a configurable designation used for a port that is directly connected to a segment where a loop cannot be created An example would be a port connected directly to a single workstation Ports that are designated as edge ports tra
241. ket to the switch port that connects to the DHCP client that sent the DHCP request Disabled If the field is toggled to Disabled the relay agent will not insert and remove DHCP relay information option 82 field in messages between DHCP servers and clients and the 26 isd check and policy settings will have no effect DHCP Relay Agent This field can be toggled between Enabled and Disabled using the pull down menu It is Information Option 82 used to enable or disable the Switches ability to check the validity of the packet s option 82 Check field Enabled When the field is toggled to Enable the relay agent will check the validity of the packet s option 82 field If the switch receives a packet that contains the option 82 field from a DHCP client the switch drops the packet because it is invalid In packets received from DHCP servers the relay agent will drop invalid messages Disabled When the field is toggled to Disabled the relay agent will not check the validity of the packet s option 82 field DHCP Relay Agent This field can be toggled between Replace Drop and Keep by using the pull down menu Information Option 82 It is used to set the Switches policy for handling packets when the DHCP Agent Information Policy Option 82 Check is set to Disabled The default is Replace Replace The option 82 field will be replaced if the option 82 field already exists in the packet received from the DHCP client Drop The packe
242. king for a match and therefore authentication to be accepted to negotiate encryptions on the following level Encryption The second part of the ciphersuite that includes the encryption used for encrypting the messages sent between client and host The Switch supports two types of cryptology algorithms e Stream Ciphers There are two types of stream ciphers on the Switch RC4 with 40 bit keys and RC4 with 128 bit keys These keys are used to encrypt messages and need to be consistent between client and host for optimal use e CBC Block Ciphers CBC refers to Cipher Block Chaining which means that a portion of the previously encrypted block of encrypted text is used in the encryption of the current block The Switch supports the 3DES EDE encryption code defined by the Data Encryption Standard DES to create the encrypted text Hash Algorithm This part of the ciphersuite allows the user to choose a message digest function which will determine a Message Authentication Code This Message Authentication Code will be encrypted with a sent message to provide integrity and prevent against replay attacks The Switch supports two hash algorithms MD5 Message Digest 5 and SHA Secure Hash Algorithm These three parameters are uniquely assembled in four choices on the Switch to create a three layered encryption code for secure communication between the server and the host The user may implement any one or combination of the ciphersuites available
243. l attack the Switch by utilizing packet flooding ARP storm or other methods These attacks may affect normal traffic flow To alleviate this problem the Safeguard Engine function was added to the Switch s software The Safeguard Engine can help the overall operability of the Switch by minimizing the workload of the Switch during an attack therefore making it capable of forwarding essential packets over the network with limited bandwidth To achieve this the Safeguard Engine uses threshold values to place the Switch in Exhausted or Normal mode The Switch will be placed in Exhausted mode when the CPU utilization exceeds the Rising Threshold In Exhausted mode the Switch will limit the bandwidth for ARP packets therefore allowing more bandwidth for essential packets 136 60 Time i rei Checking intervals occur every 5 seconds 0 10 20 30 40 50 Stop Rate interval e Seconds gt 10 Seconds 20 sims o y _lf the second checking If the third checking If the fourth interval If the Switch detects interval reveals there are interval reveals there are reveals the packet flooding too many packets it still too many ingress still too many ingress has subsided the Switch will drop all ingress packets the Switch will packets the Switch will will return to accepting ARP and IP stop all ARP and IP stop all ARP and IP ARP and IP broadcast broadcast packets broadcast packets for 10 broadcast packets for 20 packets
244. l automatically refresh with new updated statistics Change the view parameters as follows Parameter Description Time Interval Select the desired setting between 7s and 60s where s stands for seconds The default value is one second Record Number Select number of times the Switch will be polled between 20 and 200 The default value is 200 Show Hide Check whether or not to display Five Secs One Min and Five Mins 210 Port Utilization This window displays the percentage of the total available bandwidth being used on the port To view this window click Monitoring gt Port Utilization Apply Utilization Inite Time Interval E Record Number Show Hide M Utilization Figure 7 3 Port Utilization window To select a port to view these statistics for select the port by using the Port pull down menu The user may also use the real time graphic of the Switch at the top of the Web page by simply clicking on a port Change the view parameters as follows Parameter Description Pot Use the drop down menu to choose the port that will display statistics Select the desired setting between 7s and 60s where s stands for seconds The default value is one second Select number of times the Switch will be polled between 20 and 200 The default value is 200 Check whether or not to display Utilization 211 ay 5 A OOC A ff Ta e rf a fais Soa fl QO ik L C i xStack DES 320
245. led ggg Enabled fl copper gj a Speed Duplex Flow Control Connection Address Learning Auto Disabled TOOMHaltione Enabled Auto O O Disabled Link Down Auto Disabled Link Down Auto Enabled Disabled Link Down Enabled oo Disabled Link Down Enabled co Disabled Link Down Enabled Disabled Link Down Enabled Disabled Link Down Enabled Enabled Disabled Link Down Disabled Link Down Disabled Link Down Disabled Link Down Disabled Link Down Disabled Link Down Disabled els Down Enabled Disabled Enabled Enabled Disabled Link Down Enabled Auto Enabled Disabled Link Down Enabled Auto Enabled Disabled Link Down Enabled Auto Enabled Disabled Link Down enabled Auto Enabled Disabled CHE Down Enabled Enabled Enabled Auto z Teekle el 1 i i r ton Tone ks Le rl Figure 2 8 Port Settings window To configure switch ports choose the port or sequential range of ports using the From Port and To Port pull down menus Use the remaining pull down menus to configure the parameters described below 19 Parameter From Port To Port Speed Duplex Flow Control Address Learning Medium Type MDIX Description Use the pull down menus to select the port or range of ports to be configured Toggle this field to either enable or disable a given port or group of ports Toggle the Speed Duplex field to either select the speed and duplex half duplex state of the po
246. llowing window for the user to configure VLAN Mame default Static Router Port gi O 03 04 05 06 OF oO8 09 10 E E EE EENE N E EE E Forbidden Router Port 05 06 oF 08 09 10 C amp amp Dynamic Router Port Figure 3 28 IGMP Snooping Router Ports Settings window 85 xStack DES 3200 10 18 28 28F Layer 2 Ethernet Managed Switch User Manual Select the desired member ports and click Apply Click lt lt Back to go back to the IGMP Snooping Settings window IGMP Access Control Settings This window is used to configure IGMP Access Control settings on the Switch To view this window click L2 Features gt IGMP Snooping gt IGMP Access Control Settings From Port State 01 Enable 4 State Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Figure 3 29 IGMP Access Control Settings window Parameter Description From Port To Port Select a range of ports Enable or disable the IGMP Access Control When Enable is selected and the Switch receives an IGMP Join request the Switch will send the access request to the RADIUS server to do the authentication Click Apply to implement changes made 86 IGMP Snooping Multicast VLAN Settings This window is used to configure the IGM
247. ln Seconds 30 9499989 Apply Set Current Time Date DOMME CO Time HH MM S5 Apply Figure 2 26 Time Settings window The following parameters can be set or are displayed Parameter Description SNTP State Use the radio button to select an Enabled or Disabled SNTP state Current Time Displays the Current Time set on the Switch Time Source Displays the time source for the system SNTP Settings SNTP First Server This is the IP address of the primary server the SNTP information will be taken from SNTP Second Server This is the IP address of the secondary server the SNTP information will be taken from SNTP Poll Interval in This is the interval in seconds between requests for updated SNTP information Seconds 30 99999 Set Current Time Date DD MM YYYY Enter the current date in day month and year to update the system clock Time HH MM SS Enter the current time in hours minutes and seconds Click Apply to implement changes made 34 Time Zone Settings The following window is used to configure time zones and Daylight Savings Time settings for SNTP To configure the time zone settings for the Switch click Configuration gt SNTP Settings gt Time Zone Settings Daylight Saving Time State Disabled Daylight Saving Time Offsetin Minutes BO Time Zone Offsetfrom GMT In 2HH MM moe DST Repeating Settings From Which Week Of The Month From Day Of Week From Month From Time In HH Mil
248. lnet authenticated by AAA local method Successful login through SSH authenticated by AAA local method Login failed through SSH authenticated by AAA local method Successful login through Console authenticated by AAA none method Successful login through Web authenticated by AAA none method Successful login through Web SSL authenticated by AAA none method Successful login through Telnet authenticated by AAA none method Successful login through SSH authenticated by AAA none method Successful login through Console authenticated by AAA Informational local method Username lt username gt Login failed through Console authenticated by AAA local method Username lt username gt Successful login through Web from lt userlP gt authenticated by AAA local method Username lt username gt Login failed failed through Web from lt userlP gt authenticated by AAA local method Username lt username gt Successful login through Web SSL from lt userlP gt authenticated by AAA local method Username lt username gt Login failed through Web SSL from lt userlP gt authenticated by AAA local method Username lt username gt Successful login through Telnet from lt userlP gt authenticated by AAA local method Username lt username gt Login failed through Telnet from lt userlP gt authenticated by AAA local method Username lt username gt Successful login through SSH from lt userlP gt
249. lowing fields can be set Parameter Description From Port To Port Forward Portlist Check the corresponding boxes for the port s to transmit packets Check the boxes to select which of the ports on the Switch will be able to forward packets These ports will be allowed to receive packets from the port specified above Clicking the Apply button will enter the combination of transmitting port and allowed receiving ports into the Switch s Current Traffic Segmentation Table 81 xStack DES 3200 10 18 28 28F Layer 2 Ethernet Managed Switch User Manual Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling Settings To view this window click L2 Features gt L2PT Settings Layer 2 Protocal Tunneling Global State 2 Disabled O Enabled Tunnel STP Port s STP Tunnel Multicast Address 01 05 5D 00 00 00 04 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 310 1 15 16 17 18 19 20 24 22 23 E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E Tunnel GVRP Port s GVRP Tunnel Multicast Address 01 05 5D 00 00 21 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 EE E E E E E E E E E ES 01 02 03 04 05 06 OF 08 09 E E E III Figure 3 24 Layer 2 Tunneling Settings window The fields that can be configured are described below Parameter Description Layer 2 Protocol To enable or disable the Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling state Tunneling Global State Port s The user can select the port numbers that will be included in the Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling configuration Click Apply to implem
250. lt portNum gt Warning Errored Frame Event Errored frame event received Port lt portNum gt Warning da Bien Errored frame period event received Port lt portNum gt Warning Errored Frame Seconds Errored frame seconds summary event received Port Summary Event lt portNum gt Remote loopback start OAM Remote loopback started Port lt portNum gt Warning Remote loopback stop OAM Remote loopback terminated Port lt portNum gt Warning Signal fail detected Informational Signal fail cleared Informational RPL owner conflict RPL owner conflicted on the ring MAC lt macaddr gt Warning Port lt portNum gt enter BPDU under protection state mode drop block shutdown Warning ERPS BPDU BPDU attack happened Informational y e O P 9 Q O p O D 262 BPDU attack automatically Port lt portNum gt recover from BPDU under protection state Informational recover automatically BPDU attack manually Port lt portNum gt recover from BPDU under protection state Informational recover manually CFM cross connect VLAN lt vlanid gt Local MD Cross connect is detected neve mole ve a1 OV PO Critical Direction lt mepdirection gt Remote MEPID lt mepid gt MAC lt macaddr gt CFM remote setting error MD Level lt mdlevel gt Error CFM CCM packet is VLAN lt vlanid gt Local Port lt portNum gt Warnin detected Direction lt mepdirection gt Remote MEPID lt mepid gt J MAC lt macaddr gt Can not recei
251. ltiple Spanning Tree Protocol MSTP as defined by the IEEE 802 1Q 2005 the Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP as defined by the IEEE 802 1D 2004 specification and a version compatible with the IEEE 802 1D 1998 STP RSTP can operate with legacy equipment implementing IEEE 802 1D 1998 however the advantages of using RSTP will be lost The Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP evolved from the STP standard RSTP was developed in order to overcome some limitations of STP that impede the function of some recent switching innovations in particular certain Layer 3 functions that are increasingly handled by Ethernet switches The basic function and much of the terminology is the same as STP Most of the settings configured for STP are also used for RSTP This section introduces some new Spanning Tree concepts and illustrates the main differences between the two protocols 96 Port Transition States An essential difference between the three protocols is in the way ports transition to a forwarding state and in the way this transition relates to the role of the port forwarding or not forwarding in the topology MSTP and RSTP combine the transition states disabled blocking and listening used in STP and creates a single state Discarding In either case ports do not forward packets In the STP port transition states disabled blocking or listening or in the RSTP MSTP port state discarding there is no functional difference the port is not active in the networ
252. m and write to the contents of the MIBs on the Switch To implement the new settings click Apply To delete an entry from the SNMP Community Table click the corresponding Delete button 43 SNMP Host Table Use the SNMP Host Table window to set up SNMP trap recipients To configure SNMP Host Table entries click Configuration gt SNMP Settings gt SNMP Host Table Add Host Table HostiP Address Liserbased Security Model Security Level Total Entries 0 HostiP Address Liserbased Security Model Security Level Community MName SHMhmPY3 User Mame Figure 2 36 SNMP Host Table window The following parameters can set Parameter Description Host IP Address Type the IP address of the remote management station that will serve as the SNMP host for the Switch User based Security SNMPv1 Specifies that SNMP version 1 will be used Model SNMPV2c Specifies that SNMP version 2 will be used SNMPVS3 To specify that the SNMP version 3 will be used Security Level NoAuthNoPriv To specify a NoAuthNoPriv security level AuthNoPriv To specify an AuthNoPriv security level AuthPriv To specify an AuthPriv security level Community String Type in the community string or SNMPv3 user name as appropriate SNMPv3 User Name To implement your new settings click Apply SNMP Engine ID The Engine ID is a unique identifier used for SNMP V3 implementations This is an alphanumeric string used to identify the SNMP en
253. me Figure 3 33 IP Multicast Profile Settings Edit window To configure the Group List Settings click the hyperlinked Group List The following window will appear 88 xStack DES 3200 10 18 28 28F Layer 2 Ethernet Managed Switch User Manual Profile ID dd Profile Marne Multicast Address List e g 235 2 2 1 23522 Multicast Address Group List 0 HO Multicast Address List Show IP Multicast Profile Entries Figure 3 34 Multicast Address Group List Settings window Enter the Multicast Address List starting with the lowest in the range and click Add To return to the IP Multicast Profile Settings window click the lt lt Back button 89 xStack DES 3200 10 18 28 28F Layer 2 Ethernet Managed Switch User Manual Limited Multicast Range Settings This window enables the user to configure the ports on the Switch that will be involved in the Limited IP Multicast Range The user can configure the range of ports and associate an IP Multicast Profile to allow or disallow IGMP join requests to multicast groups defined in the profile To configure these settings click L2 Features gt IGMP Snooping gt Limited Multicast Range Settings ACCESS Permit From Fort Profile ID Access Access State js Oooo ote OO d Tc CA ee permit emit O permit peri O permit permit O pernit O remit permit AA SA permit AA EA E ic OE permit D e 2 A A permit A
254. mine the DiffServ Code part of each packet header and use this as the or part of the criterion for forwarding IPv4 Address Tick either Source IP Mask and enter the IPv4 source address mask or Destination IP Mask and enter the IPV4 destination address mask ICMP Tick ICMP to specify that the Switch will examine the Internet Control Message Protocol ICMP field within each packet Tick ICMP Type to specify that the access profile will apply to this ICMP type value Tick ICMP Code to specify that the access profile will apply to this ICMP code value Tick IGMP to instruct the Switch to examine the Internet Group Management Protocol IGMP field in each frame s header Tick IGMP Type to further specify that the access profile will apply an IGMP type value determine what to do with the packet The user may filter packets by filtering certain flag bits within the packets by checking the boxes corresponding to the flag bits of the TCP field Source Port Mask O FFFF Tick and specify a TCP port mask for the source port to filter in hex form hex Ox0 Oxffff TCP Tick TCP to use the TCP port number contained in an incoming packet as the forwarding criterion Ticking TCP requires specifying a source port mask and or a destination port mask The user may also identify which flag bits to filter Flag bits are parts of a packet that 181 Destination Port Mask 0 FFFF Tick and specify a TCP port mask for the destination port to f
255. minimum time in seconds that the Switch will wait before forwarding a BOOTREQUEST packet If the value in the seconds field of the packet is less than the relay time threshold the packet will be dropped The range is between 0 and 65 535 seconds with a default value of O seconds DHCP Relay Global Settings To enable and configure DHCP Relay Global Settings on the Switch click Configuration gt DHCP Relay gt DHCP Relay Global Settings DHCP Relay State DHCP Relay Hops Count Limit 1 16 Disabled DHCP Relay Time Threshold 0 655359 DHCP Relay Agent Information Option 82 State Disabled DHCP Relay Agent Information Option 62 Check Disabled DHCP Relay Agent Information Option 62 Policy Replace DHCP Relay Agent Information Option 82 Remote ID Default Figure 2 15 DHCP Relay Global Settings window The following fields can be set Parameter DHCP Relay State DHCP Relay Hops Count Limit 1 16 DHCP Relay Time Threshold 0 65535 DHCP Relay Agent Information Option 82 State Description This field can be toggled between Enabled and Disabled using the pull down menu It is used to enable or disable the DHCP Relay service on the Switch The default is Disabled This field allows an entry between 7 and 76 to define the maximum number of router hops DHCP messages can be forwarded across The default hop count is 4 Allows an entry between 0 and 65535 seconds and defines the maximum tim
256. moved but can be modified To modify a particular group click on its corresponding Edit button or click the Edit Server Group tab at the top of this window the following tab will be displayed 163 Sever Group List Ect Sever Group Group Name Max 15 characters Server Host IP Address A Protocol TACACS w Host List IP Address Protocol Figure 5 36 Authentication Server Group window Edit Server Group tab To add an Authentication Server Host to the list enter its IP address in the IP Address field choose the protocol associated with the IP address of the Authentication Server Host and click Add to add this Authentication Server Host to the group NOTE The user must configure Authentication Server Hosts using the Authentication Server Hosts window before adding hosts to the list Authentication Server Hosts must be configured for their specific protocol on a remote centralized server before this function can work properly NOTE The four built in server groups can only have server hosts running the same TACACS daemon TACACS XTACACS TACACS protocols are separate entities and are not compatible with each other Authentication Server This window will set user defined Authentication Server Hosts for the TACACS XTACACS TACACS RADIUS security protocols on the Switch When a user attempts to access the Switch with Authentication Policy enabled the Switch will send authentication packets to a remote TACACS XTAC
257. n menu The user may also use the real time graphic of the Switch at the top of the Web page by simply clicking on a port To view the following graph of error packets received on the Switch click the Monitoring gt Errors gt Transmitted TX View Table aay 1000 ExDeter 900 800 CRCEtrror rod LateCall 600 Extaoll 300 SingCall collision wo 400 300 200 100 UnitiPacketsi Time Interval E Record Number 200 Apply ShowHide M ExDefer W CRCEror i Latecoll M ExCall M SingColl M Collision Figure 7 15 Transmitted Tx window for errors To view the Transmitted Tx Table window click the link View Table which will show the following table ExDeter CRC Error LateColl ExColl SingColl Collision Figure 7 16 Transmitted Tx Table window for errors 221 The following fields may be set or viewed Parameter Description Use the drop down menu to choose the port that will display statistics Time Interval Select the desired setting between 7s and 60s where s stands for seconds The default value is one second Record Number Select number of times the Switch will be polled between 20 and 200 The default value is 200 Counts the number of packets for which the first transmission attempt on a particular interface was delayed because the medium was busy CRC Error Counts otherwise valid packets that did not end on a byte octet bounda
258. n port based VLANs NICs do not need to be able to identify 802 10 tags in packet headers NICs send and receive normal Ethernet packets lf the packet s destination lies on the same segment communications take place using normal Ethernet protocols Even though this is always the case when the destination for a packet lies on another switch port VLAN considerations come into play to decide if the packet gets dropped by the Switch or delivered VLAN Segmentation Take for example a packet that is transmitted by a machine on Port 1 that is a member of VLAN 2 If the destination lies on another port found through a normal forwarding table lookup the Switch then looks to see if the other port Port 10 is a member of VLAN 2 and can therefore receive VLAN 2 packets If Port 10 is not a member of VLAN 2 then the packet will be dropped by the Switch and will not reach its destination If Port 10 is a member of VLAN 2 the packet will go through This selective forwarding feature based on VLAN criteria is how VLANs segment networks The key point being that Port 1 will only transmit on VLAN 2 Network resources can be shared across VLANs This is achieved by setting up overlapping VLANs That is ports can belong to more than one VLAN group For example by setting VLAN 1 members to ports 1 2 3 and 4 and VLAN 2 members to ports 1 5 6 and 7 Port 1 will belong to two VLAN groups Ports 8 9 and 10 are not configured to any VLAN group This means ports 8
259. n seconds The MAC Address Aging Time can be set to any value between 70 and 1 000 000 seconds The default setting is 300 seconds 30 To access this window click Configuration gt MAC Address Aging Time MAC Address Aging Time 10 1000000 Apply Figure 2 20 MAC Address Aging Time window Web Settings Web based management is Enabled by default If you choose to disable this by selecting Disabled you will lose the ability to configure the system through the Web interface as soon as these settings are applied The TCP ports are numbered between 7 and 65535 The well known TCP port for the Web protocol is 80 To access this window click Configuration gt Web Settings WEB State O Disabled 6 Enabled Port Figure 2 21 Web Settings window Telnet Settings Telnet configuration is Enabled by default If you do not want to allow configuration of the system through Telnet choose Disabled The TCP ports are numbered between 7 and 65535 The well known TCP port for the Telnet protocol is 23 To access this window click Configuration gt Telnet Settings Telnet State O Disabled Enabled Port 1 65535 Apply Figure 2 22 Telnet Settings window Password Encryption Password Encryption can be Enabled or Disabled in this window It is Disabled by default Password encryption allows the user to encrypt a password for additional security Select Enabled to change the password into encrypted form When
260. n which multicast addresses have listeners on an attached link In a General Query both the Multicast Address field and the Number of Sources field are set to zero e The router sends a Multicast Address Specific Query message to learn if a particular multicast address has any listeners on an attached link In a Multicast Address Specific Query the Multicast Address field contains the multicast address that the router is interested in while the Number of Sources field is set to zero e The router sends a Multicast Address and Source Specific Query to learn if any of the sources from the specified list for the particular multicast address has any listeners on an attached link or not Ina Multicast Address and Source Specific Query the Multicast Address field contains the multicast address that the router is interested in while the Source Address field s contain s the source address es that the router is interested in 2 Multicast Listener Report Version 2 Comparable to the Host Membership Report in IGMPv3 and labeled as 143 in the ICMP packet header this message is sent by the listening port to the Switch stating that it is interested in receiving multicast data from a multicast address in response to the Multicast Listener Query message This window is used to enable MLD Snooping on the Switch and to configure the settings for MLD snooping To enable the MLD Snooping State click the Enable radio button under MLD Snooping Global Settings
261. nable this option and manually enter the replacement value used to re write the 802 1p user priority value entered in the Priority field which meets the criteria specified previously in this command before forwarding it on to the specified CoS queue Otherwise a packet will have its incoming 802 1p user priority re written to its original value before being forwarded by the Switch Select this option to instruct the Switch to replace the DSCP value in a packet that meets the selected criteria with the value entered in the adjacent field Tick the check box and enter the name of the Time Range settings that has been previously configured in the Time Range Settings window This will set specific times when this access rule will be implemented on the Switch Counter Specifies whether counter feature will be enabled or disabled This is optional the default is disabled Ports sd Enter a range of ports to be configured Click Apply to display the following Access Rule List window Profile Type Action Ethernet Permit Show Details Delete Rules Figure 6 52 Access Rule List window for Ethernet example To view the configurations for previously configured rules click on the corresponding Show Details button which will display the following Access Rule Detail Information window ACL Rule Details Profile 10 Access ID Profile Type Action Ports 802 1P 1 1 Ethernet Permit q 5 Show All Rules Figure 6 53
262. nabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Figure 3 56 LLDP Dot3 TLVs Settings window The following parameters can be set Parameter Description From Port To Port Use the drop down menu to select a range of ports to be configured MAC PHY This TLV optional data type indicates that the LLDP agent should transmit MAC PHY Configuration configuration status TLV This indicates it is possible for two ends of an IEEE 802 3 link to be Status configured with different duplex and or speed settings and still establish some limited network connectivity More precisely the information includes whether the port supports the auto negotiation function whether the function is enabled
263. nderstanding of the Guest VLAN process Limitations Using the Guest VLAN e lS A 152 ENABLE GUEST VLAN y Authentication 2802 1x Authentication a Process WLAN Identification Process by Authenticator Authentication Denied Es A A Identified VLAN Unidentified VLAN ClientPlacedin ClientPlacedin j Client Returned to VLAN Specified by Guest VLAN li z A 4 Authenticator i Originating VLAN ss ae i e _ a a e Figure 5 22 Guest VLAN Authentication Process Ports supporting Guest VLANs cannot be GVRP enabled and vice versa A port cannot be a member of a Guest VLAN and a static VLAN simultaneously Once a client has been accepted into the target VLAN it can no longer access the Guest VLAN If a port is a member of multiple VLANs it cannot become a member of the Guest VLAN Mm rr J Guest VLAN To view the following window click Security gt 802 1X gt Guest VLAN Add Guest VLAN Apply Current Guest WLAN Ports Figure 5 23 Guest VLAN window The following fields may be modified to enable the 802 1X Guest VLAN Parameter Description VLAN Name Enter the pre configured VLAN name to create as an 802 1X Guest VLAN Port List Set the individual port s to be enabled for the 802 1X Guest VLAN or click All Click Apply to implement the 802 1X Guest VLAN Once properly configured the Guest VLAN Name and associated ports will be listed in the low
264. nds Once the flooding is no longer detected the wait period for limiting ARP packets will return to 5 seconds and the process will resume To configure the Safeguard Engine for the Switch click Security gt Safeguard Engine which will open the following window Safeguard Engine State Disabled Enabled Safeguard Engine Current Status Normal CPU Utilization Settings Rising Threshold 20 100 Trap Log Disabled w Falling Threshold 20 100 Mode Fuy M Note D Link Safeguard Engine is a robust and innovative technology developed by D Link which will automatically throttle the impact of packet flooding into the switch s CPL It will keep D Link Switches better protected from being too frequently interrupted by malicious viruses or worm attacks Figure 5 2 Safeguard Engine window 137 To configure the Switch s Safeguard Engine change the State to Enabled when the Safeguard Engine is enabled a green light will show on the gray bar at the top of this window next to Safeguard To set the Safeguard Engine for the Switch complete the following fields Parameter Description Rising Threshold Used to configure the acceptable level of CPU utilization before the Safeguard Engine mechanism is enabled Once the CPU utilization reaches this percentage level the Switch will move into the Exhausted state Falling Threshold Used to configure the acceptable level of CPU utilization as a percentage where the Switch
265. nfigured the ACL attribute of the RADIUS server for example ACL profile create access profile ethernet vlan OxFFF profile id 100 ACL rule config access profile profile _id 100 add access _id auto_assign ethernet and the MAC based Access Cotntrol authentication is successful the device will assign the ACL profiles and rules according to the RADIUS server For more information about the ACL module please refer to Chapter 22 Access Control List ACL Commands 270 Appendix D Glossary 1000BASE SX A short laser wavelength on multimode fiber optic cable for a maximum length of 2000 meters 1000BASE LX A long wavelength for a long haul fiber optic cable for a maximum length of 10 kilometers 1000BASE T 1000Mbps Ethernet implementation over Category 5E cable 100BASE FX 100Mbps Ethernet implementation over fiber 100BASE TX 100Mbps Ethernet implementation over Category 5 and Type 1 Twisted Pair cabling 10BASE T The IEEE 802 3 specification for Ethernet over Unshielded Twisted Pair UTP cabling aging The automatic removal of dynamic entries from the Switch Database which have timed out and are no longer valid ATM Asynchronous Transfer Mode A connection oriented transmission protocol based on fixed length cells packets ATM is designed to carry a complete range of user traffic including voice data and video signals auto negotiation A feature on a port which allows it to advertise its capabilities for speed duplex and flow con
266. ng packets so they can be carried across Ethernet backbones and twelve bits of VLAN ID VID The three bits of user priority are used by 802 1p The VID is the VLAN identifier and is used by the 802 1Q standard Because the VID is twelve bits long 4094 unique VLANs can be identified 62 The tag is inserted into the packet header making the entire packet longer by four octets All of the information originally contained in the packet is retained IEEE 802 10 Tag Octets g 1 2 3 4 Destination Address 6 octets Source Address 6 octets EtherType GxeI00 Tag Control Information Begining of Data Cyclic Redundancy Check 4 octets Fu oy err VLAN To VIB G2 bia y 3 bits 1 bit 12 bits Figure 3 3 IEEE 802 1Q Tag The EtherType and VLAN ID are inserted after the MAC source address but before the original EtherType Length or Logical Link Control Because the packet is now a bit longer than it was originally the Cyclic Redundancy Check CRC must be recalculated Adding an IEEE 602 10 Tag Figure 3 4 Adding an IEEE 802 1Q Tag Port VLAN ID Packets that are tagged are carrying the 802 1Q VID information can be transmitted from one 802 1Q compliant network device to another with the VLAN information intact This allows 802 1Q VLANs to span network devices and indeed the entire network if all network devices are 802 1Q compliant Unfortunately not all network devices are 802 1Q compliant These devices are refer
267. ng IEEE 802 1Q VLANs which we will call SPVIDs Service Provider VLAN IDs These VLANs are marked by a TPID Tagged Protocol ID configured in hex form to be encapsulated within the VLAN tag of the packet This identifies the packet as double tagged and segregates it from other VLANs on the network therefore creating a hierarchy of VLANs within a single packet Here is an example Q in Q VLAN tagged packet Destination Source SPVLAN TPID 802 1Q CEVLAN Tag Ether Payload Address Address Service Provider TPID Customer VLAN Type VLAN Tag Consider the example below Customer A GE VID gg Customer B gt o CEVID 10 q n IL O _ SPVID 100 SPVID 200 customer B AMA ETS TO CEVID 10 Customer B e CEVID 10 Customer A CEVID 10 Figure 3 5 Q in Q VLAN Example In this example the Service Provider Access Network switch Provider edge switch is the device creating and configuring Q in Q VLANs with different SPVIDs for specific customers say Customer A and Customer B Both CEVLANs Customer VLANs CEVLAN 10 are tagged with the SPVID 100 for Customer A or SPVID 200 for Customer B on the Service Provider Access Network thus being a member of two VLANs on the Service Provider s network In this way the Customer can retain their normal VLAN ID s and the Service Provider can separate multiple Customer VLANs using SPVLANs thus greatly regulating traffic and routing on the Service Provider switch This
268. ng an access profile is divided into two basic parts The first is to specify which part or parts of a frame the Switch will examine such as the MAC source address or the IP destination address The second part is entering the criteria the Switch will use to determine what to do with the frame The entire process is described below in two parts To display the currently configured Access Profiles on the Switch click ACL gt Access Profile Lists FT a er E Total Used Rule Entries Total Unused Rule Entries 0 512 EE A Owner Type Figure 6 46 initial Access Profile List window To add an ACL Profile click the Add ACL Profile button which will display the window below 176 Select Profile ID Select ACL Type Ethernet ACL Py4 ACL CO IPV ACL O Packet Content ACL You can select the field inthe packet to create filtering mask MAC Address Ethernet Type PayLoad MAC Address source mao mask C Destination MAC Mask 302 10 VLAN VLAN VLAN Mask O FFF C Ethernet Type Figure 6 47 Add ACL Profile window for Ethernet example There are four sets of Access Profile configuration windows one for Ethernet or MAC address based profile configuration one for IP IPv4 address based profile configuration one for the Packet Content and one for IPv 6 Explore the four types of Access Profile configuration options by using the drop down menu to select a Profile ID between 7 and 512 17 has been
269. nges the parallel arrangement of data within computers to the serial form used on data transmission links This port is most often used for dedicated local management CSMA CD Channel access method used by Ethernet and IEEE 802 3 standards in which devices transmit only after finding the data channel clear for some period of time When two devices transmit simultaneously a collision occurs and the colliding devices delay their retransmissions for a random amount of time data center switching The point of aggregation within a corporate network where a switch provides high performance access to server farms a high speed backbone connection and a control point for network management and security Ethernet A LAN specification developed jointly by Xerox Intel and Digital Equipment Corporation Ethernet networks operate at 10Mbps using CSMA CD to run over cabling Fast Ethernet 100Mbps technology based on the Ethernet CMSA CD network access method Flow Control IEEE 802 3z A means of holding packets back at the transmit port of the connected end station Prevents packet loss at a congested switch port forwarding The process of sending a packet toward its destination by an internetworking device full duplex A system that allows packets to be transmitted and received at the same time and in effect doubles the potential throughput of a link half duplex A system that allows packets to be transmitted and received but not at the same
270. ngs will appear in the VLAN Trunk Settings table in the lower part of the window To view the following window click L2 Features gt VLAN Trunk Settings VLAN Trunk State Disabled Enabled Port Settings Member Ports Clear All Select All Apply Figure 3 15 VLAN Trunk Settings window The user changeable parameters are as follows Parameter Description VLAN Trunk Global Enable or disable the VLAN trunking global state State The ports to be configured 19 GVRP Settings This window allows the user to determine whether the Switch will share its VLAN configuration information with other GARP VLAN Registration Protocol GVRP enabled switches In addition Ingress Checking can be used to limit traffic by filtering incoming packets whose PVID do not match the PVID of the port Results can be seen in the table under the configuration settings as seen below To view this window click L2 Features gt GVRP Settings GVRP State Settings Disabled O Enabled From Port PVID 1 4094 GYRP Ingress Checking Acceptable Frame Type 01 Disabled Y Enabled v All v Port Reassigned PYID GYRP Ingress Checking Acceptable Frame Type All Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled
271. nnected port will be load shared among the other unlinked ports of the link aggregation group Link aggregation allows several ports to be grouped together and to act as a single link This gives a bandwidth that is a multiple of a single link s bandwidth Link aggregation is most commonly used to link a bandwidth intensive network device or devices such as a server to the backbone of a network The Switch allows the creation of up to fourteen link aggregation groups each group consisting of two to eight links ports All of the ports in the group must be members of the same VLAN and their STP status static multicast traffic control traffic segmentation and 802 1p default priority configurations must be identical Port locking port mirroring and 802 1X must not be enabled on the trunk group Further the aggregated links must all be of the same speed and should be configured as full duplex The Master Port of the group is to be configured by the user and all configuration options including the VLAN configuration that can be applied to the Master Port are applied to the entire link aggregation group Load balancing is automatically applied to the ports in the aggregated group and a link failure within the group causes the network traffic to be directed to the remaining links in the group The Spanning Tree Protocol will treat a link aggregation group as a single link on the switch level On the port level the STP will use the por
272. ns main windows concerning Bandwidth Control Queue Bandwidth Control Settings Traffic Control Queue Bandwidth Control Settings 802 1P Default Priority 802 1P User Priority QOS Scheduling Settings Priority Mapping TOS Mapping and DSCP Mapping Security Contains main windows concerning Safeguard Engine Trusted Host IP MAC Port Binding Port Security 802 1X SSL Settings SSH Access Authentication Control MAC based Access Control DoS Prevention Settings and DHCP Server Screening ACL Contains main windows concerning ACL Configuration Wizard Access Profile List CPU Access Profile List ACL Finder and ACL Flow Meter Monitoring Contains main windows concerning Cable Diagnostics CPU Utilization Port Utilization Packet Size Memory Utilization Packets Errors Port Access Control Browse ARP Table Browse VLAN IGMP Snooping MLD Snooping LLDP Connectivity Failure Management MAC based Access Control Authentication State Browse session Table MAC Address Table and System Log Save amp Tools Contains main windows concerning Save Configuration Save Log Save All Configuration File Upload amp Download Upload Log File Reset Ping Test Download Firmware and Reboot System NOTE Be sure to configure the user name and password in the User Accounts window Configuration gt User Accounts before connecting the Switch to the greater network 11 Configuration Device Information System Information Se
273. nsition to a forwarding state immediately without going through the listening and learning states An edge port loses its status if it receives a BPDU packet immediately becoming a normal spanning tree port P2P Port A P2P port is also capable of rapid transition P2P ports may be used to connect to other bridges Under RSTP MSTP all ports operating in full duplex mode are considered to be P2P ports unless manually overridden through configuration STP RSTP MSTP Compatibility MSTP or RSTP can interoperate with legacy equipment and is capable of automatically adjusting BPDU packets to STP format when necessary However any segment using STP will not benefit from the rapid transition and rapid topology change detection of MSTP or RSTP The protocol also provides for a variable used for migration in the event that legacy equipment on a segment is updated to use RSTP or MSTP The Spanning Tree Protocol STP operates on two levels 1 On the switch level the settings are globally implemented 2 On the port level the settings are implemented on a per user defined group of ports basis 97 STP Bridge Global Settings To open the following window click L2 features gt Spanning Tree gt STP Bridge Global Settings STP Global Setting STP State Disabled Enabled STF Version Forwarding BPOL Bridge Max Age 6 40 Bridge Hello Time 1 2 Bridge Forward Delay 4 30 Tx Hold Gount 1 103 Max Hops 6 40 Figure 3 4
274. nticating one of the attached devices effectively provides access to the LAN for all devices on the shared segment Clearly the security offered in this situation is open to attack 147 Host based Network Access Control Y RADIUS Server Ethernet Switch eee had 802 1X 802 1X 802 1X 802 1X 802 1X 802 1X 802 1X 802 1X 802 1X 802 1X 802 1X 802 1X Client Client Client Client Client Client Client Client Client Client Client Client Network access controlled port 1 Network access uncontrolled port Figure 5 18 Example of Typical Host based Configuration In order to successfully make use of 802 1X in a shared media LAN segment it would be necessary to create logical Ports one for each attached device that required access to the LAN The Switch would regard the single physical Port connecting it to the shared media segment as consisting of a number of distinct logical Ports each logical Port being independently controlled from the point of view of EAPOL exchanges and authorization state The Switch learns each attached devices individual MAC addresses and effectively creates a logical Port that the attached device can then use to communicate with the LAN via the Switch 148 802 1X Settings To configure the 802 1X Settings click Security gt 802 1X gt 802 1X Settings 802 1 State Disabled Enabled Auth Mode Port Based Auth Protocol RADIUS EAP v 20
275. o a specific subset of network addresses These addresses are specified in the destination address field of the packet protocol A set of rules for communication between devices on a network The rules dictate format timing sequencing and error control resilient link A pair of ports that can be configured so that one will take over data transmission should the other fail See also main port and standby port RJ 45 Standard 8 wire connectors for IEEE 802 3 10BASE T networks RMON Remote Monitoring A subset of SNMP MIB II that allows monitoring and management capabilities by addressing up to ten different groups of information RPS Redundant Power System A device that provides a backup source of power when connected to the Switch server farm A cluster of servers in a centralized location serving a large user population SLIP Serial Line Internet Protocol A protocol which allows IP to run over a serial line connection SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol A protocol originally designed to be used in managing TCP IP internets SNMP is presently implemented on a wide range of computers and networking equipment and may be used to manage many aspects of network and end station operation Spanning Tree Protocol STP A bridge based system for providing fault tolerance on networks STP works by allowing you to implement parallel paths for network traffic and ensure that redundant paths are disabled when the main paths are operati
276. o view this window click L2 Features gt CFM gt CFM Port Settings State Disabled State Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled oo in t Figure 3 65 CFM Port Settings window The fields that can be configured are described below Parameter Description From Port To Port To select the port range used for this configuration To enable or disable the state of specific port regarding the CFM configuration The default State is Disabled Click Apply to implement changes made 120 CFM Loopback Settings To view this window click L2 Features gt CFM gt CFM Loopback Settings MEP Name Mac32 characters O MEP ID 1 8191 MO Mac22 characters MA Mace characters MAC Address LBMs Number 1 65535 LBM Payload Length 0 1500 LBM Payload Pattern Max 1500 characters LBMs Priority Figure 3 66 CFM Loopback Settings window The fields that can be configured are described below Parameter Description e A A AA CN Ec ci CI cinc LBMs Number Number of LBMs to be sent The default value is 4 The range is 1 65535 LBM Payload Length LBM Payload Length Length The The payload length of LBM to be sent The defaultis length The payload l
277. ode Unicast is the default operation mode To support this mode the switch between clients and servers must allow L2 unicast packets to be forwarded to multiple NLB servers The other mode is multicast mode With multicast mode the NLB servers share identical unicast IP address called Cluster IP and a multicast MAC address called Flooding MAC In both modes a shared destination MAC address is used as the destination MAC address in the client request frame however the server that actually processes the request will use its own MAC address in the reply frame Please consult Microsoft s server documentation for more information on using and setting up NLBS on Windows servers To view this window click L2 Features gt NLB Settings Unicast Multicast VLAN Name fs tax 32 characters VID 1 4094 MAC Address MAC Address Egress Ports Figure 3 51 NLB Settings window The following parameters can be set Parameter Description Unicast Multicast Click on the radio button for mode in which NLB will operate VLAN Name Enter the name for the VLAN of the NLB multicast FDB entry being created Enter the VLAN ID of the NLB multicast FDB entry being created MAC Address Type the MAC address to enter into the NLB Forwarding Data Base Port Choose the forwarding ports to be used for the configured NLB unicast FDB entry Click Apply to implement the changes made LLDP The Link Layer Discovery Protocol LLDP allows stations
278. of ports dynamic MAC address learning can be locked such that the current source MAC addresses entered into the MAC address forwarding table cannot be changed once the port lock is enabled Setting the Admin State pull down menu to Enabled and clicking Apply can lock the port To view the following window click Security gt Port Security gt Port Security Port Settings 142 20NN 1N 12 02 02F avar 2 Et ha No jl 3200 10 18 28 28F Layer 2 Ethernet Managed Switch User Manual Port Security Trap Log Settings O Enabled Disabled From Port To Part Admin State hax Learning Address 0 64 Lock Address Mode A ee ee a at v for v Disabled we o Delete on Reset w Port Security Port Table Port Disabled DEE E a Disabled DeleteQnTimeout Disabled DeleteQnTimeout Disabled DeleteQnTimeout Disabled DeleteOnTimeout Disabled DeleteQnTimeout Disabled DeleteQnTimeout Disabled DeleteOnTimeout Disabled a DeleteonTimeout Disabled DeleteQnTimeout Disabled DeleteQnTimeout Disabled DeleteQnTimeout Disabled DeleteOnTimeout Disabled Oelete nTimenout Disabled DeleteQnTimeout Disabled DeleteOnTimeout Disabled DeleteOnTimeout Disabled DeleteOnTimeout Disabled DeleteOnTimeout Disabled DeleteOnTimeout Disabled DeleteOnTimeout Disabled DeleteOnTimeout Disabled Pee ommen A M l edb a T a 2 d 4 5 E T A y _ _ ss ns si fs ss o o oo dc o
279. of their configurations requiring intense processing of VLAN mapping tables which may exceed the VLAN mapping limit Q in Q uses a single service provider VLAN SPVLAN for customers who have multiple VLANs Customer s VLAN IDs are segregated within the service provider s network even when they use the same customer specific VLAN ID Q in Q expands the VLAN space available while preserving the customer s original tagged packets and adding SPVLAN tags to each new frame 70 Q in Q Settings To view this window click L2 Features gt Q in Q gt Q in Q Settings QinQ Global Settings Enabled Disabled From Pot ToPort Role Outer TPID hex 0x1 Oxfffh Trust CVID f VLAN Translation of Y 01 Y NNi oxiseas Disabled Disabled vw C e AE AL e Outer TPID Trust CYID VLAN Translation Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled 0x588 Disabled Disabled 0x88a8 Disabled Disabled 0x88a8 Disabled Disabled NODO Misahlard Niesahiad
280. ofile ID between 7 and 512 and click the Packet Content ACL radio button Click Select and the following window will appear Select Profile ID Select ACL Type O Ethernet ACL O IPv4 ACL O IPv6 ACL Packet Content ACL You can select the field in the packet to create filtering mask MAC Address Source MAC Mask FFFFFFFFFFFF Destination MAC Mask FFFFFFFFFFFF Tag Customer Tag 0 FFFF FFFF Service Tag 0 FFFF FFFF Packet Content Morset1 0 31 2 mask FFFF Layer 2 w Morse 2 0 31 4 mask FFFF Layer 2 m Clofset3 0 31 mask oooo Layer Dofseta o 31 maskjoooo Layer C ofset 5 0 31 mask oooo Layer Figure 6 66 Add ACL Profile window for Packet Content example Click on the boxes at the top of the table which will then turn red and reveal parameters for configuration To create a new entry enter the correct information and click Create To return to the Access Profile List window click lt lt Back 188 The following parameters can be set for Packet Content Parameter Description MAC Address Tick either Source MAC Mask and enter the MAC source address mask or Destination MAC Mask and enter the MAC destination address mask Tag Tick Customer Tag 0 FFFF and enter the appropriate customer tag in hex form hex Ox0 Oxffff and or Service Tag 0 FFFF and enter the appropriate service tag in hex form hex Ox0 Oxffff Packet Content Allows users to examine up to eleven specified off
281. on Device Name This field will display the Device Name of the switches in the SIM group configured by the user If no Device Name is configured by the name it will be given the name default and tagged with the last six digits of the MAC Address to identify it Module Name Displays the full module name of the switch that was right clicked MAC Address Displays the MAC Address of the corresponding Switch Local Port No Displays the number of the physical port on the CS that the MS or CaS is connected to The CS will have no entry in this field Remote Port No Displays the number of the physical port on the MS or CaS that the CS is connected to The CS will have no entry in this field Port Speed Displays the connection speed between the CS and the MS or CaS 92 Click Close to close the Property window Commander Switch Icon defanlt35 26 20 Figure 2 49 Right Clicking a Commander Icon The following options may appear for the user to configure e Collapse To collapse the group that will be represented by a single icon Expand To expand the SIM group in detail o Property To pop up a window to display the group information Member Switch Icon 1 Collapse 1 Remove from group Remove from group Confiqure Property Configure Property Figure 2 50 Right Clicking a Member icon The following options may appear for the user to configure e Collapse To collapse the group that will be
282. on SNMP when the notification is disabled This function controls the local LLDP agent and allows it to send and receive LLDP frames on the ports This option contains Tx Rx Tx and Rx or Disabled Tx the local LLDP agent can only transmit LLDP frames Rx the local LLDP agent can only receive LLDP frames Tx and Rx the local LLDP agent can both transmit and receive LLDP frames Disabled the local LLDP agent can neither transmit nor receive LLDP frames The default value is 7x and Rx Subtype This read only field displays IPv4 the type of the IP address Action Used to Enable or Disable the advertise management address function base port Address The address must be the management IP address For multi IP addresses you can enter any IP or create a new IP interface that you want to add Click Apply to implement changes made 108 LLDP Basic TLVs Settings This window is used to enable the settings for the Basic TLVs Settings To view this window click L2 Features gt LLDP gt LLDP Basic TLVs Settings From Port 01 To Port 01 Port Description Disabled Y System Mame Disabled y Disabled w System Description Disabled del System Capabilities Port Description System Marne System Description System Capabilities Disabled enabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled D
283. on and then click Add Rule on the CPU Access Rule List window which will reveal the following window Profile Information Profile ID Profile Type Owner Type CPU ACL IPv Flow Label Rule Detail Keep an inputtield as blank to treatthe corresponding option as do not care Access ID 1 5 Flow Label dddd e g 0 FFFFF Rule Action Action Fermit Time Range Mame F Ports M 2 0 1 4 6 9 Figure 6 89 CPU Add Access Rule window for IPv6 example 202 The following parameters may be configured for the IPv6 Parameter Access ID 1 5 Flow Label IPv6 Address Description Type in a unique identifier number for this access This value can be set from 7 to 5 Specifies the IPv6 Flow Label Enter a value between 0O FFFFF Denotes that IPv6 packets will have Source or Destination IPv6 Address examined by the Switch for forwarding or filtering based on the rules configured IPv6 packets may be identified by the following Entering this parameter will instruct the Switch to examine the class field of the IPv6 header that is similar to the Type of Service ToS or Precedence bits field in lpv4 Select Permit to specify that the packets that match the access profile are forwarded by the Switch according to any additional rule added see below Select Deny to specify the packets that match the access profile are not forwarded by the Switch and will be filtered Tick the check box and enter the name of th
284. onal and enabled if the main paths fail stack A group of network devices that are integrated to form a single logical device standby port The port in a resilient link that will take over data transmission if the main port in the link fails switch A device which filters forwards and floods packets based on the packet s destination address The switch learns the addresses associated with each switch port and builds tables based on this information to be used for the switching decision TCP IP A layered set of communications protocols providing Telnet terminal emulation FTP file transfer and other services for communication among a wide range of computer equipment Telnet A TCP IP application protocol that provides virtual terminal service letting a user log in to another computer system and access a host as if the user were connected directly to the host TFTP Trivial File Transfer Protocol Allows you to transfer files such as software upgrades from a remote device using your switch s local management capabilities UDP User Datagram Protocol An Internet standard protocol that allows an application program on one device to send a datagram to an application program on another device 272 VLAN Virtual LAN A group of location and topology independent devices that communicate as if they are on a common physical LAN VLT Virtual LAN Trunk A Switch to Switch link which carries traffic for all the VLANs on each Switch V
285. onding Add View Rules button and then click Add Rule on the Access Rule List window which will reveal the following window Profile Information Profile ID Profile Type Owner Type IPyB Flow Label Rule Detail Keep an inputfield as blank to treat the corresponding option as do not care Access ID 1 65535 C Auto Assign Flow Label 00006 2 0 0 FEFFF Rule Action Action Permite Priority 0 7 MA a Replace Priority Replace DSCP 0 63 Time Range Name Counter Disabled Y 0 9 1 4 6 9 Apply Figure 6 63 Add Access Rule window for IPv6 example 186 The following parameters may be configured for IPv6 Parameter Description Access ID 1 65535 Type in a unique identifier number for this access This value can be set from 7 to 65535 Auto Assign Ticking this check box will instruct the Switch to automatically assign an Access ID for the rule being created Class Entering a class will instruct the Switch to examine the class field of the IPv6 header This class field is a part of the packet header that is similar to the Type of Service ToS or Precedence bits field in IPv4 Flow Label Specifies the IPv6 Flow Label Enter a value between 0 FFFFF IPv6 Source Address Specifies an IPv6 address for the IPv6 source address IPv6 Source Mask Specifies an IPv6 source submask The device only supports filtering of the last 44 bits LSB of the source IPv6 address TCP Source
286. onfigured with a shared set of privileges The SNMP version may also be set for a listed group of SNMP managers Thus you may create a group of SNMP managers that are allowed to view read only information or receive traps using SNMPv1 while assigning a higher level of security to another group granting read write privileges using SNMPvs3 Using SNMPv3 individual users or groups of SNMP managers can be allowed to perform or be restricted from performing specific SNMP management functions The functions allowed or restricted are defined using the Object Identifier OID associated with a specific MIB An additional layer of security is available for SNMPv3 in that SNMP messages may be encrypted To read more about how to configure SNMPv3 settings for the Switch read the next section Traps Traps are messages that alert network personnel of events that occur on the Switch The events can be as serious as a reboot someone accidentally turned OFF the Switch or less serious like a port status change The Switch generates traps and sends them to the trap recipient or network manager Typical traps include trap messages for Authentication Failure Topology Change and Broadcast Multicast Storm MIBs The Switch in the Management Information Base MIB stores management and counter information The Switch uses the standard MIB II Management Information Base module Consequently values for MIB objects can be retrieved from any SNMP based network managem
287. ong with setting e mail addresses to which switch log files can be sent when a problem arises on the Switch SMTP Service Settings To view the following window click Configuration gt SMTP Service Settings SMTP Global Settings SMTP State O Enabled 6 Disabled SMTP Server Address 0 0 0 0 Self Mail Address ttn 4 characters SMTP Mail Recetver Address Add A Mail Receiver Pf ttn characters Mail Receiver Address Figure 2 28 SMTP Service Settings window The following parameters may be configured or viewed Parameter Description SMTP State Use the radio button to enable or disable the SMTP service on this device SMTP Server Enter the IP address of the SMTP server on a remote device This will be the device that sends Address out the mail for you SMTP Server Port Enter the virtual port number that the Switch will connect with on the SMTP server The common 1 65535 port number for SMTP is 25 yet a value between 7 and 65535 can be chosen Self Mail Address Enter the e mail address from which mail messages will be sent This address will be the from address on the e mail message sent to a recipient Only one self mail address can be configured for this Switch This string can be no more that 64 alphanumeric characters Add A Mail Enter an e mail address and click the Add button Up to eight e mail addresses can be added Receiver per Switch To delete these addresses from the Switch click the corresponding
288. oping Groups present on the Switch MLD Snooping is an IPv6 function comparable to IGMP Snooping for IPv4 The user may browse this table by VLAN present in the Switch by entering that VLAN Name in the empty field shown below and clicking the Find button To view this window click Monitoring gt MLD Snooping gt MLD Snooping Group VLAN Name VLAN List c g 1 4 6 Group IF Address View All MLO Snooping Group Table Total Entries 0 VLAN Name Source Group Member Port Filter Mode Figure 7 29 MLD Snooping Group window Enter a VLAN Name or VLAN List and Group IP Address in the appropriate field and click the Find button The searched entries will be shown in the MLD Snooping Group Table Click View All to see all the entries LLDP The Switch offers three LLDP statistic windows LLDP Statistics System To view this window click Monitoring gt LLDP gt LLDP Statistics System Last Change Time 1363 Number of Table Insert Mumber of Table Delete Murnber of Table Drop Mumber of Table Aqeout pot or 9 LLDP Statistics Ports Total TxFrames Total Discarded Ry Frames Rx Errors Frames Total Rx Frames Total Discarded Rx TLWS Total Unrecognized Rx TLWS Total Aged out Neighbor Information Figure 7 30 LLDP Statistics System window 237 LLDP Local Port Information To view this window click Monitoring gt LLDP gt LLDP Local Port Information LLDP Local Port Brief Table Show Normal
289. or more than the effective bandwidth 100Mbps on an Ethernet port or 1Gbps on a Gigabit port of the port will be set to no_ limited 268 To assign 802 1p default priority by RADIUS Server the proper parameters should be configured on the RADIUS Server The tables below show the parameters for 802 1p default priority The parameters of the Vendor Specific attributes are Vendor ID Defines the vendor 171 DLINK Vendor Type Defines the attribute Required Attribute Specific Field Used to assign the 802 1p Required default priority of the port If the user has configured the 802 1p priority attribute of the RADIUS server for example priority 7 and the 802 1X or Host based authentication is successful the device will assign the 802 1p default priority according to the RADIUS server to the port However if the user does not configure the priority attribute and authenticates successfully the device will not assign a priority to this port If the priority attribute is configured on the RADIUS server is a value out of range gt 7 it will not be set to the device To assign VLAN by RADIUS Server the proper parameters should be configured on the RADIUS Server To use VLAN assignment RFC3580 defines the following tunnel attributes in RADIUS packets The table below shows the parameters for a VLAN Tunnel Type This attribute indicates the 13 VLAN Required tunneling protocol s to be used in the case of a tunnel initiator or
290. ority is set in the CCMs and the LTMs messages transmitted by the MEP The default value is 7 This is the control types of the fault alarms sent by the MEP All All types of fault alarms will be sent Mac Status Only the fault alarms whose priority is equal to or higher than Some Remote MEP MAC Status Error are sent Remote CCM Only the fault alarms whose priority is equal to or higher than Some Remote MEP Down are sent Errors CCM Only the fault alarms whose priority is equal to or higher than Error CCM Received are sent Xcon CCM Only the fault alarms whose priority is equal to or higher than Cross connect CCM Received are sent None No fault alarm is sent This is the default value Alarm Time This is the time that a defect must exceed before the fault alarm can be sent The unit is in centiseconds the range is 250 1000 The default value is 250 Alarm Reset Time This is the dormant duration time before a defect is triggered before the fault can be re alarmed The unit is in centiseconds the range is 250 1000 The default value is 1000 Remote MEP Table Read only information for remote MEPs is listed here Information includes Remote MEPID MAC Address Status RDI Port Status Interface Status Last CCM Serial Number Sender Chassis ID Sender Management Address and Detect Time 119 xStack DES 3200 10 18 28 28F Layer 2 Ethernet Managed Switch User Manual CFM Port Settings T
291. ort connection or link at any of the ports When there is reception or transmission i e When there is a secure 100Mbps Fast Ethernet Solid Green connection or link at any of the ports DES 3200 28F When th ti i R LED Per 100 Mbps Link Act Speed Green en there is reception or transmission i e Blinking Green Activity Act of data occurring at a Fast SFP Port Ethernet connected port When there is a secure 1000Mbps connection Solid Green or link at any of the ports When there is reception or transmission i e connected port Green Amber Blinking Green Activity Act of data occurring at a 1000Mbps Link Act Speed mode for Solid Amber When there is a secure 10 100Mbps Fast 1000BASE T ports Ethernet connection or link at any of the ports When there is reception or transmission i e Blinking Amber Activity Act of data occurring at a Fast Ethernet connected port When there is a secure 1000Mbps connection Solid Green or link at the ports Green Amber LED Per GE Port When there is reception or transmission i e Blinking Green Activity Act of data occurring at a 1000Mbps connected port When there is a secure 100Mbps connection Solid Amber or link at any of the ports Bimba When there is reception or transmission i e J Activity Act of data occurring at the ports Link Act Speed mode for SFP ports 252 Appendix B System Log Entries The following
292. ort in a range of ports to be reauthenticated The ending port in a range of ports to be reauthenticated MAC Address Displays the physical address of the Switch where the port resides Auth PAE State The Authenticator State will display one of the following Initialize Disconnected Connecting Authenticating Authenticated Aborting Held ForceAuth ForceUnauth and N A Backend_State The Backend State will display one of the following Request Response Success Fail Timeout Idle Initialize and N A Port Status The status of the controlled port can be Authorized Unauthorized or N A SSL Settings Secure Sockets Layer or SSL is a security feature that will provide a secure communication path between a host and client through the use of authentication digital signatures and encryption These security functions are implemented through the use of a ciphersuite which is a security string that determines the exact cryptographic parameters specific encryption algorithms and key sizes to be used for an authentication session and consists of three levels Key Exchange The first part of the cyphersuite string specifies the public key algorithm to be used This switch utilizes the Rivest Shamir Adleman RSA public key algorithm and the Digital Signature Algorithm DSA specified here as the DHE DSS Diffie Hellman DHE public key algorithm This is the first authentication process between client and host as they exchange keys in loo
293. otify is enabled it generates an event to notify the remote OAM peer Use the Link Monitor menu to define the type of link monitor and set the threshold window and notifications status Critical Link Event The Critical Event option refers to an unspecified criticial event The Dying Gasp option specifies detection of an unrecoverable event has occurred such as a power failure of the remote device Threshold Specify the number of error symbols error frames error frame period or error frame seconds in the period that is required to be equal to or greater than in order for the event to be generated Threshold value can range from 0 4294967295 Window For error symbol and error frame the available range is 1000 to 60000 ms and default value 1000ms For error frame period the range is 14881 to 89286000 the default value is 148810 for FE port For error frame seconds the range is 10000 to 900000 the default value is 60000 Notify Specify to enable or disable the event notification The default state is Enabled Click Apply to implement the changes made 113 Connectivity Fault Management CFM Connectivity Fault Management CFM or Ethernet Connectivity Fault Management is an end to end Ethernet layer OAM protocol CFM is defined by IEEE 802 1ag and includes connectivity monitoring fault notification and means of isolating faults on large Ethernet metropolitan area networks MANs and WANs Ethernet has traditionally operate
294. ound the ring RPL Owner Enable Disable the device as an RPL owner node This node blocks or unblocks the RPL as required by network conditions An Ethernet Ring Automatic Protection Switching R APS message protocol coordinates protection activities for all nodes on the ring In the event of a link failure the RPL Owner uses these messages to block a failed link and unblock the RPL There can be only one RPL Owner on a ring Ring MEL Specifies the ring Maintence Entity Group MEG level MEL of the R APS function Protected VLANs This command is used to configure the VLANs that are protected by the ERPS function into effect Guard Time Specifies the guard time of the R APS function While the Guard timer is running received R APS messages are NOT forwarded to the RPL Owner The purpose of this is to prevent the possibility a loop forming in the event that two or more R APS signal fail messages are sent Hold Off Time Specifies the hold off time of the R APS function A hold off timer is used in order to coordinate timing of ERPS at multiple levels The purpose is to allow for example a server layer switch to be able to fix the problem before switching at a client layer When a new defect or more sever defect is detected the event will not be reported immediately instead after the hold off timer expires the trail that started the timer will be checked to see if the defect still exists If it exists the defect is reported and the ERPS
295. oup Add a candidate to a group Clicking this option will reveal the following dialog for the user to enter a password for authentication from the Candidate Switch before being added to the SIM group Click OK to enter the password or Cancel to exit the window Input password Password Java Applet Window Figure 2 54 Input password window Remove from Group Remove an MS from the group Device e Configure Will open the web manager for the specific device View Refresh Update the views with the latest status Topology Display the Topology view 54 Mm rr J Help Group Management 1 6 07 Copyright c 2008 D Link Corporation Release Date 2008 11 05 Java Applet Window Figure 2 55 About window Firmware Upgrade This window is used to upgrade firmware from the Commander Switch to the Member Switch Member Switches will be listed in the table and will be specified by ID and Port port on the CS where the MS resides MAC Address Model Name and Firmware Version To specify a certain Switch for firmware download click its corresponding check box under the Port heading To update the firmware enter the Server IP Address where the firmware resides and enter the Path Filename of the firmware Click Download to initiate the file transfer To access the following window click Configuration gt Single IP Management gt Firmware Upgrade Server IP Address Path Filename Total En
296. p ID Group Name Protocol Protocol Value 0 FFFFA o Ethemetil Y Total Entries 0 Group ID Group Mame Frame Type Protocol Value Figure 3 13 802 1v Protocol Group Settings window The following fields can be set Parameter Description 12 Group ID 1 16 Group Name Protocol Protocol Value 0 FFFF Select an ID number for the group between 7 and 16 This is used to identify the new Protocol VLAN group Type an alphanumeric string of up to 32 characters This function maps packets to protocol defined VLANs by examining the type octet within the packet header to discover the type of protocol associated with it Use the drop down menu to toggle between Ethernet Il and EEE802 3 SNAP Enter a value for the Group Click Add to make a new entry and Delete All to remove an entry 73 802 1v Protocol VLAN Settings The window allows the user to configure Protocol VLAN settings The lower half of the window displays any previously created settings To view this window click L2 Features gt 802 1v Protocol VLAN gt 802 1v Protocol VLAN Settings Add New Protocol VLAN Group ID po e VID 61 4094 A 802 1p Priority None O Group Name O YLAM Name Sas Port List e g 1 6 Mal Rorts Protocol VLAN Table Search Portlist o Total Entries 0 VLAN Mame Group ID 2802 1p Priority Figure 3 14 802 1v Protocol VLAN Settings window The following fields can be set Parameter Des
297. plement changes made 57 ARP Spoofing Prevention Settings ARP spoofing also known as ARP poisoning is a method to attack an Ethernet network which may allow an attacker to sniff data frames on a LAN modify the traffic or stop the traffic altogether known as a Denial of Service DoS attack The principle of ARP spoofing is to send the fake or spoofed ARP messages to an Ethernet network Generally the aim is to associate the attacker s or random MAC address with the IP address of another node such as the default gateway Any traffic meant for that IP address would be mistakenly re directed to the node specified by the attacker To prevent ARP spoofing attack the switch uses Packet Content ACL to block the invalid ARP packets which contain faked gateway s MAC and IP binding To view this window click Configuration gt ARP Spoofing Prevention Settings as shown below Gateway IP Address Gateway MAC Address Ports e g 1 7 10 aa zzz Dati Ports Total Entries 0 Gateway IP Address Gateway MAC Address Figure 2 61 ARP Spoofing Prevention Settings window The following fields can be set or viewed Parameter Description Gateway IP Address Enter the IP address of the gateway Gateway MAC Enter the MAC address of the gateway Address Ports e g 1 7 10 Specify the switch ports for which to configure the ARP Spoofing Prevention settings Tick the All Ports check box to configure this entry for all ports on the Sw
298. plicate IP detected means that the system received an ARP request packet that is sent by an IP address that matches the system s own IP address Gratuitous ARP This is used to enable or disable updating ARP cache based on the received gratuitous ARP Learning packet If a switch receives a gratuitous ARP packet it should add or update the ARP entry This is Enabled by default Once you have made the desired gratuitous ARP setting changes click Apply 96 Gratuitous ARP Settings This window allows you to have more detailed settings for the Gratuitous ARP To view this window click Configuration gt Gratuitous ARP gt Gratuitous ARP Settings rz U OL de Y us L a mm TI fe Gratuitous ARP Trap Log Settings IF Interface Mame Trap Log Beem Disabled v Gratuitous ARP Periodical Send Interval Setting IF Interface Mame Interval Timef0 65535 Ersem see analy Total Entries 1 IP Interface Mame Gratuitous ARP Trap Gratuitous ARP Log Gratuitous ARP Periodical Send Interval System Disabled Enabled Figure 2 60 Gratuitous ARP Settings window The following fields can be set or viewed Parameter Description Gratuitous ARP Periodical Send Interval IP Interface Name Displays the name of the interface that is being edited Interval Time 0 This is used to configure the interval for the periodical sending of gratuitous ARP request 65535 packets By default the interval is 0 Click Apply to im
299. port SIM This enables the user to manage switches that are more than one hop away from the CS The SIM group is a group of switches that are managed as a single entity SIM switches may take on three different roles 1 Commander Switch CS This is a switch that has been manually configured as the controlling device for a group and takes on the following characteristics It has an IP Address It is not a commander switch or member switch of another Single IP group It is connected to the member switches through its management VLAN 2 Member Switch MS This is a switch that has joined a single IP group and is accessible from the CS and it takes on the following characteristics It is nota CS or MS of another Single IP group 46 It is connected to the CS through the CS management VLAN 3 Candidate Switch CaS This is a switch that is ready to join a SIM group but is not yet a member of the SIM group The Candidate Switch may join the SIM group of a switch by manually configuring it to be a MS of a SIM group A switch configured as a CaS is not a member of a SIM group and will take on the following characteristics It is nota CS or MS of another Single IP group It is connected to the CS through the CS management VLAN After configuring one switch to operate as the CS of a SIM group additional switches may join the group through a direct connection to the Commander switch Only the Commander switch will allow entry to the cand
300. previously configured lists click the Delete All button NOTE For the current release of the DES 3200 users cannot specify a range of ports for 802 1v The current release only allows users to specify all ports 74 xStack DES 3200 10 18 28 28F Layer 2 Ethernet Managed Switch User Manual VLAN Trunk Settings Enable VLAN on a port to allow frames belonging to unknown VLAN groups to pass through that port This is useful if you want to set up VLAN groups on end devices without having to configure the same VLAN groups on intermediary devices Refer to the following figure for an illustrated example Suppose you want to create VLAN groups 1 and 2 V1 and V2 on devices A and B Without a VLAN Trunk you must first configure VLAN groups 1 and 2 on all intermediary switches C D and E otherwise they will drop frames with unknown VLAN group tags However with VLAN Trunk enabled on a port s in each intermediary switch you only need to create VLAN groups in the end devices A and B C D and E automatically allow frames with VLAN group tags 1 and 2 VLAN groups that are unknown to those switches to pass through their VLAN trunking port s SwitchC pa 5witchD mw Switch E Switch A Switch B V1 V2 V1 V2 Users can combine a number of VLAN ports together to create VLAN trunks To create VLAN Trunk Port settings on the Switch select the ports to be configured change the VLAN Trunk Global State to Enabled and click Apply the new setti
301. processes all CFM frames at its level and drops all CFM frames at a lower level coming from the bridge port An Outward facing port forwards all CFM frames at higher levels regardless of which direction the frames come in To view detailed information about the MEP entry click on the View Detail link 118 Port 5 Direction Inward CFM Port Status Disabled MAC Address 00 01 02 03 04 6 4 Highest Fault None Out of Sequence CCMs 0 Received Cross Connect CC Ms 0 Received Error CCMs 0 Received Normal CCMs 0 Received Port Status CCMs 0 Received lf Status CCMs 0 Received CCMs Transmitted at In Order LBRs 0 Received Out of Order LBRs 0 Received Next LTM Trans ID 0 Unexpected LTRs 0 Received LBMs Transmitted gt 0 MEP State Disabled CCM State Disabled PDU Priority R Fault Alarm Disabled Alarm Time 250 1000 250 centisecond 1 1100 5 Alarm Reset Time 250 1000 1000 centisecond 14100 s Edit lt lt Back Remote MEP s MEPID MAC Addres 311 Port Status Interface Status Detect Time Figure 3 64 CFM MEP Information window To re configure the MEP entry click on the Edit button Parameter Description This is the MEP administrative state Enable MEP is enabled Disable MEP is disabled This is the default value CCM State This is the CCM transmission state Enable CCM transmission enabled Disable CCM transmission disabled This is the default value PDU Priority The 802 1p pri
302. ps Forward Unregistered Groups Forward Unregistered Groups Forward Unregistered Groups Figure 3 50 Multicast Filtering Mode window The following parameters can be set Parameter Description From Port To Port The range of ports to be configured Filtering Mode This drop down menu instructs the Switch what action to take when it receives a multicast packet that requires forwarding to a port Forward Unregistered Groups This will instruct the Switch to forward a multicast packet whose destination is an unregistered multicast group residing within the range of ports specified above Filter Unregistered Groups This will instruct the Switch to filter any multicast packets whose destination is an unregistered multicast group residing within the range of ports specified above Click Apply to implement the changes made 105 NLB Settings The Network Load Balancing commands are used to configure the Switch to support Network Load Balancing NLB a proprietary Microsoft implementation of server clustering and load balancing suitable for various stateless applications such as FTP VPN and Web servers Client requests for such applications can be distributed among multiple servers in a cluster that share a single IP address and a single destination MAC address Client requests are forwarded to all servers in the cluster but only one will actually process the request The Switch operates NLB in unicast mode or multicast m
303. ption SSH Server State Enable or disable SSH on the Switch The default is Disabled Max Session 1 8 Enter a value between 7 and 8 to set the number of users that may simultaneously access the Switch The default setting is 8 Connection Allows the user to set the connection timeout The use may set a time between 120 and 600 Timeout 120 600 seconds The default setting is 120 seconds Authfail Attempts Allows the Administrator to set the maximum number of attempts that a user may try to log on 2 20 to the SSH Server utilizing the SSH authentication After the maximum number of attempts has been exceeded the Switch will be disconnected and the user must reconnect to the Switch to attempt another login The number of maximum attempts may be set between 2 and 20 The default setting is 2 Rekey Timeout Using the pull down menu uses this field to set the time period that the Switch will change the security shell encryptions The available options are Never 10 min 30 min and 60 min The default setting is Never Click Apply to implement changes made SSH Authmode and Algorithm Settings The SSH Algorithm window allows the configuration of the desired types of SSH algorithms used for authentication encryption There are four categories of algorithms listed and specific algorithms of each may be enabled or disabled by checking the boxes All algorithms are enabled by default To view this window click Security gt SSH gt SSH Aut
304. ption Target IP Enter an IP address to be Pinged Address Interface Name For IPv6 only enter the name of the interface to be Pinged Repeat Pinging Enter the number of times desired to attempt to Ping either the IPv4 address or the IPv6 address for configured in this window Users may enter a number of times between 7 and 255 Sie For IPv6 only enter a value between 7 and 6000 The default is 700 Timeout For IPv4 select a timeout period between 7 and 99 seconds for this Ping message to reach its destination For IPv6 select a timeout period between 7 and 10 seconds for this Ping message to reach its destination In either case if the packet fails to find the IP address in this specified time the Ping packet will be dropped Click Start to initialize the Ping program 248 Download Firmware The Switch supports dual image storage for firmware file backup and restoration The firmware images are indexed by ID number 1 or 2 To change the boot firmware image use the Image ID drop down menu to select the desired firmware file to backup or restore The default Switch settings will use image ID 1 as the boot firmware file Open the Tools drop down menu on the left hand side of the menu bar at the top of the Web manager and click Download Firmware to open the following window Server F Interface Mame File Image ID Figure 8 8 Download Firmware window Use the radio button to select either IPv4 or
305. queue Otherwise a packet will have its incoming 802 1p user priority re written to its original value before being forwarded by the Switch Replace DSCP 0 63 Select this option to instruct the Switch to replace the DSCP value in a packet that meets the selected criteria with the value entered in the adjacent field Time Range Name Tick the check box and enter the name of the Time Range settings that has been previously configured in the Time Range Settings window This will set specific times when this access rule will be implemented on the Switch Enable or disable the counter settings Ports sd Enter a range of ports to be configured Click Apply to display the following Access Rule List window fi Profile Type Action Permit Show Details Delete Rules Figure 6 58 Access Rule List window for IPv4 example To view the configurations for a previously configured rule click on the corresponding Show Details button which will display the following Access Rule Detail Information window ACL Rule Details Profile ID 2 Access ID 1 Profile Type IP Action Permit Ports 6 DSP 63 Show All Rules Figure 6 59 Access Rule Detail Information window for IPv4 example To create an IPv6 ACL click Add ACL Profile in the Access Profile List window and then use the drop down menu to select a Profile ID between 7 and 512 click the IPv6 ACL radio button and then use the drop down menu to select 184 a protocol TC
306. r the month that DST will end To Time in HH MM Enter the time DST will end DST Annual Settings Using annual mode will enable DST seasonal time adjustment Annual mode requires that the DST beginning and ending date be specified concisely For example specify to begin DST on April 3 and end DST on October 14 From Month Enter the month DST will start on each year From Day Enter the day of the week DST will start on each year From Time in Enter the time of day DST will start on each year HH MM To Month Enter the month DST will end each year To Day Enter the date DST will end each year To Time in HH MM Enter the time of day that DST will end each year Click Apply to implement changes made in this window 36 SMTP Settings SMTP or Simple Mail Transfer Protocol is a function of the Switch that will send switch events to mail recipients based on e mail addresses entered in the window below The Switch is to be configured as a client of SMTP while the server is a remote device that will receive messages from the Switch place the appropriate information into an e mail and deliver it to recipients configured on the Switch This can benefit the Switch administrator by simplifying the management of small workgroups or wiring closets increasing the speed of handling emergency Switch events and enhancing security by recording questionable events occurring on the Switch Users can set up the SMTP server for the Switch al
307. r the session termination There are eight possible reasons for termination 1 Supplicant Logoff 2 Port Failure 3 Supplicant Restart 4 Reauthentication Failure 5 AuthControlledPortControl set to ForceUnauthorized 6 Port re initialization 7 Port Administratively Disabled 8 Not Terminated Yet UserName The User Name representing the identity of the Supplicant PAE 231 Authenticator Diagnostics This window contains the diagnostic information regarding the operation of the Authenticator associated with each port An entry appears in this table for each port that supports the Authenticator function To view the Authenticator Diagnostics window click Monitoring gt Port Access Control gt Authenticator Diagnostics Figure 7 22 Authenticator Diagnostics window The following fields can be viewed Parameter Description Port The identification number assigned to the Port by the System in which the Port resides Connect Enter Counts the number of times that the state machine transitions to the CONNECTING state from any other state Connect LogOff Counts the number of times that the state machine transitions from CONNECTING to DISCONNECTED as a result of receiving an EAPOL Logoff message Counts the number of times that the state machine transitions from CONNECTING to AUTHENTICATING as a result of an EAP Response Identity message being received from the Supplicant Counts the number of times that the stat
308. raffic Storm has been cleared by the Switch only Both Will send Storm Trap messages when a Traffic Storm has been both detected and cleared by the Switch This function cannot be implemented in the Hardware mode When Drop is chosen in the Action field 129 xStack DES 3200 10 18 28 28F Layer 2 Ethernet Managed Switch User Manual Click Apply to implement the settings made NOTE Traffic Control cannot be implemented on ports that are set for Link Aggregation Port Trunking NOTE Ports that are in the Shutdown rest mode will be seen as Discarding in Spanning Tree windows and implementations though these ports will still be forwarding BPDUs to the Switch s CPU NOTE Ports that are in Shutdown rest mode will be seen as link down in all windows and screens until the user recovers these ports Queue Bandwidth Control Settings The queue bandwidth control settings are used to place a ceiling on the transmitting data rates for the priority queue of the port To view this window click QoS gt Queue Bandwidth Control Settings Fram Port To Port From Gos To Gos Max Rate 64 1024000 Por o llo o No Limit Queue Bandwidth Control Table On Port 1 Queue Max Rate Kbit sec 0 No Limit Ho Limit No Limit Ho Limit Queue Bandwidth Control Table On Port 2 Queue Max Rate Kbit sec D No Limit Ho Limit No Limit Ho Limit Queve Bandwidth Control Table On Port 3 Queue Max Rate Kbit s
309. rame size of 1536 bytes with a maximum size of 2048 bytes can be transmitted by the Switch To view this window click L2 Features gt Jumbo Frame Jumbo Frame Disabled Enabled Current Status The maximum size of Jumbo frame is 2048 bytes Figure 3 1 Jumbo Frame window Click Apply to implement changes made 60 VLANs Understanding IEEE 802 1 p Priority Priority tagging is a function defined by the IEEE 802 1p standard designed to provide a means of managing traffic on a network where many different types of data may be transmitted simultaneously It is intended to alleviate problems associated with the delivery of time critical data over congested networks The quality of applications that are dependent on such time critical data such as video conferencing can be severely and adversely affected by even very small delays in transmission Network devices that are in compliance with the IEEE 802 1p standard have the ability to recognize the priority level of data packets These devices can also assign a priority label or tag to packets Compliant devices can also strip priority tags from packets This priority tag determines the packet s degree of expeditiousness and determines the queue to which it will be assigned Priority tags are given values from O to 7 with O being assigned to the lowest priority data and 7 assigned to the highest The highest priority tag 7 is generally only used for data associated with video or aud
310. rd the bridge relay function side The MIP can however receive and respond to CFM messages from the bridge port CFM messages include Continuity Check Messages CCMs Loopback Messages LBMs and Link Trace Messages LTMs CFM uses standard Ethernet frames that can be sourced terminated processed and relayed by bridges Routers support limited CFM functions Continuity Check Messages CCMs are multicast messages exchanged among MEPs CCMs allow discovery of MEPs for other MEPs within a domain and allow MIPs to discover MEPs CCMs are confined to a maintenance domain CCMs are cataloged by MIPs are the same maintenance level and terminated by remote MEPs at the same maintenance level They are unidirectional no response solicitation and carry the status of the port on which the MEP is configured LBMs are similar to Ping or ICMP messages in that they indicate only whether a destination is reachable and do not allow discovery of each hop Link Trace Messages LTMs are multicast CFM frames sent by MEPs to identify adjacency relationships with remote MEPs and MIPs at the same maintenance level The message body of an LTM includes a destination MAC address of a target MEP that terminates the linktrace When a MIP or MEP receives an LTM it generates a unicast Link Trace Reply LTR to the initiating MEP It also forwards the LTM to the target MEP destination MAC address An LTM effectively traces the path to the target MEP or MIP Loopback Message
311. re as follows Icon Description 50 xStack DES 3200 10 18 28 28F Layer 2 Ethernet Managed Switch User Manual Tool Tips In the Topology view window the mouse plays an important role in configuration and in viewing device information Setting the mouse cursor over a specific device in the topology window tool tip will display the same information about a specific device as the Tree view does See the window below for an example de a Figure 2 45 Device Information Utilizing the Tool Tip Setting the mouse cursor over a line between two devices will display the connection speed between the two devices as shown below defaultieb 93 32 defaultieb os 324 SY default 0 10 074 3 YF idefault46 09 00 detault s3 1 3 00 default 0 24 04 default61 41 00 xyz defaults5 26 9 Figure 2 46 Port Speed Utilizing the Tool Tip 51 Right Click Right clicking on a device will allow the user to perform various functions depending on the role of the Switch in the SIM group and the icon associated with it Group Icon default 35 26 30 Figure 2 47 Right Clicking a Group Icon Property Device Name default 53 1 0 20 hiodule Mame DES 3200 28 L2 Switch Wac Address 00 32 28 53 1 0 70 Remote Port Mo Local Fort Mo Fort Speed Clase fee Applet Window Figure 2 48 Property window This window holds the following information Parameter Descripti
312. re being allowed access to the Network Understanding 802 1X Port based and Host based Network Access Control The original intent behind the development of 802 1X was to leverage the characteristics of point to point in LANs As any single LAN segment in such infrastructures has no more than two devices attached to it one of which is a Bridge Port The Bridge Port detects events that indicate the attachment of an active device at the remote end of the link or an active device becoming inactive These events can be used to control the authorization state of the Port and initiate the process of authenticating the attached device if the Port is unauthorized This is the Port based Network Access Control Port based Network Access Control a RADIUS Server Ethernet Switch AP TE CD SEA eS AE amp ASP 802 1X 802 1X 802 1X 802 1X 802 1X 802 1X 802 1X 802 1X 802 1X Client Client Client Client Client Client Client Client Client Network access controlled port 1 Network access uncontrolled port Figure 5 17 Example of Typical Port based Configuration Once the connected device has successfully been authenticated the Port then becomes Authorized and all subsequent traffic on the Port is not subject to access control restriction until an event occurs that causes the Port to become Unauthorized Hence if the Port is actually connected to a shared media LAN segment with more than one attached device successfully authe
313. re running the specified protocol For example the TACACS Authentication Server Groups can only have TACACS Authentication Server Hosts The administrator for the Switch may set up six different authentication techniques per user defined method list TACACS XTACACS TACACS RADIUS local none for authentication These techniques will be listed in an order preferable and defined by the user for normal user authentication on the Switch and may contain up to eight authentication techniques When a user attempts to access the Switch the Switch will select the first technique listed for authentication If the first technique goes through its Authentication Server Hosts and no authentication is returned the Switch will then go to the next technique listed in the server group for authentication until the authentication has been verified or denied or the list is exhausted Please note that when the user logins to the device successfully through TACACS XTACACS TACACS server or none method the user privilege level is the only level assigned If the user wants to get the administration privilege level the user must use the enable admin command to promote his privilege level However when the user logins to the device successfully through the RADIUS server or through the local method 3 kinds of privilege levels can be assigned to the user and the user can not use the enable admin command to promote to the admin privilege level NOTE TACACS
314. red to as tag unaware 802 1Q devices are referred to as tag aware Prior to the adoption of 802 1Q VLANs port based and MAC based VLANs were in common use These VLANs relied upon a Port VLAN ID PVID to forward packets A packet received on a given port would be assigned that port s PVID and then be forwarded to the port that corresponded to the packet s destination address found in the Switch s forwarding table If the PVID of the port that received the packet is different from the PVID of the port that is to transmit the packet the Switch will drop the packet 63 Within the Switch different PVIDs mean different VLANs remember that two VLANs cannot communicate without an external router So VLAN identification based upon the PVIDs cannot create VLANs that extend outside a given switch or switch stack Every physical port on a switch has a PVID 802 1Q ports are also assigned a PVID for use within the Switch If no VLANs are defined on the Switch all ports are then assigned to a default VLAN with a PVID equal to 1 Untagged packets are assigned the PVID of the port on which they were received Forwarding decisions are based upon this PVID in so far as VLANs are concerned Tagged packets are forwarded according to the VID contained within the tag Tagged packets are also assigned a PVID but the PVID is not used to make packet forwarding decisions the VID is Tag aware switches must keep a table to relate PVIDs within the Switch to V
315. rial Port Settings IP Address Settings IPv6 Interface Settings IPv6 Route Settings IPv6 Neighbor Settings Port Configuration Static ARP Settings User Accounts System Log Configuration DHCP Relay DHCP Auto Configuration Settings MAC Address Aging Time Web Settings Telnet Settings Password Encryption CLI Paging Settings Firmware Information SNTP Settings SMTP Settings MAC Notification Settings SNMP Settings Time Range Settings Single IP Management Gratuitous ARP ARP Spoofing Prevention Settings PPPoE Circuit ID Insertion Settings 12 Device Information This window contains the main settings for all major functions on the Switch and appears automatically when you log on To return to the Device Information window click the DES 3200 Series folder The Device Information window shows the Switch s MAC Address assigned by the factory and unchangeable the Boot PROM Version Firmware Version the Hardware Version and other information about different settings on the Switch This information is helpful to keep track of PROM and firmware updates and to obtain the Switch s MAC address for entry into another network device s address table if necessary In addition this window displays the status of functions on the Switch to quickly assess their current global status Some functions are hyper linked to their configuration window for easy access from the Device Information window Device Information Device Type DES
316. rmal Profile ID Access ID Profile Type summary Action Figure 6 98 ACL Finder window ACL Flow Meter This window offers flow bandwidth control used to limit the bandwidth of the ingress traffic When users create an ACL rule to filter packets a metering rule can be created to associate with this ACL rule to limit traffic The step of bandwidth is 64kbps Due to limited metering rules not all ACL rules can associate with a metering rule To open this window click ACL gt ACL Flow Meter View All Delete All Mode Modify Display Delete Figure 6 99 ACL Flow Meter window The following fields may be configured 207 Parameter Description Profile ID The pre configured Profile ID for which to configure the Flow Metering parameters Access ID The pre configured Access ID for which to configure the Flow Metering parameters 1 65535 Enter the appropriate information and click Find The entries will be displayed on the lower half of the table To edit an entry click the corresponding Modify button To delete an entry click the corresponding Delete button To add a new entry click the Add button which will display the following window for the user to configure Profile ID Access ID 1 65534 Rate 64 1024000 Kbps Burst Size 0 1 01 6 Kbyte Action Violate Permit Drop C Replace DSCP 0 63 Mode Single rate Two Calor Figure 6 100 ACL Flow Meter Configuration window The following fi
317. rol packet transferred between end nodes and a MLD router When the Switch discovers that this route is requesting multicast traffic it adds the port directly attached to it into the correct IPv6 multicast table and begins the process of forwarding multicast traffic to that port This entry in the multicast routing table records the port the VLAN ID and the associated multicast IPv6 multicast group address and then considers this port to be a active listening port The active listening ports are the only ones to receive multicast group data The Switch supports both MLD Snooping version 1 and MLD version 2 MLD Control Messages If implementing MLD snooping version 1 three types of messages are transferred between devices These three messages are all defined by three ICMPv6 packet headers labeled 130 131 and 132 1 Multicast Listener Query Version 1 Similar to the IGMPv2 Host Membership Query for IPv4 and labeled as 130 in the ICMPv6 packet header this message is sent by the router to ask if any link is requesting multicast data There are two types of MLD query messages emitted by the router The General Query is used to advertise all multicast addresses that are ready to send multicast data to all listening ports and the Multicast Specific query which advertises a specific multicast address that is also ready These two types of messages are distinguished by a multicast destination address located in the IPv6 header and a multicast a
318. rt Auto denotes auto negotiation between 10 and 100 Mbps devices in full or half duplex The Auto setting allows the port to automatically determine the fastest settings the device the port is connected to can handle and then to use those settings The other options are Auto 10M Half 10M Full 100M Half and 100M Full 1000M Full Master 1000M Full Slave and 1000M Full There is no automatic adjustment of port settings with any option other than Auto The Switch allows the user to configure two types of gigabit connections 1000M Full_M and 1000M Full_S Gigabit connections only support full duplex connections and take on certain characteristics that are different from the other choices listed The 1000M Full Master and 1000M Full Slave parameters refer to connections running a 1000BASE T cable for connection between the Switch port and other device capable of a gigabit connection The master setting 1000M Full Master will allow the port to advertise capabilities related to duplex speed and physical layer type The master setting will also determine the master and slave relationship between the two connected physical layers This relationship is necessary for establishing the timing control between the two physical layers The timing control is set on a master physical layer by a local source The slave setting 1000M Full Slave uses loop timing where the timing comes from a data stream received from the master If one connection is set for 1000
319. ry LateColl Counts the number of times that a collision is detected later than 512 bit times into the transmission of a packet ExColl Excessive Collisions The number of packets for which transmission failed due to excessive collisions SingColl Single Collision Frames The number of successfully transmitted packets for which transmission is inhibited by more than one collision An estimate of the total number of collisions on this network segment Show Hide Check whether or not to display ExDefer CRCError LateColl ExColl SingColl and Collision errors Clicking this button clears all statistics counters on this window View Table Clicking this button instructs the Switch to display a table rather than a line graph View Graphic Clicking this button instructs the Switch to display a line graph rather than a table 222 xStack DES 3200 10 18 28 28F Layer 2 Ethernet Managed Switch User Manual Port Access Control The following six windows are used to monitor 802 1X statistics of the Switch on a per port basis RADIUS Authentication This table contains information concerning the activity of the RADIUS authentication client on the client side of the RADIUS authentication protocol To view the RADIUS Authentication window click Monitoring gt Port Access Control gt RADIUS Authentication RADIUS Authentication Oy Saf Clear D Link D Link D Link Figure 7 17 RADIUS Authentication window The user may
320. s Click Add to implement the changes made To re configure the MA select it and click on the Edit button To adda MEP click the Add MEP buiton MA information presented in the table includes the following Parameter Description MIP None Don t create MIPs Auto MIPs can always be created on any ports in this MA if that port is not configured with a This is the control MEP of that MA creation of MIPs Explicit MIP can be created on any ports in this MA only if the next existent lower level has a MEP configured on that port and that port is not configured with a MEP of this MA Defer Inherit the setting configured for the maintenance domain that this MA is associated with This is the default value SenderID None Don t transmit sender ID TLV This is the default value Chassis Transmit sender ID TLV with chassis ID information This is the control Manage Transmit sender ID TLV with manage address information transmission of the Chassis Manage Transmit sender ID TLV with chassis ID information and manage address sender ID TLV information Defer Inherit the setting configured for the maintenance domain that this MA is associated with This is the default value CCM 10ms 10 milliseconds Not recommended For test purpose 100ms 100 milliseconds Not recommended For test purpose This is the CCM 1sec One second interval 10sec Ten seconds This is the default value 1min One minute 10min Ten minutes
321. s LBMs are similar to Ping or ICMP messages in that they indicate only whether a destination is reachable and do not allow the discovery of each hop CE Operator A Operator B CE MEP MIP mip MEP H 7 m U gt v_ P EE a T Figure 3 59 OAM Domain Architecture Maintenance Association MA Boundaries of an Administrator s scope of monitoring part of the network Maintenance Domain MD A level of monitoring within the hierarchy Maintenance End Points MEP End Points of the MA or MD Maintenance Intermediate Points MIP Intermediate Points within MA or MD Note CE Customer Equipment 115 CFM Settings To view this window click L2 Features gt CFM gt CFM Settings CFM Global Settings CFM State Enabled Disabled All MPs Reply LTRs Enabled Disabled CFM MD Settings Total Entries 1 MO Name MIP Creation sender ID TLV Figure 3 60 CFM Settings window The following parameters can be set Parameter Description CFM State To enable or disable the CFM feature All MPs Reply LTRs To enable or disable all Maintenance Points MEPs and MIPs to reply Link Trace Reply LTR message These are used with Link Trace Messages to trace a path from a MEP to another MEP or MIP CFM MD To enter the maintenance domain name A maintenance domain name can be up to 22 characters long Level To select the maintenance domain level Lev
322. s as the or part of the criterion for forwarding IPv4 Address Tick either Source IP Mask and enter the IPv4 source address mask or Destination IP Mask and enter the IPV4 destination address mask ICMP Tick ICMP to specify that the Switch will examine the Internet Control Message Protocol ICMP field within each packet Tick ICMP Type to specify that the access profile will apply to this ICMP type value Tick ICMP Code to specify that the access profile will apply to this ICMP code value Tick IGMP to instruct the Switch to examine the Internet Group Management Protocol IGMP field in each frame s header Tick IGMP Type to further specify that the access profile will apply an IGMP type value Y Tick TCP to use the TCP port number contained in an incoming packet as the forwarding criterion Ticking TCP requires specifying a source port mask and or a destination port mask The user may also identify which flag bits to filter Flag bits are parts of a packet that determine what to do with the packet The user may filter packets by filtering certain flag bits within the packets by checking the boxes corresponding to the flag bits of the TCP field T Source Port Mask 0 FFFF Tick and specify a TCP port mask for the source port to filter in hex form hex Ox0 Oxffff Destination Port Mask O FFFF Tick and specify a TCP port mask for the destination port to filter in hex form hex Ox0 Oxffff TCP Flag Bits Tick
323. s from down to up or when an EAPOL start frame is received The Switch then requests the identity of the client and begins relaying authentication messages between the client and the authentication server The default setting is Auto This allows the 802 1X Authenticator settings to be applied on a per port basis Select Authenticator to apply the settings to the port When the setting is activated A user must pass the authentication process to gain access to the network Select None disable 802 1X functions on the port Capability Sets the administrative controlled direction to either in or both If In is selected control is only exerted over incoming traffic through the port you selected in the first field If Both are selected control is exerted over both incoming and outgoing traffic through the controlled port selected in the first field Forward EAPOL This enables or disables the Switch retransmit EAPOL PDU Request on a per port basis PDU On Port Click Apply to implement your configuration changes 802 1X User To create a new 802 1X User enter a user name and password then reconfirm the password and click Apply the new user will be displayed in the lower half of the table To delete an entry click the corresponding Delete button To configure the 802 1X User click Security gt 802 1X gt 802 1X User 802 1X User Password Confirm Password SA a A Note Password User Name should be less than 15 characters
324. s in the ring are oriented to the ring itself Each node on the ring has an East port and West port The West port of one node is linked to the East port of the adjacent node in the ring Specifies the port as the east ring port ERPS uses cardinal direction terms East and West to designate how the ports on nodes in the ring are oriented to the ring itself Each node on the ring has an East port and West port The East port of one node is linked to the West port of the adjacent node in the ring If CFM Connectivity Fault Management and ERPS are used at the same time the R APS PDU is one of a suite of Ethernet OAM PDU The behavior for forwarding of R APS PDU should follow the Ethernet OAM If the MEL of R APS PDU is not higher than the level of the MEP maintenance entity group end point with the same VLAN on the ring ports the R APS PDU cannot be forwarded on the ring Click Apply to implement changes apply the enable or disable state for ERPS ERPS log and ERPS trap settings To create a new R APS VLAN enter the required settings in the window and click on the Create button 123 ERPS Settings continued Parameter Description RPL Port Specifies the ring port as the Ring Protection Link RPL port The RPL remains idle and blocks traffic when all links on the ring are functioning If there is a link failure on the ring however the RPL port is unblocked by the RPL Owner node in order to allow an alternate path ar
325. s may be set or viewed Parameter Description Pot Use the drop down menu to choose the port that will display statistics Time Interval Select the desired setting between 7s and 60s where s stands for seconds The default value is one second Record Number Select number of times the Switch will be polled between 20 and 200 The default value is 200 Bytes Counts the number of bytes received on the port Counts the number of packets received on the port Counts the total number of good packets that were received by a unicast address Counts the total number of good packets that were received by a multicast address Broadcast Counts the total number of good packets that were received by a broadcast address Show Hide Check whether to display Bytes and Packets Clear Clicking this button clears all statistics counters on this window View Table Clicking this button instructs the Switch to display a table rather than a line graph View Graphic Clicking this button instructs the Switch to display a line graph rather than a table 215 ay 5 A OOC A ff Ta e rf a fais Soa LA QO ik L AIII xStack DES 3200 10 18 28 28F Layer 2 Ethernet Managed Switch User Manual UMB_cast Rx These windows display the UMB_ cast Rx packets on the Switch To select a port to view these statistics for select the port by using the Port pull down menu The user may also use the real time graphic of the Switch at the top of the Web p
326. s the Authenticator State for individual ports on a selected device A polling interval between 1s and 60s seconds can be set using the drop down menu at the top of the window and clicking OK The information on this window is described as follows Parameter Description MAC Address The MAC Address of the device of the corresponding index number Auth PAE State The Authenticator PAE State value can be Initialize Disconnected Connecting Authenticating Authenticated Aborting Held Force Auth Force _Unauth or N A N A Not Available indicates that the port s authenticator capability is disabled Backend State The Backend Authentication State can be Request Response Success Fail Timeout Idle Initialize or N A N A Not Available indicates that the port s authenticator capability is disabled Port Status Controlled Port Status can be Authorized Unauthorized or N A 227 xStack DES 3200 10 18 28 28F Layer 2 Ethernet Managed Switch User Manual Authenticator Statistics This window contains the statistics objects for the Authenticator PAE associated with each port An entry appears in this table for each port that supports the Authenticator function To view the Authenticator Statistics click Monitoring gt Port Access Control gt Authenticator Statistics AUmentiCator Authenticator Statistics Time Interval TI Rx Star ie am ME m ati a Ri Ra pra fra fr pb ma J co bo ao yoo 7 oy Hs op fe
327. s the transmission of data between the layers The primary purpose of IP MAC port binding is to restrict access to the Switch to a number of authorized users Only authorized clients can access the Switch s port by checking the pair of IP MAC addresses with the pre configured database If an unauthorized user tries to access an IP MAC port binding enabled port the system will block the access by dropping its packet The maximum number of IP MAC port binding entries is dependent on chip capability e g the ARP table size and storage size of the device Active and inactive entries use the same database The maximum entry number is 500 The creation of authorized users can be manually configured by CLI or Web The function is port based meaning a user can enable or disable the function on the individual port 138 IMP Binding Global Settings This window is used to enable or disable the Trap Log State and DHCP Snoop state on the Switch The Trap Log field will enable and disable the sending of trap log messages for IP MAC port binding When enabled the Switch will send a trap message to the SNMP agent and the Switch log when an ARP packet is received that doesn t match the IP MAC port binding configuration set on the Switch To view this window click Security gt IP MAC Port Binding gt IMP Binding Global Settings Trap Log Disabled v DHCP Snoop State Disabled ARP Inspection Disa bled Recover Learning Ports te
328. set packet content chunks within a packet at one time and specifies the frame content offset mask and layer There are eleven packet content chunk offsets that can be configured A packet content chunk mask presents two bytes Up to eleven packet content offset chunks can be selected Offset 1 0 31 mask Layer _ Offset 2 0 31 mask Layer _ Offset 3 0 31 mask Layer _ Offset 4 0 31 mask Layer _ Offset 5 0 31 mask Layer _ Offset 6 0 31 mask Layer _ Offset 7 0 31 mask Layer __ Offset 8 0 31 mask Layer _ Offset 9 0 31 mask Layer _ Offset 10 0 31 mask Layer __ Offset 11 0 31 mask____ Layer _ With this advanced unique Packet Content Mask also known as Packet Content Access Control List ACL the D Link xStack switch family can effectively mitigate some network attacks like the common ARP Spoofing attack that is wide spread today This is why the Packet Content ACL is able to inspect any specified content of a packet in different protocol layers Click Apply to implement changes made Click Create to view the new Access Profile List entry in the Access Profile List window shown below To add another Access Profile click Add ACL Profile To delete a profile click the corresponding Delete button To view the specific configurations for an entry click the Show Details button To add a rule to the Access Profile entry click the Add View Rules button To remove all listed profiles click on the Delete
329. specify which part or parts of a frame the Switch will examine such as the MAC source address or the IP destination address The second part is entering the criteria the Switch will use to determine what to do with the frame The entire process is described below CPU Access Profile List In the following window the user may globally enable or disable the CPU Interface Filtering State mechanism by using the radio buttons to change the running state To access this window click ACL gt CPU Access Profile List Choose Enabled to enable CPU packets to be scrutinized by the Switch and Disabled to disallow this scrutiny CPU Interface Filtering State Disabled Enabled Apply Add CPU ACL Profile Total Used Rule Entries Total Unused Rule Entries 0 15 Profile D Profile Type Owner Type By Figure 6 72 CPU Access Profile List window This window displays the CPU Access Profile List entries created on the Switch To view the configurations for an entry click the corresponding Show Details button once an entry has been created To add an entry to the CPU Access Profile List window click the Add CPU ACL Profile button This will open the Add CPU ACL Profile window Click the Select button to see the window as shown below To remove all CPU Access Profile List entries click the Delete All button The Switch supports four CPU Access Profile types Ethernet or MAC address based profile configuration IP IPv4 address b
330. ss Profile List Figure 6 1 ACL Configuration Wizard window The following parameters can be configured Parameter Description Select the type of ACL you wish to create either Normal or CPU Profile ID 1 512 Enter a unique identifier number for this profile set This value can be set from 7 to 512 Access ID 1 65535 Type in a unique identifier number for this access This value can be set from 7 to 65535 From Use the drop down menu to select from MAC Address IPv4 Address IPv6 or Any To Use the drop down menu to select from MAC Address IPv4 Address or Any When IPv6 is selected the user can only enter the IPv6 source address or the IPv6 destination address at any one time 175 Service Type Use the drop down menu to select from VLAN Name Ethernet Type 802 1P or Any Select Permit to specify that the packets that match the access profile are forwarded by the Switch according to any additional rule added see below Select Deny to specify the packets that match the access profile are not forwarded by the Switch and will be filtered Select Mirror to specify that packets that match the access profile are mirrored to a port defined in the config mirror port command Port Mirroring must be enabled and a target port must be set Select between Rate Limiting Change 1P Priority and Replace DSCP Enter a range of ports to be configured Click Apply to implement changes made Access Profile List Creati
331. ss tdci 15 PVS Adaress SUING S ii daa loo did 17 PVG ROUTE SUIS a a do died 18 IPVG INGIGNDOF SSMINGS mortal cli ici sica 18 POr Contigua aiii ice 19 ls eo casted nt es ae ad aes ee et eee ced see ieee TE 19 POR Description SENINGS Vu E A one bar Beles A A A A A se aie 21 POR ENCISO otr caes 21 tallo ARF SENOS td di did ida 22 US ACC e o 23 System LOG COMNGUFAUOM A ici ds 24 SVEM Log SEUINGS ices sil etd ecto dd a 24 System LOG SOV CM di e A a 24 DAGA Rel anat ta taa o e dd toda eo dia 26 DHCP Relay Global SEUA OS a o 26 DACP Relay Inte nace SOM rerni A A e dci 29 DEICP Local Relay Scitnas ee ee ee ee ee 29 DACP AUO C OMMGUIPATION SNS a aaa 30 MAC Address Aging TIME A 30 Web Sc MNJ Suraan E oia 31 Tenet Suns lero 31 Password ENCly PIN a a na lavdba dua abddadiabendstenhandaoedwAeu liad 31 GCLINP AGING SCMINGS O 32 Aci ees suet oer enzo teeter ieee ini E ee tar Uva en ee eee ee eee ee ener eee 33 SNTE SOWING sita 34 TMA SSC MING S tit tt it ee aed ree ii 34 TimeZone SSC LING Si AS ees ea alc eee naan T 35 SMTP SUIS a A a a A 37 SMTP SENCE SENINI S er a a a ta 37 RC 38 MAC Notification SEAS o 38 MAG Notification Global Seting Serra Rei 38 MAC Noica POM SEAS a do a o o OS 38 SNMP SEMNO Saito iio idilio 39 SNMP View TAS ada 40 SNMP Group Tables oi a a e le e dao dl e aces een 41 SNMP USS Tabla AE ret 42 SNMP Sommunity Table una A El A AI 43 Il HOSI RE o AA A a a ee eee ee ee en eee eee eee ee ene eo eee rere 44 SNMP Trap
332. st defined by the user click the corresponding Delete button To modify a Login Method List click on its corresponding Edit button To define a Login Method List set the following parameters and click Apply Parameter Description Method List Name Enter a method list name defined by the user of up to 15 characters Priority 1 2 3 4 The user may add one or a combination of up to four of the following authentication methods to this method list tacacs Adding this parameter will require the user to be authenticated using the TACACS protocol from a remote TACACS server xtacacs Adding this parameter will require the user to be authenticated using the XTACACS protocol from a remote XTACACS server tacacs Adding this parameter will require the user to be authenticated using the TACACS protocol from a remote TACACS server radius Adding this parameter will require the user to be authenticated using the RADIUS protocol from a remote RADIUS server server_group Adding this parameter will require the user to be authenticated using a user defined server group previously configured on the Switch local Adding this parameter will require the user to be authenticated using the local user account database on the Switch none Adding this parameter will require no authentication to access the Switch Enable Method Lists This window is used to set up Method Lists to promote users with user level privileges to Administra
333. storm has cleared Port lt portNum gt Broadcast storm has cleared Broadcast storm has cleared Informational Multicast storm occurrence Port lt portNum gt Multicast storm is occurring Multicast storm cleared Port lt portNum gt Multicast storm has cleared Port lt portNum gt Multicast storm has cleared Multicast storm has cleared Informational Port shutdown due to a Port lt portNum gt is currently shutdown due to a packet Warnin packet storm storm 9 Conflict IP was detected with this device IP lt ipaddr gt MAC lt macaddr gt Port lt portNum gt ee Informational lt interface gt 802 1X Radius server assigned Radius server lt server_ip gt assigned VID lt VLAN_ID gt to hfornatonal l VID to port Port lt portNum gt Account lt user_account gt Radius server assigned Radius server lt server_ip gt assigned ingress bandwith ingress bandwith Kbits to lt bandwidth_value gt Kbits to Port lt portNum gt Account Informational port lt user_account gt Conflict IP was detected with this device Radius server assigned ingress bandwith no limit to port Radius server lt server_ip gt assigned ingress bandwith no limit to Port lt portNum gt Account lt user_account gt eleven Radius server assigned Radius server lt server_ip gt assigned egress bandwidth egress bandwidth Kbits to lt bandwidth_value gt Kbits to Port lt portNum gt Account Informational port lt user_account gt
334. supported devices to gain limited access to the network due to lack of the proper 802 1X software or incompatible devices such as computers running Windows 98 or lower operating systems or the need for guests to gain access to the network without full authorization To supplement these circumstances this switch now implements 802 1X Guest VLANs These VLANs should have limited access rights and features separate from other VLANs on the network To implement 802 1X Guest VLANs the user must first create a VLAN on the network with limited rights and then enable it as an 802 1X guest VLAN Then the administrator must configure the guest accounts accessing the Switch to be placed in a Guest VLAN when trying to access the Switch Upon initial entry to the Switch the client wishing services on the Switch will need to be authenticated by a remote RADIUS Server or local authentication on the Switch to be placed in a fully operational VLAN If authenticated and the authenticator posseses the VLAN placement information that client will be accepted into the fully operational target VLAN and normal switch functions will be open to the client If the authenticator does not have target VLAN placement information the client will be returned to its originating VLAN Yet if the client is denied authentication by the authenticator it will be placed in the Guest VLAN where it has limited rights and access The adjacent figure should give the user a better u
335. t 28 Figure 7 31 LLDP Local Port Information window Port Description Figure 7 32 LLDP Remote Port Information window xStack DES 3200 10 18 28 28F Layer 2 Ethernet Managed Switch User Manual Ethernet OAM This folder contains two windows to view Ethernet OAM Event Log information and Ethernet OAM Statistics Browse Ethernet OAM Event Log This window allows the user to view the Ethernet OAM event log information The Switch can buffer up to 1000 event logs The event log will provide and record detailed information about each OAM event Specify the port number and port list you wish to view and click Find To remove an entry enter the appropriate information and click Clear To view this window click Monitoring gt Ethernet OAM gt Browse Ethernet OAM Event Log as shown below Port List 8 0 1 4 6 E EMi Pons Local Event Statistics Error Symbol Event Error Frame Event Error Frame Period Event Errored Frame Seconds Event Crying Gasp Critical Event Error Symbol Event Error Frame Event Error Frame Pernod Event Errored Frame Seconds Event Dying Gasp Critical Event Ethernet OAM Event Log Table inde Location Time Stamp Value Abra cay Threshold Accumulated errors Figure 7 33 Browse Ethernet OAM Event Log window Browse Ethernet OAM Statistics This window displays the Ethernet OAM Statistic information on each port of the Switch To clear information for a particular port or list of por
336. t Setting Instance ID Internal Path Cost 1 200000000 Priority o l Port 1 Settings 5 Designated Bridge Internal Path Cost Priority 200000 Disabled Disabled Figure 3 47 MSTP Port Information window The following parameters can be viewed or set Parameter Description Pot Use the drop down menu to select a port m Displays the MSTI ID of the instance being configured An entry of 0 in this field denotes the CIST default MSTI Internal Path Cost This parameter is set to represent the relative cost of forwarding packets to specified ports 1 200000000 when an interface is selected within a STP instance A lower Internal cost represents a quicker transmission Priority Select a value between 0 and 240 to set the priority for the port interface A higher priority will designate the interface to forward packets first A lower number denotes a higher priority Click Apply to implement changes made Forwarding amp Filtering This folder contains windows for Unicast Forwarding and Multicast Forwarding Unicast Forwarding Settings To view this window click L2 Features gt Forwarding amp Filtering gt Unicast Forwarding Settings VLAN ID 1 4094 MAC Address 00 00 00 00 00 00 o Y VLAN ID VLAN Mame MAC Address Figure 3 48 Unicast Forwarding Settings window 103 To add or edit an entry define the following parameters and then click Add Modify Parameter Description VLAN ID 1 4094
337. t number of times the Switch will be polled between 20 and 200 The default value is 200 CRCError Counts otherwise valid packets that did not end on a byte octet boundary The number of packets detected that are less than the minimum permitted packets size of 64 bytes and have a good CRC Undersize packets usually indicate collision fragments a nor mal network occurrence OverSize Counts valid packets received that were longer than 1518 octets and less than the MAX_PKT_LEN Internally MAX_PKT_LEN is equal to 1536 The number of packets less than 64 bytes with either bad framing or an invalid CRC These are normally the result of collisions Counts invalid packets received that were longer than 1518 octets and less than the MAX_PKT_LEN Internally MAX_PKT_LEN is equal to 1536 The number of packets that are dropped by this port since the last Switch reboot Show Hide Check whether or not to display CRCError UnderSize OverSize Fragment Jabber Drop and SymbolErr errors Clicking this button clears all statistics counters on this window View Table Clicking this button instructs the Switch to display a table rather than a line graph View Graphic Clicking this button instructs the Switch to display a line graph rather than a table 220 xStack DES 3200 10 18 28 28F Layer 2 Ethernet Managed Switch User Manual Transmitted TX To select a port to view these statistics for select the port by using the Port pull dow
338. t occurs in the MS the CS will keep this MS information in its database and when a MS has been rediscovered it will add the MS back into the SIM tree automatically No configuration will be necessary to rediscover these switches There are some instances where pre saved MS switches cannot be rediscovered For example if the Switch is still powered down if it has become the member of another group or if it has been configured to be a Commander Switch the rediscovery process cannot occur 2 The topology map now includes new features for connections that are a member of a port trunking group It will display the speed and number of Ethernet connections creating this port trunk group 3 This version will support multiple switch upload and downloads for firmware configuration files and log files as follows e Firmware The switch now supports multiple MS firmware downloads from a TF TP server e Configuration Files This switch now supports multiple downloading and uploading of configuration files both to for configuration restoration and from for configuration backup MS s using a TF TP server e Log The switch now supports uploading multiple MS log files to a TFTP server 4 The user may zoom in and zoom out when utilizing the topology window to get a better more defined view of the configurations 47 Single IP Settings All switches are set as Candidate CaS switches as their factory default configuration and Single
339. t of further authentication attempts Command line interface users will have to wait 60 seconds before another authentication attempt Telnet and web users will be disconnected from the Switch The user may set the number of attempts from 7 to 255 The default setting Is 3 Click Apply to implement changes made Application Authentication Settings This window is used to configure switch configuration applications console Telnet SSH web for login at the user level and at the administration level Enable Admin utilizing a previously configured method list To view the following window click Security gt Access Authentication Control gt Application Authentication Settings Login Method List lt lt Enable Method List Console default default Telnet defaut Oo default O SSH default default HTTP default default Figure 5 34 Application s Authentication Settings window The following parameters can be set Parameter Description Application Lists the configuration applications on the Switch The user may configure the Login Method List and Enable Method List for authentication for users utilizing the Console Command Line Interface application the Telnet application SSH and the WEB HTTP application 162 Login Method List Using the pull down menu configure an application for normal login on the user level utilizing a previously configured method list The us
340. t parameters of the Master Port in the calculation of port cost and in determining the state of the link aggregation group If two redundant link aggregation groups are configured on the Switch STP will block one entire group in the same way STP will block a single port that has a redundant link To view this window click L2 Features gt Port Trunking Algorithm MAC Source Edit Trunking information Group ID 41 14 Pes Statice w Master Port 0 w State Disabled 3 4 al T 8 q TER Be A See spes sia j 2 Fa 9 26 26 2 28 E E E E Total Entries 0 Group ID Type Master Port Member Ports Active Ports Status Flooding Ports Mote Maximum 8 ports in a static or LACP group Figure 3 21 Port Trunking window The following fields can be set Parameter Description The algorithm that the Switch uses to balance the load across the ports that make up the port trunk group is defined by this definition Choose MAC Source MAC Destination MAC Source Dest IP Source IP Destination or IP Source Dest See the Link Aggregation section of this manual Group ID 1 14 Select an ID number for the group between 7 and 74 Type This pull down menu allows you to select between Static and LACP Link Aggregation Control Protocol LACP allows for the automatic detection of links in a Port Trunking Group Master Port Choose the Master Port for the trunk group using the pull down menu Trunk groups can be toggled
341. t the top of the menu to enable or disable the DHCP Server Screening trap and log state Set the Illegal Server Log Suppression Duration time to 1 minute 5 minutes default or 30 minutes Click the Apply button to apply the settings To configure per port screening settings use the pull down menus to configure the following parameters Parameter Description From Port To Port A consecutive group of ports may be configured starting with the selected port Choose Enabled to enable the DHCP Server Screening function or Disabled to disable it The default is Disabled After setting the previous parameters click Apply to allow your changes to be implemented The DHCP Port Information Table shows which ports are enabled or disabled for DHCP Sever Screening 173 DHCP Offer Permit Entry Setting This function allows the user not only to restrict all DHCP Server packets but also to receive any specified DHCP server packet by any specified DHCP client it is useful when one or more DHCP servers are present on the network and both provide DHCP services to different distinct groups of clients To view this window click Security gt DHCP Server Screening gt DHCP Offer Permit Entry Setting as shown below server IF Address Clients MAC Address Ports a NOAA DAI Ports Total Entries 0 Server IF Address Clients MAC Address Figure 5 45 DHCP Offer Permit Entry Setting menu The user may set the following parameters
342. t to the second TACACS host in the server group and so on until the list is exhausted At that point the Switch will restart the same sequence with the following protocol listed XTACACS If no authentication takes place using the XTACACS list the local account database set in the Switch is used to authenticate the user When the local method is used the privilege level will be dependent on the local account privilege configured on the Switch When the user logins to the device successfully through TACACS XTACACS TACACS server or none method the user privilege level is assigned only If the user wants to get admin privilege level the user must use the Enable Admin window to promote his privilege level See the Enable Admin part of this section for more detailed information But when the user logins to the device successfully through RADIUS server or local method three kinds of privilege levels can be assigned to the user and the user can not use the Enable Admin window to promote to admin privilege level To view the following window click Security gt Access Authentication Control gt Login Method Lists 165 Method List Name Max 15 characters of Priority 1 Priority 2 Priority 3 Priority 4 Apply Priority 1 Priority 2 Priority 3 Priority 4 Figure 5 38 Login Method Lists window The Switch contains one Method List that is set and cannot be removed yet can be modified To delete a Login Method Li
343. t will be dropped if the option 82 field already exists in the packet received from the DHCP client Keep The option 82 field will be retained if the option 82 field already exists in the packet received from the DHCP client DHCP Relay Agent This field is for you to enter the remote ID Tick Default to use the Switch s system MAC Information Option 82 address as the remote ID Remote ID Click Apply to implement any changes that have been made NOTE If the Switch receives a packet that contains the option 82 field from a DHCP client and the information checking feature is enabled the switch drops the packet because it is invalid However in some instances you might configure a client with the option 82 field In this situation you should disable the information check feature so that the switch does not remove the option 82 field from the packet You can configure the action that the switch takes when it receives a packet with existing option 82 information by configuring the DHCP Agent Information Option 82 Policy The Implementation of DHCP Information Option 82 on the Switch The config dhcp_relay option_82 command configures the DHCP relay agent information option 82 setting of the switch The formats for the circuit ID sub option and the remote ID sub option are as follows NOTE For the circuit ID sub option of a standalone switch the module field is always zero 27 Circuit ID sub option format a b C d e
344. table lists all possible entries and their corresponding meanings that will appear in the System Log of this Switch Category Event Description Log Information system System cold start System cold start en warm start System warm start Configuration saved to Configuration saved to flash Username lt username gt IP Informational flash lt ipaddr gt Configuration saved to Configuration saved to flash by console Username Informational flash by console lt username gt System log saved to flash System log saved to flash Username lt username gt IP hormatna lt ipaddr gt System log saved to flash System log saved to flash by console Username Informational by console lt username gt Configuration and log Configuration and log saved to flash Username enc saved to flash lt username gt IP lt ipaddr gt Configuration and log Configuration and log saved to flash by console i Informational saved to flash by console Username lt username gt Upload Downl Firmware upgraded Firmware upgraded successfully Username lt username gt successfully IP lt ipaddr gt Firmware upgraded by Firmware upgraded by console successfully Username eee Trees console successfully lt username gt Firmware upgrade was Firmware upgrade was unsuccessful Username Warning unsuccessful lt username gt IP lt ipaddr gt Firmware upgrade by Firmware upgrade by console was unsuccessful Warning console was unsuccessful Us
345. tablished regions on the network continuing to allow simple and full processing of frames regardless of administra tive errors in defining VLANs and their respective spanning trees Each switch utilizing the MSTP on a network will have a single MSTP configuration that will have the following three attributes 1 A configuration name defined by an alphanumeric string of up to 32 characters defined in the MST Configuration Identification window in the Configuration Name field 2 A configuration revision number named here as a Revision Level and found in the MST Configuration Identification window and 3 A 4094 element table defined here as a VID List in the MST Configuration Identification window which will associate each of the possible 4094 VLANs supported by the Switch for a given instance To utilize the MSTP function on the Switch three steps need to be taken 1 The Switch must be set to the MSTP setting found in the STP Bridge Global Settings window in the STP Version field 2 The correct spanning tree priority for the MSTP instance must be entered defined here as a Priority in the MSTI Config Information window when configuring MSTI ID settings 3 VLANs that will be shared must be added to the MSTP Instance ID defined here as a VID List in the MST Configuration Identification window when configuring an MSTI ID settings Rapid Spanning Tree The Switch implements three versions of the Spanning Tree Protocol the Mu
346. tate Node a a or Disabled Shutdown Apply Disabled shutdown Normal Disabled Shutdown Normal Disabled Shutdown Normal Disabled Shutdown Normal Disabled Shutdown Normal Disabled shutdown Normal Disabled shutdown Normal Disabled Shutdown Normal Disabled Shutdown Normal om on i po do 1 U oo Figure 3 25 BPDU Protection Settings window The fields that can be configured are described below Parameter Description BPDU Protection To enable or disable the BPDU Protection Global State to enable BPDU Attack Protection Global State globally The default state is Disabled Trap State To specify the trap state The default state is none Log State To specify the log state The default state is both Recover Time Specified the BPDU protection Auto Recovery timer The default value of the recovery timer is 60 Recover Time can be set between 60 and 1000000 seconds From Port To To select a range of ports to use for this configuration Port To enable or disable the mode for a specific port State Specified the BPDU protection mode The default mode is shutdown Drop Drop all received BPDU packets when the port enters under attack state Block Drop all packets include BPDU and normal packets when the port enters under attack state Shutdown Shut down the port when the port enters under attack state Click Apply for the menu
347. ted port Activity Active Active LACP ports are capable of processing and sending LACP control frames This allows LACP compliant devices to negotiate the aggregated link so the group may be changed dynamically as needs require In order to utilize the ability to change an aggregated port group that is to add or subtract ports from the group at least one of the participating devices must designate LACP ports as active Both devices must support LACP Passive LACP ports that are designated as passive cannot initially send LACP control frames In order to allow the linked port group to negotiate adjustments and make changes dynamically one end of the connection must have active LACP ports see above Click Apply to implement changes made 80 Traffic Segmentation Traffic segmentation is used to limit traffic flow from a single port to a group of ports on the Switch This method of segmenting the flow of traffic is similar to using VLANSs to limit traffic but is more restrictive lt provides a method of directing traffic that does not increase the overhead of the Switch CPU This window allows the user to view which ports on the Switch are allowed to forward packets to other ports on the Switch To configure new forwarding ports for a particular port select a port from the From Port and To Port drop down menus and click Apply To view this window click L2 Features gt Traffic Segmentation Traffic Segmentation Settings
348. terminology Typographical Conventions Convention Description In a command line square brackets indicate an optional entry For example copy filename means that optionally you can type copy followed by the name of the file Do not type the brackets Bold font Indicates a button a toolbar icon menu or menu item For example Open the File menu and choose Cancel Used for emphasis May also indicate system messages or prompts appearing on your screen For example You have mail Bold font is also used to represent filenames program names and commands For example use the copy command Boldface Typewriter Indicates commands and responses to prompts that must be typed exactly as printed in Font the manual Initial capital letter Indicates a window name Names of keys on the keyboard have initial capitals For example Click Enter Italics Indicates a window name or a field Also can indicate a variables or parameter that is replaced with an appropriate word or string For example type filename means that you should type the actual filename instead of the word shown in italic Menu Name gt Menu Menu Name gt Menu Option Indicates the menu structure Device gt Port gt Port Option Properties means the Port Properties menu option under the Port menu option that is located under the Device menu Notes Notices and Cautions E lj A NOTE indicates important information that helps you make better use of your device
349. th a default setting of 20 seconds IP Address The IP address of the ARP entry MAC Address The MAC address of the ARP entry After entering the IP Address and MAC Address of the Static ARP entry click Apply to implement the new entry To completely clear the Static ARP Settings click the Delete All button To modify a static ARP entry click the corresponding Edit button in the table To delete a static ARP entry click the corresponding Delete button in the table NOTE The Switch supports up to 255 static ARP entries 22 User Accounts Use this window to control user privileges create new users and view existing User Accounts To view this window click Configuration gt User Accounts Add User Accounts User Marne Password AE Access Right Admin i confirm Password Sa Mote Fasswordiser Mame should be less than 15 characters Total Entries 0 User Mame Access Right Old Password Mew Password Confirm Password Encryption Figure 2 12 User Accounts window The following fields can be set Parameter Description User Name The name of the user an alphanumeric string of up to 15 characters Enter a password for the new user Access Right There are two levels of user privileges Admin and User Some features and selections available to users with Admin privileges may not be available to those with User level privileges Table 2 1 below summarizes Admin and User level privileges Confirm Retype
350. the Switch click Configuration gt DHCP Relay gt DHCP Relay Interface Settings Interface Server IP fe 10 90 90 90 DHCP Relay Interface Table Figure 2 17 DHCP Relay Interface Settings window The following parameters may be configured or viewed Parameter Description interface The IP interface on the Switch that will be connected directly to the Server Enter the IP address of the DHCP server Up to four server IPs can be configured per IP Interface DHCP Local Relay Settings This function on the Switch allows configuration of the DHCP local relay for VLAN To view this window click Configuration gt DHCP Local Relay gt DHCP Local Relay Settings 29 DHCP Local Relay Operation State Disabled O Enabled DHCP Local Relay Settings VLAN Marne ID List DHCP Local Relay Table DHCP Local Relay VID LIST VID LIST DHCP Local Relay VID LIST Figure 2 18 DHCP Local Relay Settings window The following parameters may be configured Parameter Description DHCP Local Relay This is used to enable or disable DHCP Local Relay service on the Switch The default is Operation State Disabled VLAN Name Enter a name of the VLAN to be enabled by DHCP local relay VID List Enter a VLAN ID to be enabled by DHCP local relay This is used to enable or disable the DHCP local relay for the specified VLAN DHCP Auto Configuration Settings The DHCP automatic configuration function on
351. the Switch will load a previously saved configuration file for current use When DHCP auto configuration is Enabled on the Switch the DHCP reply will contain a configuration file and path name It will then request the file from the TFTP server specified in the reply To view this window click Configuration gt DHCP Auto Configuration Settings Auto Configuration State Enabled Disabled Timeout 1 65535 Sec Apply Figure 2 19 DHCP Auto Configuration Settings window When DHCP automatic configuration is Enabled the Switch becomes a DHCP client automatically after rebooting The DHCP server must have the TFTP server IP address and configuration file name and be configured to deliver this information in the data field of the DHCP reply packet The TFTP server must be running and have the requested configuration file in its base directory when the request is received from the Switch Consult the DHCP server and TFTP server software instructions for information on loading a configuration file If the Switch is unable to complete the automatic configuration process the previously saved local configuration file present in Switch memory will be loaded MAC Address Aging Time This table specifies the length of time a learned MAC Address will remain in the forwarding table without being accessed that is how long a learned MAC Address is allowed to remain idle To change this enter a value representing the MAC address age out time i
352. the VLAN that contains the port connected to the management station will have to be entered to access the Switch 5 Use the drop down Interface Admin State menu to select Enabled if it has not already been done NOTE The Switch s factory default IP address is 10 90 90 90 with a subnet mask of 255 0 0 0 and a default gateway of 0 0 0 0 To use the BOOTP or DHCP protocols to assign the Switch an IP address subnet mask and default gateway address select either BOOTP or DHCP 15 The IP Address Settings options are Parameter Description Allows the entry of an IPv4 address Subnet Mask and a Default Gateway for the Switch These fields should be of the form xxx xxx xxx xxx where each xxx is a number represented in decimal form between 0 and 255 This address should be a unique address on the network assigned for use by the network administrator The Switch will send out a DHCP broadcast request when it is powered up The DHCP protocol allows IP addresses network masks and default gateways to be assigned by a DHCP server If DHCP this option is set the Switch will first look for a DHCP server to provide it with this information before using the default or previously entered settings The Switch will send out a BOOTP broadcast request when it is powered up The BOOTP protocol allows IP addresses network masks and default gateways to be assigned by a central BOOTP server If this option is set the Switch will first look
353. the new password Password To add a new user enter the appropriate information and click Apply To modify or delete an existing user click on the Edit button for that user NOTICE In case of lost passwords or password corruption please refer to the Password Recovery Procedure Appendix in the DES 3200 Series CLI Reference Manual which will guide you through the steps necessary to resolve this issue Admin and User Privileges There are two levels of user privileges Admin and User Some menu selections available to users with Admin privileges may not be available to those with User privileges The following table summarizes the Admin and User privileges Management Admin User Configuration Read only Network Monitoring Read only Community Strings and Trap Stations Read only Update Firmware and Configuration Files No System Utilities No Factory Reset 23 User Account Management Table 2 1 Admin and User Privileges System Log Configuration This section contains information for configuring various attributes and properties for System Log Configurations including System Log Settings and System Log Host System Log Settings This window allows the user to enable or disable the System Log and specify the System Log Save Mode Settings To configure the system log settings click Configuration gt System Log Configuration gt System Log Settings SystemLog Disabled Enabled System Log Save Mo
354. the radio button to globally enable or disable the MAC based Access Control function on the Switch Use the pull down menu to choose the type of authentication to be used when authentication MAC addresses on a given port The user may choose between the following methods Local Use this method to utilize the locally set MAC address database as the authenticator for MAC based Access Control This MAC address list can be configured in the MAC based Access Control Local Database Settings window RADIUS Use this method to utilize a remote RADIUS server as the authenticator for MAC based Access Control Remember the MAC list must be previously set on the RADIUS server and the settings for the server must be first configured on the Switch Enter the password for the RADIUS server which is to be used for packets being sent requesting authentication The default password is default By default authentication failover is Disabled If RADIUS servers are unreachable authentication will fail When authentication failover is Enabled if RADIUS server authentication is unreachable the local database will do the authentication Enter a value for the maximum number of users between 7 and 128 The default is 128 169 Authorization Attributes When enabled authorized attributes for example VLAN 802 1p default priority and ACL assigned by the RADUIS server or local database Which attributes will be accepted depends on the individual module
355. the tunneling protocol in use in the case of a tunnel terminatior Tunnel Medium Type This attribute indicates the 6 802 Required transport medium being used Tunnel Private Group ID This attribute indicates group A string VID Required ID for a particular tunneled session 269 If the user has configured the VLAN attribute of the RADIUS server for example VID 3 and the 802 1X or MAC based Access Control authentication is successful the port will be added to VLAN 3 However if the user does not configure the VLAN attribute and authenticates successfully the port will be kept in its original VLAN If the VLAN attribute configured on the RADIUS server does not exist the port will not be assigned to the requested VLAN To assign ACL by RADIUS Server the proper parameters should be configured on the RADIUS Server The table below shows the parameters for an ACL The RADIUS ACL assignment is only used in MAC based Access Control The parameters of the Vendor Specific Attribute are Vendor ID Defines the vendor 171 DLINK Vendor Type Defines the attribute 2 for ACL profile Required 13 for ACL rule Attribute Specific Field Used to assign the ACL ACL Command Required profile or rule l For example ACL profile create access_profile ethernet vlan 0xFFF profile_id 100 ACL rule config access_profile profile_id 100 add access _id auto_assign ethernet vian_id default port all deny If the user has co
356. thenticating users to gain access to various wired or wireless devices on a specified Local Area Network by using a Client and Server based access control model This is accomplished by using a RADIUS server to authenticate users trying to access a network by relaying Extensible Authentication Protocol over LAN EAPOL packets between the Client and the Server The following figure represents a basic EAPOL packet Ethernet Frame Destination Type sm aa 4 i gt 5 re k a y a a 5 a l Protocal version ne Packet body we EAPOL packet Figure 5 11 The EAPOL Packet Utilizing this method unauthorized devices are restricted from connecting to a LAN through a port to which the user is connected EAPOL packets are the only traffic that can be transmitted through the specific port until authorization is granted The 802 1X Access Control method holds three roles each of which are vital to creating and maintaining a stable and working Access Control security method Authentication Client Anthenticator Server Network Port AAA Server aa a o Mostly RADIUS Access Point Ethernet Switch etc EAP Over LAN Encapsulated EAP EAP Over Wireless Messages typically on RADIUS 802 3 or 802 11 Figure 5 12 The three roles of 802 1X The following section will explain the three roles of Client Authenticator and Authentication Server in greater detail 144 Authentica
357. this window click Monitoring gt IGMP Snooping gt IGMP Snooping Host VLAN Name O VLAN List e g 1 4 6 Port List fe g 1 4 6 Group IGMP Snooping Host Table Total Entries 0 WLAN ID Group Port Wo IGMP Host Figure 7 27 IGMP Snooping Host window Click the corresponding radio button enter the VLAN Name VLAN List Port List or the Group to view IGMP snooping host information and click Find The searched entries will be displayed in the lower half of the window MLD Snooping Browse MLD Router Port This window displays which of the Switch s ports are currently configured as router ports in IPv6 A router port configured by a user using the console or Web based management interfaces is displayed as a static router port designated by S A router port that is dynamically configured by the Switch and is designated by D whereas a Forbidden port is designated by F Enter a VID VLAN ID in the field at the top of the window and click the Find button to display the various types of MLD router ports that belong to the specified VLAN To view this window click Monitoring gt MLD Snooping gt Browse MLD Router Port VLAN Mame default Total Entries 1 Note S Static Router Port D Dynamic Router Port F Forbidden Router Port Figure 7 28 Browse MLD Router Port window 236 IND IN TQ IOQ ODQE aunar ICUO 1 U LOZO ZO AVE MLD Snooping Group The following window allows the user to view MLD Sno
358. through Web Login failed through Web SSL due to AAA server timeout Informational SSL or improper configuration ho through Web SSL a SS IS MAMAS Informational 204 Web SSL session timed Web SSL session timed out Username lt username gt ae Informational out IP lt ipaddr gt Successful login through _ Successful login through Telnet Username lt username gt Telnet IP lt ipaddr gt Informational Telnet Login failed through Telnet Username lt username gt IP Login failed through Telnet lt ipaddr gt Logout through Telnet Username lt username gt IP lt ipaddr gt l l Telnet session timed out Username lt username gt IP Telnet session timed out lt ipaddr gt Informational SNMP request received with invalid community string Topology changed Instance lt InstancelD gt TP Topology changed port lt portNum gt Informational CIST CIST Regional MSTI Regional New Root bridge Logout through Telnet Informational SNMP request received from lt ipAddress gt with invalid SNMP community string o D D 5 5 3 5 O O New Root selected selected Instance lt InstancelD gt JMAC lt macaddr gt Informational Priority lt value gt Spanning Tree Protocol is Informational enabled Spanning Tree Protocol is enabled Spanning Tree Protocol is disabled Informational Spanning Tree Protocol is disabled Root restriction enabled Port
359. time Contrast with full duplex 271 IP address Internet Protocol address A unique identifier for a device attached to a network using TCP IP The address is written as four octets separated with full stops periods and is made up of a network section an optional subnet section and a host section IPX Internetwork Packet Exchange A protocol allowing communication in a NetWare network LAN Local Area Network A network of connected computing resources such as PCs printers servers covering a relatively small geographic area usually not larger than a floor or building Characterized by high data rates and low error rates latency The delay between the time a device receives a packet and the time the packet is forwarded out of the destination port line speed See baud rate main port The port in a resilient link that carries data traffic in normal operating conditions MDI Medium Dependent Interface An Ethernet port connection where the transmitter of one device is connected to the receiver of another device MDI X Medium Dependent Interface Cross over An Ethernet port connection where the internal transmit and receive lines are crossed MIB Management Information Base Stores a device s management characteristics and parameters MIBs are used by the Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP to contain attributes of their managed systems The Switch contains its own internal MIB multicast Single packets copied t
360. tion Server The Authentication Server is a remote device that is connected to the same network as the Client and Authenticator must be running a RADIUS Server program and must be configured properly on the Authenticator Switch Clients connected to a port on the Switch must be authenticated by the Authentication Server RADIUS before attaining any services offered by the Switch on the LAN The role of the Authentication Server is to certify the identity of the Client attempting to access the network by exchanging secure information between the RADIUS server and the Client through EAPOL packets and in turn informs the Switch whether or not the Client is granted access to the LAN and or switches services Authentication Server Figure 5 13 The Authentication Server Authenticator The Authenticator the Switch is an intermediary between the Authentication Server and the Client The Authenticator serves two purposes when utilizing the 802 1X function The first purpose is to request certification information from the Client through EAPOL packets which is the only information allowed to pass through the Authenticator before access is granted to the Client The second purpose of the Authenticator is to verify the information gathered from the Client with the Authentication Server and to then relay that information back to the Client Three steps must be implemented on the Switch to properly configure the Authenticator 1 The 802 1X state m
361. tly affect the overall performance of the switch network To help rectify this packet storm the Switch will monitor and control the situation The packet storm is monitored to determine if too many packets are flooding the network based on the threshold level provided by the user Once a packet storm has been detected the Switch will drop packets coming into the Switch until the storm has subsided This method can be utilized by selecting the Drop option of the Action field in the window below The Switch will also scan and monitor packets coming into the Switch by monitoring the Switch s chip counter This method is only viable for Broadcast and Multicast storms because the chip only has counters for these two types of packets Once a storm has been detected that is once the packet threshold set below has been exceeded the Switch will shutdown the port to all incoming traffic with the exception of STP BPDU packets for a time period specified using the CountDown field If the packet storm discontinues before the Countdown timer expires the port will again allow all incoming traffic If this field times out and the packet storm continues the port will be placed in a Shutdown Rest mode which will produce a warning message to be sent to the Trap Receiver Once in Shutdown Rest mode the port will be recovered after 5 minutes or the user manually resets the port using the Port Configuration window in the Configuration folder and selecting the disabled
362. to in this manual simply as an MD exists in a hierarchical relationship to other MDs Typically a large MAN or WAN can be partitioned into a hierarchy based on the size of domain that mirrors the structural relationship of customers service providers and operators The service providers have end to end service responsibility while operators provide service transport across subnetworks The hierarchy is defined by a maintenance level value ranging from O to 7 where 7 is the highest level and O the lowest level The larger the MD is the higher its maintenance level will be For example if the customer domain is the largest MD it should be assigned a maintenance level of 7 the operator MD being the smallest receives a maintenance level of 0 with the service provider domain being in between these values Maintenance levels are manually assigned by the network administrator All levels of the MD hierarchy must operate together Nesting of MDs is allowed however they cannot intersect since this violates the requirement that management of MDs be done by a single owner If two or more domains are nested the outer domain must be assigned a higher maintenance level than the nested domains CFM operations and message exchanges are conducted on a per domain basis This means for example that CFM operating at level 3 does not allow discovery of the level 3 network by higher levels Maintenance Association A maintenance association MA in CFM is a set of M
363. ton To view this window click Monitoring gt Browse VLAN VLAN ID 1 WLAN Marne default VLAN Type Static Advertisement Enabled Total Entries 1 Note T Tagged Port Li Untagged Port F Forbidden Port Figure 7 24 Browse VLAN window IGMP Snooping The following windows are used to configure the IGMP Snooping settings of the Switch Browse IGMP Router Port This window displays which of the Switch s ports are currently configured as router ports A router port configured by a user using the console or Web based management interfaces is displayed as a static router port designated by S A router port that is dynamically configured by the Switch is designated by D while a Forbidden port is designated by F Enter a VID VLAN ID in the field at the top of the window and click the Find button to display the various types of IGMP router ports that belong to the specified VLAN To view this window click Monitoring gt IGMP Snooping gt Browse IGMP Router Port 234 VLAR Mame default Total Entries 2 Note 5 Static Router Port O Dynamic Router Port F Forbidden Router Port Figure 7 25 Browse Router Port window IGMP Snooping Group This window allows the Switch s IGMP Snooping Group Table to be searched IGMP snooping allows the Switch to read the Multicast Group IP address and source IP address from IGMP packets that pass through the Switch The number of IGMP reports that are snooped are display
364. tor Admin level privileges using authentication methods on the Switch Once a user acquires normal user level privileges on the Switch he or she must be authenticated by a method on the Switch to gain administrator privileges on the Switch which is defined by the Administrator A maximum of eight Enable Method Lists can be implemented on the Switch one of which is a default Enable Method List This default Enable Method List cannot be deleted but can be config ured The sequence of methods implemented in this command will affect the authentication result For example if a user enters a sequence of methods like TACACS XTACACS Local Enable the Switch will send an authentication request to the first TACACS host in the server group If no verification is found the Switch will send an authentication request to the second TACACS host in the server group and so on until the list is exhausted At that point the Switch will restart the same sequence with the following protocol listed XTACACS If no authentication takes place using the XTACACS list the Local Enable password set in the Switch is used to authenticate the user Successful authentication using any of these methods will give the user an Admin privilege 166 NOTE To set the Local Enable Password see the next section entitled Local Enable Password To view the following table click Security gt Access Authentication Control gt Enable Method Lists Method List Name Max
365. tries 0 MAC Address Model Mame Firmware Version Figure 2 56 Firmware Upgrade window Configuration File Backup Restore This window is used to upgrade configuration files from the Commander Switch to the Member Switch using a TFTP server Member Switches will be listed in the table and will be specified by ID Port port on the CS where the MS resides MAC Address Model Name and Firmware Version To update the configuration file enter the Server IP Address where the file resides and enter the Path Filename of the configuration file Click Restore to initiate the file transfer from a TFTP server to the Switch Click Backup to backup the configuration file to a TFTP server To access the following window click Configuration gt Single IP Management gt Configuration File Backup Restore Server P Address Fath i Filename Total Entries 0 MAC Address Model Marne Firmware Version Figure 2 57 Configuration File Backup Restore window 55 Upload Log File The following window is used to upload log files from SIM member switches to a specified PC To upload a log file enter the Server IP address of the SIM member switch and then enter a Path Filename on your PC where you wish to save this file Click Upload to initiate the file transfer To view this window click Configuration gt Single IP Management gt Upload Log File server IF Address Path Filename Upload Total Entries 0 MAC Address Model Name Firmware Version
366. tries on the Switch To view this window click Monitoring gt CFM gt CFM MIPCCM Table as shown below Total Entries 0 MA MAC Address Figure 7 38 CFM MIPCCM Table 241 A Crank NESC_29NN_ 10 1 8 98 98E I avar 2 Etharnat Mananed Switch lear Mania Stack DES 3200 10 18 28 28F Layer 2 Ethernet Managed Switch User Manual MAC based Access Control Authentication State This window allows the user to view the MAC based Access Control authentication information Specify the port list to view and click Find To remove an entry enter the appropriate information and click Clear By Port Click View All Hosts to see all the entries To remove all hosts click Clear All Hosts To view this window click Monitoring gt MAC based Access Control Authentication State Port List e 9 1 5 10 View All Hosts Clear All Hosts Port MAC Address VLAN ID Priority Aging Time Hold Time Figure 7 39 MAC based Access Control Authentication State menu Browse Session Table This window displays the management sessions since the Switch was last rebooted To view the Browse Session Table window click Monitoring gt Browse Session Table Live Tim E From Mame 0 00 00 03 23 10 06 00 53 80 Serial Port Anonymous Figure 7 40 Browse Session Table window 242 MAC Address Table This allows the Switch s dynamic MAC address forwarding table to be viewed When the Switch learns an association between a MAC address and
367. trol When connected to an end station that also supports auto negotiation the link can self detect its optimum operating setup backbone port A port which does not learn device addresses and which receives all frames with an unknown address Backbone ports are normally used to connect the Switch to the backbone of your network Note that backbone ports were formerly known as designated downlink ports backbone The part of a network used as the primary path for transporting traffic between network segments bandwidth Information capacity measured in bits per second that a channel can transmit The bandwidth of Ethernet is 10Mbps the bandwidth of Fast Ethernet is 100Mbps baud rate The switching speed of a line Also known as line speed between network segments BOOTP The BOOTP protocol allows you to automatically map an IP address to a given MAC address each time a device is started In addition the protocol can assign the subnet mask and default gateway to a device bridge A device that interconnects local or remote networks no matter what higher level protocols are involved Bridges form a single logical network centralizing network administration broadcast A message sent to all destination devices on the network broadcast storm Multiple simultaneous broadcasts that typically absorb available network bandwidth and can cause network failure console port The port on the Switch accepting a terminal or modem connector It cha
368. try 141 DHCP Snooping Entries This window is used to view dynamic entries on specific ports To view particular port settings enter the port number and click Find To view all entries click View All and to delete an entry click Clear To view this window click Security gt IP MAC Port Binding gt DHCP Snooping Entries View All Total Entries 0 IP Address MAC Address Lease Timefsecs Figure 5 7 DHCP Snooping Entries window MAC Block List This window is used to view unauthorized devices that have been blocked by IP MAC binding restrictions To find an unauthorized device that has been blocked by the IP MAC binding restrictions enter the VID and MAC Address in the appropriate fields and click Find To delete an entry click the delete button next to the entry s port To display all the MAC blocked entries click View All To delete all the entries in the window click Delete All To view this window click Security gt IP MAC Port Binding gt MAC Block List MAC Address 00 00 00 00 00 00 View All Delete All Total Entries 0 VLAN Mame MAC Address Figure 5 8 MAC Block List window Port Security Port Security is a security feature that prevents unauthorized computers with source MAC addresses unknown to the Switch prior to locking the port or ports from connecting to the Switch s locked ports and gaining access to the network Port Security Port Settings A given ports or a range
369. ts enter the ports and click Clear To view this window click Monitoring gt Ethernet OAM gt Browse Ethernet OAM Statistics as shown below BROW AA ORN sla TTT Port List e 9 1 4 6 pF tt Ports Ethernet OAM Statistics Information o information OAMPDU Rx Unique Event Notification CAMPO Tx Unique Event Notification OAMPDU Rx Duplicate Event Notification OAMPDL Tx Duplicate Event Notification OAMPDU Rx Loopback Control OAMPD Tx Loopback Control OAMPDU Rx Variable Request OAMPDU Tx Variable Request OAMPDU Rx Variable Response OAMPDU Tx Variable Response OAMPDU Rx Organization Specific OAMP DUS Tx Organization Specific OAMPDUs Rx Unsupported OAMPDU Tx Unsupported OAMPDU Rx Frames Lost Due To OAM Port 2 Information CAMPO Tx Unique Event Notification OAMPDU Tx Duplicate Event Notification GAMP DUJ Tx Loopback Control OAMPDU Tx Information CAMPO Rx Unique Event Notification OAMPDU Rix Duplicate Event Notification OAMPDU Rx Loopback Control OAMPDU Rx Variable Request OAMPDU Rx Variable Response OAMPDU Rx Organization Specific OAMPDUs Rx Unsupported OAMPDL Variable Request OAMPDU Tx Variable Response OAMPDU Tx Organization Specific OAMPDUs Tx Unsupported CAMPO Tx Frames Lost Due To OAM eon eo ceo 4 5000006000 Information CAMPDU Tx Unique Event Notification OAMPDL Tx Duplicate Event Notification OAMPDU Tx Loopback Control OAMPDU Tx Variable Request OAMPDU Tx Variable Response CAMPO Tx Organization Specific
370. umption DES 3200 10 12 7W DES 3200 18 13 2W DES 3200 26 13 8W DES 3200 28 18 4W DES 3200 28F 46 7W Internal Power Supply DES 3200 10 DES 3200 18 34W AC Input 100 240 VAC 12V 2A 5V 2A 50 60Hz DES 3200 26 24W AC Input 100 240 VAC 12V 2A 50 60Hz DES 3200 28 40W AC Input 100 240 VAC 12V 3 3A 50 60Hz DES 3200 28F 60W AC Input 100 240 VAC 12V 5A 50 60Hz DC Fans DES 3200 10 DES 3200 18 DES 3200 26 DES 3200 28 None DES 3200 28F One fan Operating Temperature 0 40 C Storage Temperature 40 70 C Humidity 5 95 non condensing DES 3200 10 18 228 5 W x 180 D x 44 H mm DES 3200 26 28 28F 441 W x 207 D x 44 H mm DES 3200 10 1 4553kg DES 3200 18 1 5022kg DES 3200 26 2 28kg DES 3200 28 2 40kg DES 3200 28F 2 68kg Em eE Chass A FCC Class A C Tick VCCI Safety CB Report UL Performance 148 810 pps 100M port Forwarding Rate 1 488 100 pps 1Gbps port Forwarding Table Age Time Max age 10 1000000 seconds Default 300 201 LED Indicators Power Green Per Device Console Green Blinking POST is in progress POST is failure Light off Console off When there is a secure 100Mbps Fast Ethernet Solid Green connection or link at any of the ports When there is reception or transmission i e Blinking Green Activity Act of data occurring at a Fast space Ethernet connected port li Link Act Speed Green Amber a When there is a secure 10Mbps Ethernet LED Per 10 100 Solid Amber Mbps P
371. ure VLAN Mame default 01 02 03 04 05 06 OF 08 of 10 E E E E E E E EE eee Forbidden Router Port E E E E Dynamic Router Port Figure 3 39 MLD Snooping Router Ports Settings window Select the desired router ports and then click Apply to implement any changes made To select either all of the static router ports or all of the forbidden router ports click the corresponding Select All button To clear either all of the selected static router ports or all of the selected forbidden router ports click the corresponding Clear All button Click lt lt Back to return to the MLD Snooping Settings window 93 Port Mirror The Switch allows you to copy frames transmitted and received on a port and redirect the copies to another port You can attach a monitoring device to the mirrored port such as a sniffer or an RMON probe to view details about the packets passing through the first port This is useful for network monitoring and troubleshooting purposes To view this window click Layer 2 Features gt Port Mirror Mirror Port State Disabled Enabled Target Fort E Source Fort Sniffer Mode Source Port Settings Sniffer Mode 1 Figure 3 40 Port Mirror window To configure a mirror port 1 Change the status to Enabled 2 Select the Target Port which receives the copies from the source port 3 Select the Source Port from where the frames come from 4 Click Apply to let the changes take effect NOTE You cannot m
372. user to choose a desired method for altering the MSTI settings The user has two choices Add VID Select this parameter to add VIDs to the MSTI ID in conjunction with the VID List parameter Remove VID Select this parameter to remove VIDs from the MSTI ID in conjunction with the VID List parameter VID List 1 4094 This field displays the VLAN IDs associated with the specific MSTI Click Apply for changes to take effect 101 STP Instance Settings The following window displays MSTIs currently set on the Switch To view the following table click L2 Features gt Spanning Tree gt STP Instance Settings STP Priority Settings msio D Priority Total Entries 1 i Instance Status Instance Priority CIST Disabled 327 68 Bridge Priority 32768 S75 ID Ext 0 STP Instance Operational Status MSTP ID Designated Root Bridge External Root Cost Regional Root Bridge Internal Root Cost Designated Bridge Root Port hax Age Forward Delay Remaining Hops Last Topology Change Topology Changes Count Figure 3 45 STP Instance Settings window The following information can be set Parameter Description MSTI ID Displays the MSTI ID of the instance being modified An entry of 0 in this field denotes the CIST default MSTI This value is created in the MST Configuration menu see above Values allowed for MSTI ID range from 1 8 Priority Enter the new priority in the Priority field The user may
373. ust be Enabled Security 802 1X 802 1X Settings 2 The 802 1X settings must be implemented by port Security 802 1X 802 1X Settings 3 A RADIUS server must be configured on the Switch Security 802 1X Authentic RADIUS Server I Workstation Client Switch Authenticator RADIUS Server Authentication Server Figure 5 14 The Authenticator 145 xStack DES 3200 10 18 28 28F Layer 2 Ethernet Managed Switch User Manual NOTE When configuring the Authentication Protocol as local the Switch has two roles Authenticator and Authentication Server Client The Client is simply the end station that wishes to gain access to the LAN or switch services All end stations must be running software that is compliant with the 802 1X protocol For users running Windows XP that software is included within the operating system All other users are required to attain 802 1X client software from an outside source The Client will request access to the LAN and or Switch through EAPOL packets and in turn will respond to requests from the Switch Switch Authenticator RADIUS Server Authentication Server Workstation Client Figure 5 15 The Client Authentication Process Utilizing the three roles stated above the 802 1X protocol provides a stable and secure way of authorizing and authenticating users attempting to access the network Only EAPOL traffic is allowed to pass through the spec
374. ve remote CFM remote down MD Level lt mdlevel gt VLAN lt vlanid gt Warnin MEP s CCM packet Local Port lt portNum gt Direction lt mepdirection gt J l CFM remote MAC error MD Level lt mdlevel gt rene VLAN lt vlanid gt Local Port lt portNum gt Warning reports an error status Di vee irection lt mepdirection gt CFM remote detects a defect MD Level lt mdlevel gt VLAN lt vlanid gt Local Port lt portNum gt Informational Direction lt mepdirection gt DRCT PEIGI dead Detected untrusted DHCP server IP lt ipaddr gt Informational Screening server IP address Remote MEP detects CFM defects DES 3200 Series Trap List Trap Name OID Variable Bind Format MIB Name coldStart V2 RFC1907 1 3 6 1 6 3 1 1 5 1 SNMPv2 MIB warmStart RFC1907 1 3 6 1 6 3 1 1 5 2 SNMPv2 MIB authenticationFailure RFC1907 1 3 6 1 6 3 1 1 5 5 SNMPv2 MIB linkDown ifIndex RFC2863 1 3 6 1 6 3 1 1 5 3 ifAdminStatus IF MIB ifOperStatus linkup ifindex RFC2863 1 3 6 1 6 3 1 1 5 4 ifAdminStatus IF MIB ifOperStatus 263 topologyChange None V2 RFC1493 1 3 6 1 2 1 17 0 2 BRIDGE MIB V2 r c2819 risingAlarm alarmindex 1 3 6 1 2 1 16 0 1 alarmVariable alarmSampleType RMON MIB alarmValue alarmRising Threshold fallingAlarm alarmindex V2 r c2819 1 3 6 1 2 1 16 0 2 alarmVariable RMON MIB alarmSampleType alarmValue alarmFalling Threshold LidpRemTablesChange IlldpStatsRemT ablesInserts V2 LL
375. w Zzero IF FOP Mode SLT 0 500 Wax Entry 1 10 C No Limit v Disabled w Enabled w ARP wooo w Disabled Apply Hote FDP Forward DHCP Packet SLT Stop Learning Threshold Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Micohined Allow Zero IP Mot Allow Mot Allow Mot Allow Mot Alloy Mot Allow Mot Allow Mot Allow Mot Allow Mot Allow Mot Allow Mot Allow Mot Alloy Mot Allow Mot Allow Mot Allow Mot Allow Mot Allow Mot Allow Mot Allow Mot Alloy Mot Allow Mot Allow Mot Allow Mot Alloy A A Forward DHEP Packet Mode SLT Mode SOOMormal 500 MHormal 500 MNormal 500 MNormal S00sMormal 500 MHormal SO OMormal 500 Mormal 500 Mormal 500 MHormal 500 MNormal 500 MNormal 500MHorrmal 500 MHormal 500MHormal 500 Mormal 500 Mormal 500 MHormal SOOMormal 500 Mormal 500Horrmal 500 MHormal 500 MHormal 500 Mormal EPR La ere al Figure 5 5 IMP Binding Port Settings window Max Entry n 75 A A nn 4 2 4 2 ih Ua ah hh hh MM oh The following fields can be set or modified Parameter Description Select a port or range of ports to set for IP MAC Binding Use the pull down menu to Enable or Disable these ports for IP MAC Binding From Port To Port Enabled Strict This mode provides a stricter metho
376. w in the Configuration folder This is identical to creating any other admin level User Account on the Switch including specifying a password This password is used to logon to the Switch once a secure communication path has been established using the SSH protocol 2 Configure the User Account to use a specified authorization method to identify users that are allowed to establish SSH connections with the Switch using the SSH User Authentication window There are three choices as to the method SSH will use to authorize the user which are Host Based Password and Public Key 3 Configure the encryption algorithm that SSH will use to encrypt and decrypt messages sent between the SSH client and the SSH server using the SSH Authmode and Algorithm Settings window 4 Finally enable SSH on the Switch using the SSH Settings window After completing the preceding steps a SSH Client on a remote PC can be configured to manage the Switch using a secure in band connection 157 SSH Settings The following window is used to configure and view settings for the SSH server To view this window click Security gt SSH gt SSH Settings SSH Server State Disabled Enabled SSH Global Settings Max Session 1 3 Connection Timeout 120 600 Authtail Stternpts 2 20 Rekey Timeout Figure 5 29 SSH Settings window To configure the SSH server on the Switch modify the following parameters and click Apply Parameter Descri
377. wed BOOTP IP address that determines where packets with a destination address outside the current subnet should be sent This is usually the address of a router or a host acting as an IP gateway If your network is not part of an intranet or you do not want the Switch to be accessible outside your local network you can leave this field unchanged DHCP Option 12 Use to enable or disable DHCP Option 12 State DHCP Option 12 Type the name of the host used for Option 12 Up to 63 characters are allowed Host Name Click Apply to allow changes to take effect Gateway xStack DES 3200 10 18 28 28F Layer 2 Ethernet Managed Switch User Manual g Setting the Switch s IP Address using the Console Interface Each Switch must be assigned its own IP Address which is used for communication with an SNMP network manager or other TCP IP application for example BOOTP TFTP The Switch s default IP address is 10 90 90 90 You can change the default Switch IP address to meet the specification of your networking address scheme The IP address for the Switch must be set before it can be managed with the Web based manager The Switch IP address can be automatically set using BOOTP or DHCP protocols in which case the actual address assigned to the Switch must be known The IP address may be set using the Command Line Interface CLI over the console serial port as follows Starting at the command line prompt enter the commands config ip
378. window The Topology window holds the following information under the Data tab Parameter Description Device Name This field will display the Device Name of the switches in the SIM group configured by the user If no Device Name is configured by the name it will be given the name default and tagged with the last six digits of the MAC Address to identify it Remote Port Displays the number of the physical port on the MS or CaS that the CS is connected to The CS will have no entry in this field Displays the connection speed between the CS and the MS or CaS Local Port Displays the number of the physical port on the CS that the MS or CaS is connected to The CS will have no entry in this field MAC Address Displays the MAC address of the corresponding Switch Model Name Displays the full model name of the corresponding Switch 49 To view the Topology Map click the View menu in the toolbar and then Topology which will produce the following window The Topology View will refresh itself periodically 20 seconds by default Topology Cluster 1 default 01 01 00 default 33 13 00 default 38 29 00 default 1 0 24 04 default 00 36 1 8 default 01 01 00 default B8 28 00 default 00 00 01 default 35 26 03 Java Applet Window Figure 2 44 Topology view This window will display how the devices within the Single IP Management Group are connected to other groups and devices Possible icons in this window a
379. wing window pa UDIO3d LOC AA O e Figure 8 5 Upload Log File window Reset The Reset function has several options when resetting the Switch Some of the current configuration parameters can be retained while resetting all other configuration parameters to their factory defaults NOTE Only the Reset System option will enter the factory default parameters into the Switch s non volatile RAM and then restart the Switch All other options enter the factory defaults into the current configuration but do not save this configuration Reset System will return the Switch s configuration to the state it was when it left the factory NOTE The serial port s baud rate will not be changed by the reset command It will not be restored to the factory default setting Reset gives the option of retaining the Switch s User Accounts and History Log while resetting all other configuration parameters to their factory defaults If the Switch is reset using this window and Save Changes is not executed the Switch will return to the last saved configuration when rebooted Open the Tools drop down menu on the left hand side of the menu bar at the top of the Web manager and click Reset System to open the following window Reset Proceed with system reset except IF address log user account and banner Reset Config Switch will be resetto factory defaults Reset System Switch willbe resetto factory defaults and reboot Figur
380. y button The following parameters may be configured or viewed 17 Parameter Description Automatic Link Toggle between Enabled and Disabled Enabling this is helpful when no external source of network Local Address addressing information is available NS Retransmit Enter a value between 0 and 4294967295 This is the neighbor solicitation s retransmit timer in Time 0 milliseconds The default is zero 4294967295 IPv6 Route Settings The user can configure the Switch s IPv6 Route Table To view the following window click Configuration gt IPv6 Route Settings IPv Default Gateway IP Interface Default Gateway Metric 1 65535 remeras Total Entries 0 Pretix Next Hop IF Infterface Protocol Metric Figure 2 6 IPv6 Route Settings window Enter an IP Interface an IPv6 address in the Default Gateway field and then click the Create button In addition the Metric can be entered between 7 and 65535 The new IPv6 route will be displayed in the table at the bottom of the window IPv6 Neighbor Settings The user can configure the Switch s IPv6 neighbor settings The Switch s current IPv6 neighbor settings will be displayed in the table at the bottom of this window To view the following window click Configuration gt IPv6 Neighbor Settings Interface Name Interface Name Total Entries 0 Link Layer Address Interface Figure 2 7 IPv6 Neighbor Settings window Enter the Interfa

Download Pdf Manuals

image

Related Search

Related Contents

Sencor SLE 1956M4  

Copyright © All rights reserved.
Failed to retrieve file